JP2015196053A - game board - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game board with improved interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game board of a Pachinko game machine controls its reservation display symbol's display mode either in a normal mode (blue color), a special mode (white or gray color), or an advance notice mode (yellow, green, red, or rainbow color). The special mode is more likely to change to the advance notice mode than the normal mode. The display mode of a specific display is controlled in such a manner that a ratio to become a big win game state differs between when the display mode of the specific display is set in the special mode at a first timing and when changed to the special mode at a second timing later than the first timing.

Description

  The present invention changes the variable winning means that can be changed to either the first state that is advantageous to the player or the second state that is disadvantageous to the player to the first state based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The present invention relates to a game board used for a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is something that was configured. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to give the player.

  The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. When it is made, “big hit (specific game state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Some of such gaming machines are configured to include a plurality of large winning openings (variable winning means). For example, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 includes a first grand prize opening (first variable prize winning means) and a second big prize winning opening (second variable prize winning means), and a long win (first specific gaming state). ), It is described that the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening are alternately controlled to be opened. In addition, when it is determined to be short hit (second specific gaming state) and when it is determined to be small hit (special gaming state), only the first big winning opening is controlled to the open state. In addition, it is described that the first big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state in a common open mode.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2011-234981 (paragraphs 0093, 0094, 0114, 0115, FIG. 8)

  Using the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when controlling to the first specific gaming state, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are changed to the first state (open state) in a predetermined order. Can do. However, the change mode (open mode) of the variable winning means does not change through the first specific gaming state, and the change mode of the variable winning means is not interesting, and it is not always possible to sufficiently enhance the interest in the game.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to make it possible to pay attention to the change mode of the variable winning means in a game board provided with a plurality of variable winning means, and to improve the interest in the game.

  (Means 1) The game board according to the present invention is disadvantageous for the first state (for example, open state) advantageous to the player and the player based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, occurrence of big hit or small hit). The variable winning means (for example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a and the second special variable winning ball device 20b) that can be changed to any of the second state (for example, the closed state) is changed to the first state. The variable winning means includes a first variable winning means (for example, a first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a) and a second variable winning means (for example, a second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b). , A first specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit or a probable big hit) that changes the variable winning means to the first state for a first period (for example, 29 seconds), and a variable winning means over the first period Short second phase A second specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a sudden probability changing big hit) which is controlled to a gaming state (for example, a probability changing state) different from the normal gaming state after changing to the first state (for example, for 1 second); A gaming state that is controllable to a special gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state after the variable winning means is changed to the first state for the second period. Control means (for example, a part for executing steps S305 to S310 in the game control microcomputer 560) and winning means including the variable winning means (for example, the first start winning port 13, the second starting winning port 14, the big prize) It is possible to specify the winning means and the number of prizes that the game medium has won among the mouths (first special variable winning ball device 20a, second special variable winning ball device 20b) and winning mouth). Signal output means for outputting signals (for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc.) (for example, a portion that executes information output processing in the CPU 56 that has executed game control main processing) When controlling to the second specific gaming state and controlling to the special gaming state, the state control means sets either one of the first variable winning means or the second variable winning means to the second period. The state is changed to the first state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S305 to S307 using the release pattern data for sudden probability change big hit shown in FIG. The first big prize opening is opened according to the opening pattern shown in FIG. 22 and steps S308 to S31 are performed using the opening pattern data for small hits shown in FIG. By executing 0, the first big prize opening is opened according to the opening pattern shown in FIG. 9B), and when controlling to the first specific gaming state, the first variable winning means or the second variable winning means After changing one of the variable winning means to the first state for the first period, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are changed to the first state in a predetermined order (for example, game control The microcomputer 560 executes the steps S305 to S307 using the normal big hit / probable big hit open pattern data shown in FIG. 21 to thereby execute the first big winning opening and the first winning opening according to the open pattern shown in FIG. It is characterized by the fact that the two major winning openings are opened). With such a configuration, the change mode of the variable winning means changes after the first period in the first specific gaming state, so in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of variable winning means, attention is paid to the changing mode of the variable winning means. Can improve the interest of the game.

  (Means 2) The game board according to the present invention is disadvantageous to the first state (for example, open state) advantageous to the player and the player based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, occurrence of big hit or small hit). The variable winning means (for example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a and the second special variable winning ball device 20b) that can be changed to any of the second state (for example, the closed state) is changed to the first state. The variable winning means includes a first variable winning means (for example, a first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a) and a second variable winning means (for example, a second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b). Specific game state control means for controlling the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means to a specific gaming state that changes to the first state according to a predetermined order (for example, the step in the game control microcomputer 560). A portion for executing S305 to S310) and winning means including the variable winning means (for example, a first start winning opening 13, a second starting winning opening 14, a large winning opening (first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a, second) A signal (for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc.) that can specify the winning means and the number of winning points that the game medium has won out of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20b) and the winning opening) is output. Signal output means (for example, a part that executes an information output process in the CPU 56 that has executed the game control main process), and the specific game state control means sets the variable winning means as a specific game state in a first period (for example, 29 seconds) a first specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit or a probable big hit) and a variable winning means that is shorter than the first period in the second period When it is possible to control to a second specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state based on a sudden probability change big hit) that is changed to the first state (for example, for 1 second). In comparison with the case of controlling to the first specific gaming state, either one of the first variable winning means or the second variable winning means is changed to the second state and then the other variable winning means is changed. Control is made so that the disadvantageous period until the winning means is changed to the first state becomes longer (for example, as shown in FIG. 9, after closing the first big winning opening in the big hit game based on the normal big hit or the probable big hit) The closing time T3 (for example, 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds) until the opening of the second grand prize opening in the next round and the second big prize opening are closed, and then the first big prize opening in the next round. Until the opening of The closing of the first big prize opening in the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit starts from the closing time T4 (for example, 1 second + 1 second = 2 seconds), and then the opening of the second big prize opening is started in the second round. The closing time T5 (for example, 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds) is longer). With such a configuration, while the disadvantage period is relatively short in the first specific gaming state, the disadvantage period is relatively long in the second specific gaming state, so in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of variable winning means It is possible to effectively control the disadvantage period and improve the interest in the game.

  (Means 3) In the means 1, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are different in the ease of winning the game medium (for example, the second special variable winning ball device 20b has the first special variable winning prize). The game state control means is a variable winning means that makes it difficult for a game medium to win when controlling to the second specific game state and when controlling to the special game state. Is changed to the first state for the second period (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S305 to S307 by using the release pattern data for sudden probability variation big hit shown in FIG. In accordance with the opening pattern shown in FIG. 9 (B), the first big winning opening that is difficult to win is opened, and steps S308 to S are performed using the opening pattern data for small hits shown in FIG. 22 (B). By performing the 10, to open the first special winning opening towards the hard winning accordance opening pattern shown in FIG. 9 (B)) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is difficult for the game medium to win the variable winning means in the second specific game state and the special game state, so that the game can be sharpened and the interest in the game can be improved.

  (Means 4) In the means 1, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are different in the ease of winning the game medium (for example, the second special variable winning ball device 20b has the first special variable winning prize). In the case of controlling to the second specific gaming state, the game state control means sets the variable winning means that is difficult for the game medium to be won in the first state for the second period. (For example, when the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S308 to S310 using the opening pattern data for small hits, the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening are opened. Both of them may be configured to open the first big winning opening that is hard to win a prize). According to such a configuration, it is difficult for the game medium to win the variable winning means in the second specific gaming state, so that the game can be sharpened and the interest in the game can be improved.

  (Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the first variable winning means is provided at an upstream position where the game medium flows down (for example, as shown in FIG. 1, the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a is arranged on the upstream side), and the second variable winning means is provided at a downstream position where the game medium flows down (for example, as shown in FIG. 1, the second special variable winning ball device 20b is arranged on the downstream side). The gaming state control means changes the first variable winning means to the second state when changing the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means to the first state according to a predetermined order. Is shorter than the period from when the second variable winning means is changed to the first state to when the second variable winning means is changed to the second state until the first variable winning means is changed to the first state. The first variable winning means and 2 variable prize winning means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9, the closing time T3 from when the first big prize opening is closed to when the second big prize opening is started in the next round is (The closing time T4 from when the two major winning openings are closed until the opening of the first major winning opening is started in the next round may be shorter). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the variable winning means to win the game medium, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  (Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the abnormal winning notification means for notifying the abnormal winning of the game medium to the variable winning means (for example, steps S2126, S2127, and S2130 in the game control microcomputer 560). The abnormal winning notification means detects an abnormal winning of the game medium to the first variable winning means, and detects an abnormal winning of the game medium to the second variable winning means, Abnormal winning is notified in a different notification mode (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S2130 to turn on the abnormality notification LED 24a when Y in step S2129, whereas in step S2124 Y and step When S2125 is N, step S2126 is executed to turn on the abnormality notification LED 24b. To) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize to which variable winning means the abnormal winning has occurred.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the opening pattern of a big prize opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of open pattern data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of open pattern data. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of the prize alerting | reporting process in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the big prize opening opening in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the opening pattern of the big prize opening in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the open pattern data in a modification. It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows a mode before the game board is attached to a front frame, and after being attached. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko game machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko game machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine when a card | curd is inserted in the card unit. It is a flowchart figure which shows the process at the time of insertion which a card unit performs when a card | curd is inserted in a card unit. It is a conceptual diagram for explaining the relationship between a CU state and a card insertion state included in a card insertion notification command and a state information request command. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine when paying out and holding out a ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine when counting game balls. It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the counting process performed automatically when a game hall closes. It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the process of the count history data memorize | stored by P units. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of the process which reads the count log | history memorize | stored in P units to CU. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power-off and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the count response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the count request | requirement from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of the count response from a card unit to a pachinko gaming machine has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of the game ball addition result abnormality at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P platform and CU regarding an addition serial number. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P stand and CU regarding a count serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 1st and 2nd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 3rd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a request serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating another example of the operation | movement regarding a request serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating the opportunity of registration (update) and deletion (clear) of recovery information. It is a figure for demonstrating the encryption key used for communication between a key management server and communication control IC. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between a CU control part and a security chip (SC). It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between a CU control part and a security chip (SC). It is a figure for demonstrating the starting process at the time of power activation of a CU control part, and hall installation. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of power activation and normal start-up of a CU control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the process at the time of the power activation and factory shipment of a CU control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate maker code. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate initial stage key or a board | substrate shipping key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of board | substrate serial ID and a board | substrate authentication key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process in the case of inquiring about security board information. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a board | substrate authentication key authentication abnormality sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of a communication line disconnection (PIF) sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry timeout sequence of security board | substrate information. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry (collation) timeout sequence of gaming machine chip information. It is the schematic for demonstrating the communication performed between a main control part, the payout control part, and communication control IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the payout control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the main control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with communication control IC. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a recovery completion confirmation process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between the main control part and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence between a main control part and a payout control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power-off and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the game state notification from the main control part to the payout control part has not reached | attained. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when P stand connected to the game board development jig is connected to commercial CU by unit exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when P stand connected to CU for development is connected to commercial CU by unit exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when a game machine simulator is connected to commercial CU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process of the operating / non-operating information from a pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the historical information (machine history information) from the shipment of the game machine which concerns on this embodiment to disposal. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until shipping information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of shipping information. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until installation information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the installation information input into a machine history management center in FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow until removal information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow until discard information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the discard information input into a machine history management center. It is the schematic for demonstrating the history management of the front frame and game board which concern on this embodiment. It is the schematic of the table which memorize | stores the information of a frame, and the information of a game board, in order to perform machine history management of a front frame and a game board. 10 is a flowchart for explaining abnormality determination processing for management of a front frame and a game board by a machine history management center. FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating a table referred to in the flowchart shown in FIG. 108. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls (also referred to as game balls) that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for emitting hitting balls. ing. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower plate main body and the like below the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by a player pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  Further, the ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided with abnormality notification LEDs 24a and 24b for performing various abnormality notifications.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always displayed in a variable manner with a constant operation, and since it does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit, and the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit). If it is controllable, the display color may be varied according to the number of rounds that are continued in the big hit game. Short (for example, two short releases for one second), a big hit that cannot be expected to win a game ball to the big prize opening, and a long opening period for the big prize opening (for example, 15 long opening for 29 seconds) Times), if there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening, the display color is changed depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to actually win the big winning opening. Also, for example, when there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening and a big hit that can not be expected due to different number of opening of the big winning opening per round The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to substantially win the big winning opening.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit, and the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit). If it is controllable, the display color may be varied according to the number of rounds that are continued in the big hit game. Short (for example, two short releases for one second), a big hit that cannot be expected to win a game ball to the big prize opening, and a long opening period for the big prize opening (for example, 15 long opening for 29 seconds) Times), if there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening, the display color is changed depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to actually win the big winning opening. Also, for example, when there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening and a big hit that can not be expected due to different number of opening of the big winning opening per round The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to substantially win the big winning opening.

  The display colors when the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off are different from the background image (for example, black) in order to prevent the display colors from being assimilated with the background image when the lights are turned off. It is desirable to be.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won at the second start winning opening 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous to the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a first special variable winning ball device 20 a that forms a first big winning opening is provided on the right side of the variable winning ball device 15. The first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and a specific display result (big hit) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21a, so that the first big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball won in the first grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b that forms a second big winning opening is provided below the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a. The second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and a specific display result (big hit) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21b, so that the second big prize opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball won in the second grand prize opening is detected by the second count switch 23b.

  In this embodiment, when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and controlled to the big hit gaming state, the big hit game During the state, the first special variable winning ball device 20a and the second special variable winning ball device 20b are controlled to be opened according to a predetermined order. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b is larger than the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the second special variable winning ball device 20b is controlled to the open state during the big hit game, the first special variable winning ball device 20a is controlled to the open state. Compared to, game balls are easier to win in the big prize opening. In this embodiment, when the first grand prize opening and the second big prize opening are comprehensively expressed, they may be simply expressed as “large prize opening”.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, both the first special variable winning ball device 20a and the second special variable winning ball device 20b are provided on the right side of the game area 7, and during the big hit game Then, the player can aim to win both the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening by performing the launch operation aiming at the right side of the game area 7. That is, in this embodiment, for example, whether the launch operation is aimed at the left side of the game area 7 in the case of aiming to win the first grand prize opening and the case of aiming to win the second big prize opening. Even if the launch operation method is not changed, such as whether the launch operation is aimed at the right side, by performing the same launch operation (the launch operation aiming at the right side in this example), the first prize winning opening and the second You can aim to win both of the big winning entries.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation is a big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition is easily established. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 is a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  In addition, a card unit that enables ball lending by inserting a game card as a game recording medium such as a prepaid card having a prepaid function is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). .

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Also, an input driver circuit 58 that supplies detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 23b to the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on the main board 31. In addition, a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a solenoid 21a that opens and closes the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a that forms the first large winning opening, and a second special variable winning ball that forms the second large winning opening. An output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21b for opening and closing the device 20b in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, the normal symbol storage memory display 41, and the abnormality notification LEDs 24a and 24b is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs information output signals such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. In addition, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S5). By the processing in step S5, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the RAM 55 in an accessible state (step S6), and proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  Note that a software delay process for delaying the start timing of the game device control process (game control process) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is stopped. Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), This is a portion where data indicating the number of payout prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, a ball-out flag, and the like are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in a flag for performing the above.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (step S15).

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) ( Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 first disables the interrupt (step S17), executes the initial value random number update process (step S18a) and the display random number update process (step S18b), The interrupt is permitted again (step S19). That is, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt disabled state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, and interrupts enable state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are finished. To.

  The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot symbol determining random number for determining a special symbol for generating a jackpot or whether to shift the gaming state to a probable state) Initial value of the count value such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a probability variation determining random number for generating, a normal random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as an effect display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, a ball payout device 97 provided in the gaming machine, or When the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round in a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a gaming apparatus control process), an initial value is set in the counter.

  The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display 8. In this embodiment, as a display random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, or a random number for determining a reach for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated, is used. Used. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  In addition, when the display random number update process is executed, the interrupt disabled state is executed by the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process also in the timer interrupt process described later (that is, the timer This is because the same process is executed in steps S26 and S27 of the interrupt process), so as to avoid conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process. That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S18a and S18b and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of values may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the processing of steps S18a and S18b.

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period during which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A timer interrupt process that is activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt is executed. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Then, the CPU 56 receives detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 23b via the input driver circuit 58. Then, the input of each switch is detected (switch processing: step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S36 and S37.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a winning notification process for detecting an abnormal winning at the winning a prize opening (first winning a prize opening, second winning award) and performing an abnormal winning notification (step S24).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating a random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control (determination random number update process: step S25). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S26). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S27).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S28). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S29). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect symbol command control process: step S30). It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the effect symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, as information to be output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 56, for example, a start port signal supplied to the hall management computer, a symbol determination number 1 signal, a symbol determination number 2 signal, a jackpot 1 to 3 signal, a time signal An information output process for outputting information (data) related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as a number from the information output circuit 64 is performed (step S31).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 23b. (Step S32). Specifically, the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 23b being turned on. The payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S33). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 0 to the output port. (Step S34: Output processing). And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S35).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S36). Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S37).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S38). In this case, when the gaming state is the short time state, the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp indicating the short time state is set in the output buffer. When the gaming state is also controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), state display control data for displaying a state indicator lamp indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. You may do it.

Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S39), and the process is terminated.
With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S39 (excluding steps S31 and 33) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) (In some cases, the probability variation big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is suddenly stopped without being reached.)

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win means that the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as that of the big win, but the opening period per time is extremely short (in this embodiment, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is two times. Less and the opening time per time is as short as 1 second). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change jackpot means that the opening period of the big prize opening is extremely short in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the number of times the big winning opening is opened while the other big hits open the big prize opening 15 times. Is less than twice, and the other big hits are one big hits for 29 seconds, while the other big wins are opened for 29 seconds), and the game state after the big hit game (I.e., it makes it appear to the player as if it has suddenly entered a certain probability change state). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, when the 1-second opening of the big prize opening is performed twice, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state (probable change) State) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  This embodiment shows a case where the number of times of opening the winning prize opening 2 is reduced to 2 and the opening time per time is shortened to 1 second in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit. However, the opening period of the big winning opening at the sudden probability big hit or the small hit is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening is 15 as in the case of other big hits, but only the opening time per time may be shortened (for example, 1 second). Further, for example, the opening time per time may be the same, and only the number of times of opening the grand prize opening may be reduced (for example, twice). In this way, when suddenly probable big hits or small wins, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is reduced or the opening time of the big prize opening per time is shortened as compared with the normal big hit or the probable big hit. By doing so, it is sufficient that the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is smaller than at least the normal big win or the probable big hit.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows. (1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination) (2) Random 2 (MR2): type of variation pattern (class) (For variation pattern type determination) (3) Random 3 (MR3): Determine variation pattern (variation time) (For variation pattern determination) (4) Random 4 (MR4): Generate a hit based on a normal symbol (5) Random 5 (MR5): The initial value of random 4 is determined (for determining random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped by reach type and divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In step S25 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 7A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 7 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 7 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 7A is a jackpot determination value.

  7B and 7C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 7B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 7B and 7C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a sudden probability variation big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 7A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8A and 8B are explanatory diagrams showing jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Of these, FIG. 8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 8B shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b determine that the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine either “probable big success” or “sudden probability big success”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a total of 10 determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (100). On the other hand, in the jackpot type determination table 131b, five judgment values are assigned to “sudden probability change big hit” (5/100). Explain the case where the probability is suddenly determined to be a big hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. In other words, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the second starting prize opening 14 and the second special symbol variation display is executed, the first special symbol is given to the first starting prize opening 13 by starting. The game value is high compared to the case where the variable display is executed (in this example, the winning prize opening is opened 15 times and the opening time of the winning prize opening per time is 29 seconds and the gambling is long. High) The percentage determined as “probable big hit” or “normal big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie. It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (A) and 8 (B), as the first specific gaming state that gives a predetermined amount of gaming value, the big prize opening is opened 15 times and per game As a second specific gaming state that gives a big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit) including a round with a long winning time of 29 seconds and a game value less than the gaming value, or a second specific gaming state As an example, the case where the winning prize opening is opened twice and the opening time of each winning prize opening time is all determined to be 1 second and a sudden probability change big hit will be explained. The method of making the difference is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is reduced as the game value is determined. Also good. Also, for example, even in the case of the same 15 round big hits, a first specific gaming state in which a big winning opening is opened several times per round, and a second specific gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened only once per round. And the game value of the second specific gaming state may be lowered by substantially reducing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. As described above, the game balls are less likely to win the prize winning opening by reducing the number of times the opening of the prize winning opening or shortening the opening time compared to the first specific gaming state. It is sufficient that a specific gaming state is provided.

  In addition, for example, when a certain game state (big hit game state) is controlled to be changed to a probability change state or a time-short state, and then the probability change state or the time-short state is ended when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the probability change You may make it provide the 1st specific game state and the 2nd specific game state which varied the frequency | count of execution of the variable display in which a state and a time-short state are continued. In this case, for example, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the probability changing state or the short time state is continued until the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), and in the case of the second specific gaming state, the variable display is displayed. When the number of times (for example, 20 times) is less than that in the first specific game state, the probability variation state or the short time state may be ended so that the game value becomes lower than that in the first specific game state.

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state and is shifted to a probable change state (high probability state) after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the positive change big win state is entered). At the same time, the state is shifted to the short time state (see steps S167 and S168 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  Further, the “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the 15-round big hit gaming state and is not shifted to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished, but is shifted only to the short-time state (see step S169 described later). . Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, the time reduction state is maintained until the execution of the variable symbol display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S141 to S144 described later). In this embodiment, even if a big hit occurs after the transition to the time reduction state and before the execution of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays is finished, the time reduction state ends (see step S132 described later).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” is a big hit where the number of opening of the big prize opening is less than 2 times and the opening time per time is 1 second shorter than “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the state is controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state) and to the time reduction state (see steps S167 and S168 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, even when the “small hit” is reached, the big winning opening is opened twice for one second, which is the same as the big hit gaming state by “suddenly probable big hit”. Control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained (described later). Steps S145 to S149). By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and corresponding to the “normal big hit”, “probability variable big hit”, and “sudden probable big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  Next, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the big hit and the small hit for each big hit type will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a special winning opening opening pattern. Among these, FIG. 9A shows the opening pattern of the big winning opening at the time of the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit (that is, the big hit of 15 rounds). FIG. 9B shows the opening pattern of the big winning opening at the time of sudden probability change big hit (that is, at the big hit of 2 rounds) or at the small hit.

  First, with reference to FIG. 9A, a description will be given of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot. In this embodiment, when controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit, as shown in FIG. 9 (A), the first big winning opening is controlled to the open state in the first and second rounds. Is done. Next, as shown in FIG. 9A, in the third round, the second grand prize opening is controlled to be in an open state, and thereafter, the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening are alternately controlled to be in an open state. The In addition, when the game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the normal big hit or the probable big hit, as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the closed state is controlled for a predetermined time.

  When the game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the normal big hit or the probable big hit, the time to be controlled to the closed state after the opening of the big winning opening is ended after the opening of the first big winning opening and the second big It differs depending on whether the prize opening is finished. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9A, after the opening of the first big prize opening is finished, the closing time until the second big prize opening is opened in the next round is T3 hours (this example) Then, as will be described later, 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds (see FIG. 21). On the other hand, after the opening of the second big prize opening is finished, the first big prize opening is opened in the next round. The closing time until is T4 time (in this example, as described later, 1 second + 1 second = 2 seconds, see FIG. 21). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9A, the closing time T3 is set to be longer than the closing time T4.

  The reason why T3> T4 is set as described above is as follows. In this embodiment, since the first grand prize opening is arranged above the second big prize opening, the game ball reaches from the first big prize opening to the second big prize opening. There is a slight time difference. For example, even if the timing when the game ball reaches the first grand prize opening is the closing timing of the first big prize opening, the game ball will reach the second grand prize opening. There may be a case where the opening of the second big prize opening is started and the second big prize opening can be won. Therefore, even if the closing time T3 from when the first grand prize opening is closed to when the second big prize opening starts to be opened is slightly longer, the substantial closing time is not so long. On the other hand, since the second grand prize opening is located below the first big prize opening, when the opening of the second big prize opening is finished, the opening of the first big prize opening is completely started. If it becomes impossible to win a prize and the closing time T4 from the closing of the second grand prize opening to the start of opening the first big prize opening is made too long, the substantial closing time will become long. Therefore, in this embodiment, the closing time T3 is set to be longer than the closing time T4 so that the game ball is easily made to the winning prize opening and the interest in the game is improved.

  The game ball passes through the vicinity of the opening of the first grand prize opening without reaching the first grand prize opening provided on the upstream side, and reaches the vicinity of the opening of the second big prize opening on the downstream side. If the time required for this is TX time, the closing time T3 is preferably shorter than the TX time. Further, for example, 100 game balls can be fired continuously for 60 seconds, and the time interval (launch interval) of the game balls when the game balls are fired continuously is 60 seconds / 100 = 0.6 seconds. In this case, the closing time T4 is preferably shorter than the time obtained by subtracting the TX time from the firing interval of 0.6 seconds.

  In this embodiment, the case where the closing time T3 is controlled to be longer than the closing time T4 is shown, but the closing time T3 and the closing time T4 may be the same time. For example, the closing time T4 needs to be somewhat short for the above reason, but the closing time T3 does not necessarily have a long time. Therefore, the closing time T4 should be set as short as the closing time T4. May be.

  In FIG. 9A, there is no particular mention of the closing period from the end of opening the first grand prize opening in the first round until the opening of the first big prize opening in the second round. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the closing period from the end of opening the first big prize opening in the first round to the start of opening the first big prize opening in the second round is the closing time. The same 3 seconds as T3 + 1 seconds = 4 seconds (see FIG. 21).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9B, a description will be given of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the sudden probability change big hit and small hit. In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the sudden probability change big hit, as shown in FIG. 9B, the first big winning opening is controlled to the open state in the first round and the second round. . Further, when controlled to the small hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. 9B, the first big winning opening is controlled twice in the open state in the same manner as the big hit gaming state based on the sudden probability change big hit. . In addition, when controlled to the small hit gaming state, there is no concept of round unlike the big hit gaming state, but in the example shown in FIG. And the opening of the second grand prize opening is expressed as 2R.

  In addition, when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the sudden probability change big hit or the small hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. Then, it controls to an open state for 1 second. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the opening time T2 at the sudden probability variation big hit or small hit is shorter than the opening time T1 at the normal big hit or probability variation big hit (T1>). T2).

  In FIG. 9 (B), the closing time from when the first first prize winning opening is suddenly ended to the start of the second first big winning prize opening in sudden probability big hit or small hit is particularly determined. Although not mentioned, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the closing time from the end of opening the first first prize opening to the beginning of the second first prize opening is 6 seconds (see FIG. 22).

  10 and 11 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot start designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for sudden probability change big hit start designation in the case of sudden probability change big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in case of small hit. Also good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Note that the value indicating the number of rounds in internal control (not the apparent number of rounds) is set in the EXT data and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the special winning opening opening designation command. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize how many rounds in the big hit game are to be started by confirming the EXT data of the special winning opening opening designation command. For example, if “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data, it can be recognized that round 1 of the big hit game is started, and if “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data. It can be recognized that it is the start of Round 7 of the jackpot game.

  A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Note that the value indicating the number of rounds in internal control (not the apparent number of rounds) is set in the EXT data and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the designation command after the special winning opening is opened. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize how many rounds in the big hit game are to end by confirming the EXT data of the designation command after the big winning opening is opened. For example, if “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data, it can be recognized that the round 1 of the big hit game is completed, and if “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data. , It can be recognized that the end of round 7 of the jackpot game.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that the jackpot game is normally a big jackpot (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command). is there. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time-short state (not including the probability variation state). Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is in the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which an effect control command indicating that the number of reserved memories is increased or decreased is transmitted for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. You may make it transmit the production control command which designates itself. In this case, for example, an effect control command for designating which one of the first start prize opening 13 and the second start prize opening 14 has been won is transmitted, and the reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is designated as the first. You may make it transmit a common production | presentation control command by 1 reserved memory number and 2nd reserved memory number.

  Further, for example, separate presentation control commands (holding memory number designation commands) may be transmitted when the first holding memory number is designated and when the second holding memory number is designated. In this case, for example, as a reserved memory number designation command, a value that can specify the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number as MODE data (for example, “C0 (H) when designating the first reserved memory number) ”And“ C1 (H) ”in the case of designating the second reserved memory number), an effect control command in which the value of the reserved memory number is set as EXT data may be transmitted.

  Also, for example, if the same first reserved memory number is specified, an effect control command specifying the addition or subtraction of the first reserved memory number is transmitted by making the MODE data common and different EXT data. You may do it. For example, when the common MODE data “C0 (H)” is used and the subtraction of the first reserved memory number is designated, the command C000 (H) is transmitted, and the addition of the first reserved memory number is designated. The command C001 (H) may be transmitted. Further, when specifying the second reserved memory number, the MODE data is made different, and when specifying the subtraction of the second reserved memory number, the command C100 (H) is transmitted, and the second reserved memory number is determined. When adding is designated, the command C101 (H) may be transmitted.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 on the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol. An effect display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening (the first large winning opening, the second large winning opening) is executed. Is done. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that the first start port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13 or that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14. If the second start opening switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the start opening switch passing process is performed. Execute (Steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 30), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control is performed to open the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoids 21a and 21b are driven to change the first grand prize opening and the second big prize opening. Leave it open. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming establishment of a closing condition for the first grand prize winning port and the second big prize winning port, and the like are performed. If the conditions for closing the first grand prize opening and the second grand prize opening are satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, control is performed to close the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening and the predetermined time After the elapse, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, when all rounds are finished, control is performed to close the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S307. The updated value (7 in this example) is updated.

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the first big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21a is driven to open the first big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. Note that the process for opening a small hit game is a process for starting a small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing for confirming the establishment of the first grand prize opening condition and the closing condition is performed. If the closing condition is satisfied while the first grand prize opening is open, the first big prize opening is closed. In addition, when the opening condition is satisfied while the first grand prize opening is closed, control is performed to open the first big prize opening. Then, when the opening of all the big winning openings is completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state (step S211). If the first start port switch 13a is not on, the process proceeds to step S217. If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S217.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 14) (step S215). . In the process of step S215, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted and stored in advance in the storage area in the start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning). You may make it extract at the time of the change start of 1 special symbol. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern type determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) in a variation pattern setting process to be described later, A value may be directly extracted from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a determination random number (random 3).

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 14, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S216).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is on (step S217). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S218). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S219), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S220). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 14) (step S221). . In the process of step S221, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S222).

  15 and 16 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time reduction state background designation command when the time variation flag indicating that the time reduction state is not set and the time reduction state is set. Further, when neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the background designation command is transmitted every time for each variation. Only when the state changes, a background designation command corresponding to the changed gaming state may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the number of transmissions of the background designation command can be reduced, and the processing burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect symbol command control process (step S30). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect control microcomputer in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. 100 will be transmitted. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage count subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in steps S215 and S221 of the start port switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 7) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 7A in the ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are changed There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 7A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state or the short-time state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 7A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game, and when the big hit is determined, the special symbol variation display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Reset at timing.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 7B and 7C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. Further, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8A. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8B.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit", "Suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in steps S215 and S221 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer and the second hold memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. . Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high. In other words, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the game value is higher than the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Is a long 29 seconds and high euphoria) The ratio of normal jackpots and probable big hits is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the determination result of the big hit type, one of “3”, “7”, and “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. In other words, when “normal jackpot” is determined, “3” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When “Suddenly probable big hit” is determined, “9” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S80). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines which of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the big hit type. Is selected (step S81). Then, control goes to a step S89.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S82). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S83). ). Then, control goes to a step S89.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S84). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the time reduction state (including the time of shifting to the probability change state), and is reset when the time reduction state is ended. Specifically, it is usually determined to be a big hit, a probable big hit, or a sudden probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. The change display is reset when the stop display is stopped and the stop symbol is stopped. If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S84), the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for deviation for probability variation / time reduction as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. A table is selected (step S85). Then, control goes to a step S89.

  If the time flag is not set (N in step S84), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S86). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S86), the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for normal use as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. A table is selected (step S87). Then, control goes to a step S89.

  When the total pending storage number is 3 or more (Y in step S86), the CPU 56 uses the shortening variation pattern as a table to be used for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. A type determination table is selected (step S88). Then, control goes to a step S89.

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S84 to S88, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the shortening variation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is the short-time state (including the case where the probability variation state is included), the deviation variation pattern type determination table for probability variation / time-shortening is selected. In this case, the variation pattern type including the variation pattern of the shortening variation may be determined in the process of step S89 described later. If the variation pattern type including the variation pattern of the shortening variation is determined, the process of step S91 is performed. Thus, the variation pattern of the shortening variation is determined as the variation pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short-time state (including the case where the probability variation state is included) or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be performed. .

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the short time state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storages are shown as different tables. A common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for variation.

  Even if the gaming state is a short-time state, if the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1), a variation display of the shortening variation is performed. It may not be possible. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S84, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. A variation pattern type determination table may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S81, S83, S85, S87 or S88. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S89). In the case where the random number 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for generating the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2). A value may be directly extracted from the random number counter for use, and the variation pattern type may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses a hit variation pattern determination table and a deviation variation pattern determination table as tables used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S89. One of them is selected (step S90). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S90. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S91). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S92). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S93).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S94). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S95).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S84 to S88, S89 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 10) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S101). If not set, the process proceeds to step S107.

  When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S102 and S103). Specifically, whether or not it is a probable big hit can be determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “02”.

  In addition, when the big hit type is suddenly probable big hit, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S104 and S105). Whether or not it is a sudden probability variation big hit can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “03”.

  Then, when neither the probability variation big hit nor the sudden probability variation big hit is obtained (that is, when it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 2 designation command (step SS106).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S101), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S107). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S108). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S107), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S109).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S110).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S122 described later. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  Next, if the reserved memory number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number subtraction designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S125). When the variation time timer times out (step S126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag indicating the probability change state and the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state if it is set (step S132). If it is set, the hourly number counter is also reset.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is normally jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is a normal big hit, a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer). .

  In addition, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying that the jackpot has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) in the timer before opening the big prize opening (step S134). The timer before opening the big winning opening is a timer for measuring the time until the big winning opening is released during the big hit game or the small hit game. Specifically, at the start of the big hit game, in step S134, the time required from the start of the variable display to the start of the first round (the variable display is stopped on the effect control microcomputer 100 side and the jackpot symbol is displayed). The time before the first round is started until the start of the first round is set as the pre-opening timer. For the first and subsequent rounds, the interval time between the rounds (apparatus at the time of performing the interval effect between the rounds on the effect control microcomputer 100 side) is set as the timer before opening the big prize opening.

  Next, the CPU 56 initializes the value of the round number counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game to 0 (step S136).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S137).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S130, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the time-count counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the time-short state is 0 (step S141). . If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (in this case, the time reduction counter is set based on a normal big hit and the time reduction counter is set), the CPU 56 The value is decremented by 1 (step S142). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S144).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying that the small hit has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening (step S147). In the case of a small hit game, at the start of the small hit game, in step S147, the time required from the start of the variable display to the start of the small hit game is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening. .

  In this embodiment, as already described, in the case of suddenly probable big hits and small hits, the open control of the big prize opening is performed in exactly the same manner (see FIG. 9B). Suddenly, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  Next, the opening pattern data used for the opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game or the small hit game will be described. FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of opening pattern data used for opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game or the small hit game.

  First, with reference to FIG. 21, the opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, a value for specifying a big winning opening to be opened for each round (big winning opening designated value), an opening time, a closing time, and an end code are set. The released pattern data is used.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, a value that designates the first big prize opening is set as the big prize opening designation value to be released in the first round and the second round. In addition, a value for designating the second grand prize port is set in the third round as the grand prize port designation value to be opened, and thereafter, the value for designating the first grand prize port and the second grand prize port are designated alternately. Value to be set. For example, the big prize opening designation value “1” is set as a value for designating the first big prize opening, and the big winning prize designation value “2” is set as a value for designating the second big prize opening.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, the opening time is uniformly set to 29 seconds (corresponding to the opening time T1 shown in FIG. 9A).

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, the closing time is set to 3 seconds or 1 second. Specifically, 3 seconds is set as the closing time after the opening of the first big prize opening in the first round is completed. In this case, when the first round ends in the process for opening the big prize opening described later, 1 second is set as the interval period between rounds (see step S1464), so the first big prize opening in the first round is opened. The total closing time until the opening of the first big prize opening in the second round after finishing is finished is 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds.

  In addition, in the second and subsequent rounds, 3 seconds are set as the closing time after the opening of the first big prize opening is completed. In this case, in the process for opening the big prize opening, which will be described later, when the round ends, 1 second is set as the interval period between rounds (see step S1464), so the opening of the first big prize opening for the round is finished. After that, the total closing time until the opening of the second grand prize winning opening of the next round is 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds (corresponding to the closing time T3 shown in FIG. 9A). Become.

  In addition, in the second round and thereafter, 1 second is set as the closing time after the opening of the second grand prize opening is completed. In this case, in the process for opening the big prize opening, which will be described later, when the round is finished, 1 second is set as the interval period between rounds (see step S1464), so the opening of the second big prize opening for the round is finished. After that, the total closing time until the opening of the first grand prize winning opening of the next round is 1 second + 1 second = 2 seconds (corresponding to the closing time T4 shown in FIG. 9A). Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 21, the closing time is set to 1 second in the final round (the 15th round), but the closing time is not set in the final round, and the final prize opening of the final round is opened. As soon as the game ends, the big hit game may be ended.

  As shown in FIG. 21, an end code indicating the final data of the release pattern data is set in the final record of the release pattern data of each round.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22 (A), a description will be given of the opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit. As shown in FIG. 22 (A), in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, open pattern data in which a big prize opening designation value, open time, close time, and end code to be opened are set for each round is used. .

  As shown in FIG. 22 (A), in the case of suddenly probable big hit, a value (for example, “1”) that designates the first big prize mouth in both the first round and the second round as the big prize mouth designated value to be released. ) Is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22A, in the case of suddenly probable big hit, the opening time is uniformly set to 1 second (corresponding to the opening time T2 shown in FIG. 9B). In addition, as shown in FIG. 22A, in the case of suddenly probable big hit, the closing time is uniformly set to 5 seconds. In this case, when the first round ends in the process for opening the big prize opening described later, 1 second is set as the interval period between rounds (see step S1464), so the first big prize opening in the first round is opened. After finishing the above, the total closing time until the opening of the first big winning opening in the next second round is 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22A, the closing time is set to 5 seconds also in the final round (second round), but the closing time is not set in the final round, and the final winning prize opening of the final round is set. The big hit game may be ended immediately after the opening of the game is finished.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22A, the case where 5 seconds is set as the closing time in the opening pattern data is shown. However, it is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and is shorter than, for example, 1 second or 2 seconds. A closing time may be set, and a longer closing time such as 10 seconds or 20 seconds may be set.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22A, an end code is set in the last record of the release pattern data of each round.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22B, the opening control of the big winning opening during the small hit game will be described. As shown in FIG. 22 (B), in the case of a small hit, open pattern data in which all open times and closing times and end codes in the small hit game are set is used. In this embodiment, in the case of a small hit, control is performed so that only the opening control of the first big winning opening is executed without using the big winning opening designation value.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, in the case of a small hit, the opening time is uniformly set to 1 second (corresponding to the opening time T2 shown in FIG. 9B), and the opening for the small hit is made. Two release times are set in the pattern data. In addition, as shown in FIG. 22B, in the case of a small hit, the closing time between the first opening time and the second opening time is set to 6 seconds, and the closing time after the second last opening time. Is set to 5 seconds. As already explained, in the case of suddenly probable big success, after the opening of the 1st big winning opening in the first round, the closing time until the opening of the 1st big winning opening in the second round is started. Since the total is 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds, the apparent opening time and closing time are the same when suddenly probable big hit and small hit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22 (A), 5 seconds is set as the closing time after the opening of the last second first major winning opening, but the last first first winning opening is opened. After closing, the closing time may not be set, and the small hit game may be ended immediately after the opening of the last first big prize opening.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, an end code is set in the last record of the release pattern data.

  Sudden probability change big hits and small hits are for showing whether or not the kite is suddenly controlled to be in a probable change state, so if you are in big hit games or small hit games based on sudden probability change big hits. It is desirable to minimize the winning of game balls to the winning opening. For this reason, in this embodiment, in the case of sudden odds or big hits, the opening time of the big prize opening is shortened to 1 second, and after the opening of the big prize opening is finished, the next big prize opening is opened. The closing time until it is 6 seconds is slightly longer. In this embodiment, by extending the closing time between the opening of the grand prize opening in this way, in this embodiment, the game ball is launched aiming at the opening timing of the big prize opening and the prize winning opening is awarded. It is prevented as much as possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, by providing a closing time in addition to the opening time during the round, the closing time of the big prize opening (for example, the closing time T3 shown in FIG. 9). However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, only the opening time is set during the round, and the closing time as the interval period after the round is made different so that the closing time of the big prize opening (for example, the closing time T3 and the closing time T4 shown in FIG. 9). ) May be different.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S305) executed before each round in the big hit game. In the process for pre-opening the big prize opening, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the timer before the big prize opening by 1 (step S1401). If the timer before opening the big prize opening times out (the value of the timer before opening the big prize opening is 0) (step S1402), the CPU 56 initializes the winning number counter (step S1403). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero. Further, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the round number counter (step S1405).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a pointer at the head of the release pattern data corresponding to the jackpot type and the current round (step S1406). The jackpot type can be specifically determined by confirming whether the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “01” to “03”. The current round can be determined by checking the value of the round number counter.

  For example, in the case of controlling the big hit game based on the normal big hit or the probable big hit, when starting the first round, “01” or “02” is set in the big hit type buffer and the value of the round number counter is “ On the basis of “1”, by setting a pointer at the head of the release pattern data of the first round for the normal big hit and probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 21, the data of the first record of the set open pattern data thereafter The processing is executed in order. In addition, when starting rounds after the second round, “01” or “02” is set in the jackpot type buffer, and the value of the round number counter is any of “2” to “15”. First, by setting the pointer at the head of the release pattern data of any of the second to fifteenth rounds for the normal big hit and probability variation big hit shown in FIG. Processing is executed in order from the data.

  Also, for example, in the case of controlling the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit, when starting the first round, “03” is set in the big hit type buffer and the value of the round number counter is “1”. On the basis of this, by setting a pointer at the beginning of the first round release pattern data for the sudden probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 22 (A), processing is performed in order from the first record data of the set release pattern data. Will be executed. When the second round is started, the sudden hit variable big hit shown in FIG. 22A is set based on the fact that “03” is set in the big hit type buffer and the value of the round number counter is “2”. By setting the pointer at the head of the release pattern data of the second round, the processing is subsequently executed in order from the data of the first record of the set release pattern data.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads and sets the special winning opening designation value to be released in the release pattern data pointed to by the pointer (step S1407). Next, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the pointer (step S1408), reads the opening time that is set next to the big winning opening designation value in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer, and opens the winning opening of the big winning opening or An opening / closing time timer for measuring the closing time is set (step S1409).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the large winning opening to be opened to an open state (step S1410). Specifically, when a value (for example, “1”) for designating the first grand prize port is set as the grand prize port designation value in step S1407, the solenoid 21a is driven to set the first grand prize port. Control to open state. If a value (for example, “2”) for designating the second grand prize opening is set as the big prize designation value in step S1407, the solenoid 21b is driven to open the second big prize opening. Control.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the value of the current round number counter in the EXT data, and performs control to transmit a special winning opening open designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1411).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S306) (step S1412).

  24 and 25 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening process (step S306). In the special winning opening opening process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not a detection signal from the count switch corresponding to the special winning opening to be opened has been input (step S1451). Specifically, when a value (for example, “1”) for designating the first big prize opening is set as the big prize opening designation value in step S1407 of the big prize opening pre-processing, the first count switch 23a. It is confirmed whether the detection signal from is input. In addition, when a value (for example, “2”) for designating the second big prize opening is set as the big prize opening designation value in step S1407 of the big prize opening pre-processing, detection from the second count switch 23b. Check if a signal is input. When the count switch corresponding to the big winning opening to be released is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the big winning opening is detected (Y in step S1451), the value of the winning number counter is incremented by one (step S1452). If the value of the winning prize counter after the addition becomes 10 (step S1453), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1460.

  If the value of the winning number counter is less than 10, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the open / close time timer (step S1454), and checks whether the open / close time timer has timed out (step S1455). If the open / close time timer has not timed out, the processing is terminated. If the open / close time timer has timed out, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the pointer (step S1456), and checks whether or not the value in the open pattern data pointed to by the pointer is a value indicating the end code ( Step S1457). If the value indicates the end code, the process proceeds to step S1460.

  If the value in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer is not a value indicating the end code (that is, if the value indicates the closing time), the CPU 56 reads the closing time in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer and opens and closes the opening / closing time. The timer is set (step S1458).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening to be closed (step S1459). Specifically, when a value (for example, “1”) designating the first grand prize opening is set as the big prize opening designation value in step S1407 of the big prize opening opening pre-processing, the solenoid 21a is driven. Stop and control the first grand prize opening in a closed state. In addition, when a value (for example, “2”) for designating the second grand prize opening is set as the big prize opening designation value in step S1407 of the big prize opening pre-processing, the driving of the solenoid 21b is stopped. The second big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

  In step S1460, the CPU 56 performs processing for ending the round. Specifically, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the current round number counter in the EXT data, and performs control to transmit a designation command after opening the big prize opening to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1460).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the current big hit game is based on the sudden probability change big hit (step S1461). Whether or not it is based on sudden probability variation big hit is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “03”. Can be judged.

  If the current big hit game is not suddenly based on a probabilistic big hit (that is, if it is based on a normal big hit or a probable big hit), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 15 ( Step S1462). If the value of the round number counter is 15 (that is, if the final round has been completed), the process proceeds to step S1466. If the value of the round number counter is not 15 (that is, if there are remaining rounds), the process proceeds to step S1464.

  If the current big hit game is based on a sudden probability change big hit, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S 1463). If the value of the round number counter is 2 (that is, if the final round has been completed), the process proceeds to step S1466. If the value of the round number counter is not 2 (that is, if there are remaining rounds), the process proceeds to step S1464.

  When there are remaining rounds (N in Step S1462 or N in Step S1463), the CPU 56 sets the pre-round start time in the timer before opening the big prize opening (for example, in the effect display device 9 that a new round is started). A value (in this example, 1 second) corresponding to the notification time (interval effect is performed and corresponds to the period) is set (step S1464).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S1465).

  If the final round has ended (Y in step S1462 or Y in step S1463), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S307) (step S1466).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a big hit end 1 designation command is transmitted when it is a normal big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent when it is a probable big hit, and a small hit / abrupt is sudden when it is a sudden probable big hit. Send a probable jackpot end designation command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether the big hit type is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit (step S166). Whether or not it is a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is, specifically, whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is any of “02” to “03” It can be determined by checking whether or not. If the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag to shift the gaming state to the probability changing state (step S167), and sets the time reduction flag to change the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S168). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S171.

  If neither the probability change big hit nor the sudden probability change big hit is present (that is, if it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S169). In addition, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a time reduction number counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the time reduction state (step S170). Then, the process proceeds to step S171.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) executed in the small hit game. In the pre-opening process for small hits, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the timer for opening the big winning opening by 1 (step S2470). When the timer before opening the big prize opening times out (the value of the timer before opening the big prize opening is 0) (step S2471), the CPU 56 initializes the winning number counter (step S2472). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a pointer at the head of the small hit opening pattern data (step S2474). Next, the CPU 56 reads the release time in the release pattern data pointed to by the pointer and sets it in the open / close time timer (step S2475).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the first big prize opening to be in an open state (step S2476). Specifically, the solenoid 21a is driven to control the first grand prize winning opening. In addition, the CPU 56 sets a special winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening is open (step S2477).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release process (step S309) (step S2478).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the small hit releasing process (step S309). In the small hit opening process, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the open / close time timer (step S2481), and checks whether the open / close time timer has timed out (step S2482). If the open / close time timer has not timed out, the processing is terminated. If the open / close time timer has timed out, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the pointer (step S2483), and checks whether or not the value in the open pattern data pointed to by the pointer is a value indicating the end code ( Step S2484). If the value indicates the end code, the process proceeds to step S2492.

  If the value in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer is not a value indicating an end code (that is, a value indicating an opening time or a closing time), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the big prize opening opening flag is set. Is confirmed (step S2485). If the big prize opening opening flag is not set (that is, if the first big prize opening is closed), the CPU 56 reads the opening time in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer and sets it in the opening / closing time timer. (Step S2486).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the first big prize opening to be in an open state (step S2487). Specifically, the solenoid 21a is driven to control the first grand prize winning opening. Further, the CPU 56 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S2488).

  If the big prize opening opening flag is set (that is, if the first big prize opening is being opened), the CPU 56 reads the closing time in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer and sets it in the opening / closing time timer. (Step S2489).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the first big prize opening to be closed (step S2490). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 21a is stopped and the first big prize opening is controlled to the open state. Further, the CPU 56 resets the special winning opening open flag (step S2491).

  If the end code is determined in step S2487, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit end process (step S310) (step S2492).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S310) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step S2160). If the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2164. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the small hit flag is reset (step S2161), and a control for transmitting a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command is performed (step S2162). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step S2163). finish.

  In step S2164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S2165). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2165), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2166).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S36) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, as the variable winning means, the first variable winning means (first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a in this example) and the second variable winning means (in this example, A second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b). In addition, the variable winning means is changed to the first state (in this example, the open state) for the first period (in this example, 29 seconds), the first specific gaming state (in this example, the big hit game based on the normal big hit or the probability variable big hit) State) and the second specific gaming state (the gaming state different from the normal gaming state after the variable winning means is changed to the first state for a second period (in this example, 1 second) shorter than the first period) In this example, a big hit gaming state based on sudden probability change big hit) and a special gaming state in which the variable winning means is controlled to the first state after changing the variable winning means to the first state for the second period. (In this example, it is controllable to a small hit gaming state). When controlling to the second specific gaming state and controlling to the special gaming state, either one of the first variable winning means or the second variable winning means (in this example, the first winning prize) When the special variable winning ball apparatus 20a) is changed to the first state for the second period and is controlled to the first specific gaming state, the variable winning of either one of the first variable winning means or the second variable winning means is performed. After the means (in this example, the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a) is changed to the first state for the first period, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are changed to the first state in a predetermined order. (In this example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a and the second special variable winning ball device 20b are alternately controlled to be opened). Therefore, since the change mode of the variable winning means changes after the first period in the first specific gaming state, in the gaming machine equipped with a plurality of variable winning means, the change mode of the variable winning means can be noted, The interest in games can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the first big prize opening is controlled to be open for 29 seconds over two rounds in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, and then the first big prize opening and the third round to the fifteenth round Although the case where the second grand prize opening is controlled to be opened alternately has been shown, the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening may be controlled to be opened according to a predetermined order. It does not have to be controlled to the open state. For example, after the 3rd round, the first grand prize opening → the first grand prize opening → the second grand prize opening → the first grand prize opening → the first grand prize opening → the second grand prize opening ... It may be controlled to the state as long as it controls the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening to the open state according to some determined order. Even in the case where the special winning opening is opened in an irregular order as described above, as shown in this embodiment, after the second large winning opening on the downstream side is closed, the upstream You may make it shorten the time until the 1st big winning opening on the side is opened.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are different in the ease of winning the game ball. Specifically, in this embodiment, the second special variable winning ball device 20b is easier to win than the first special variable winning ball device 20a. Then, when controlling to the second specific game state and controlling to the special game state, the variable winning means that is difficult for the game ball to win is changed to the first state for the second period. Therefore, in the second specific game state and the special game state, it is difficult for the game ball to win the variable winning means, so that the game can be sharpened and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case where the second special variable winning ball device 20b is made larger than the first special variable winning ball device 20a to make it easier to win the second big prize opening is shown. The method of making the easiness of winning the winning prize is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the ease with which a game ball launched from a ball striking device is guided through the game area 7 to the first grand prize opening and the route to the second big prize opening is determined. It may be configured differently (for example, a path is formed so that a game ball is easily guided to the opening of one of the big winning openings). In this case, for example, it is easy to win a prize in the first prize winning opening and the second prize winning opening by changing the position of each big winning opening, the length of the route, and the arrangement of the obstacles and nails as obstacles. What is necessary is just to make it different. In addition, for example, the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a disposed on the upstream side by making the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a and the second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b have the same size. May be easier to win. In addition, for example, even if one large winning opening is smaller than the other large winning opening, a path is formed or a position is arranged so that the game ball is easily guided, so that the other It may be configured so that it is easier to win than the big winning opening.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the first variable winning means is provided at an upstream position where the game ball flows down, and the second variable winning means is provided at a downstream position where the game ball flows down. When the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are changed to the first state according to a predetermined order, the second variable winning means is changed to the first state after the first variable winning means is changed to the second state. The first variable winning means is changed to the first state after the second variable winning means is changed to the second state than the period until the time is changed (in this example, the closing time T3 shown in FIG. 9A). The first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are controlled so as to shorten the period (in this example, the closing time T4 shown in FIG. 9). Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the variable winning means to win the game ball, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that, in the embodiment described above, when an abnormal winning at the first grand prize winning port or the second big winning prize is detected, the abnormality notifying LEDs 24a and 24b may be used to notify the abnormality. Good. Hereinafter, a modified example in the case of notifying the abnormal winning to the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a processing example of a winning notification process in the case of notifying an abnormal winning to the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening. In the modification shown in FIG. 31, in the winning notification process, the CPU 56 first reads the switch-on buffer set in the switch process (step S21) (step S2121). Next, the CPU 56 reads the value of the special symbol process flag (step S2122), and checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S2123).

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second count switch 23b is in the ON state based on the switch-on buffer read in step S2121 (step S2124). If the second count switch 23b is in the ON state, an initial abnormality notification flag indicating that the first abnormal winning to the second big prize opening has already been notified after turning on the power to the gaming machine is set. It is confirmed whether or not (step S2125). If the first abnormality notification flag is not set (that is, after the power to the gaming machine is turned on, if the abnormal winning to the second big prize opening has not been notified yet), the CPU 56 notifies the abnormality notification LED 24b. Control to turn on is performed (step S2126). On the other hand, if the first abnormality notification flag is set (that is, if the first abnormal winning to the second big prize opening has already been notified after powering on the gaming machine), the CPU 56 notifies the abnormality notification. Control for turning on the LED 24a is performed (step S2127). Then, if not set, the CPU 56 sets a first abnormality notification flag (step S2128).

  If the second count switch 23b is not turned on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first count switch 23a is turned on based on the switch-on buffer read in step S2121 (step S2129). . If the first count switch 23a is in the on state, the CPU 56 performs control to turn on the abnormality notification LED 24a (step S2130).

  In step S2123, the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (that is, any one of 0 to 4) means that the special symbol normal process (step S300) to the special symbol stop in the special symbol process shown in FIG. This means that any one of the processes (step S304) can be executed. That is, it is a state in which neither the big winning game state nor the small winning game state is controlled, and the opening control of the first big winning port or the second big winning port is not performed. Nevertheless, in step S2124 and S2129, it is determined as Y and the winning to the first grand prize opening or the second big prize opening is detected. It indicates that something is wrong or wrong. Therefore, when the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 in step S2123, the CPU 56 detects that the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b is on in steps S2124 and S2129. It is determined that an abnormal winning to the big winning mouth or the second big winning mouth has occurred, and control is performed to turn on the abnormality notifying LED 24a or the abnormality notifying LED 24b.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, any of 5 to 10) in step S2123, the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. Means that one of the small hit end processing (step S310) is being executed. In other words, it is a period in which the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening can be controlled while being controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, and the game to the first big winning prize mouth or the second big winning prize mouth There can be a winning ball. Therefore, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more in step S2123, the CPU 56 ends the winning notification process.

  Although not shown in FIG. 31, after the abnormality notification LEDs 24a and 24b are turned on and the abnormality notification is started in steps S2126, S2127, and S2130, for example, the abnormality notification is performed based on the elapse of a predetermined period. Should be terminated. In this case, for example, a timer may be set when abnormality notification starts, and the abnormality notification LEDs 24a and 24b may be turned off based on the time-out of the timer to end abnormality notification. Further, for example, after the abnormality notification is started, the abnormality notification may be ended based on the fact that an error cancel button or the like is pressed by a game clerk or the like.

  According to the modification shown in FIG. 31, when an abnormal winning of a game ball to the first variable winning means (in this example, the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a) is detected, the second variable winning means (this example) Then, the abnormal winning is notified in a different notification mode when the abnormal winning of the game ball to the second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b) is detected. Specifically, when an abnormal winning to the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a (first first prize opening) is detected, the abnormality notifying LED 24a is turned on, whereas the first after turning on the power to the gaming machine. When an abnormal winning to the second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b (second big winning opening) is detected, the abnormality notifying LED 24b is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to recognize to which variable winning means the abnormal winning has occurred.

  Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 31, when an abnormal winning to the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a (first big winning opening) is detected, the abnormality notifying LED 24a is turned on while the gaming machine is turned on. When an abnormal winning to the second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b (second big prize opening) is detected for the first time after the power is turned on, the abnormality notification is performed in a different notification mode (in this example, the abnormality notification LED 24b is lit). For example, when performing an error inspection at the time of factory shipment of a gaming machine, even if both an abnormal winning at the first grand prize winning opening and an abnormal winning at the second big winning prize are generated at the same time, It is possible to distinguish whether it is an abnormal prize at the prize opening or an abnormal prize at the second big prize opening, and each of the abnormal prize winning at the first big prize opening and the abnormal prize winning at the second big prize opening It can be inspected that it can be detected normally. On the other hand, in the case of detecting an abnormal prize for the second time or later, the same abnormality notification LED 24a is lit even when an abnormal prize is detected in any of the big prize openings. Only needs to check the abnormality notification LED 24a, and can easily find an abnormal prize.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 31, when a big hit game is not being played (when the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5), an abnormality is detected immediately when the ON state of the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b is detected. Although the case where the notification is made is shown, the number of detections of the ON state of the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b is counted and the detection number has reached a predetermined threshold. You may make it alert | report an abnormality on condition.

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 31, even if a big hit game is being played (even if the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more), the game ball is placed in the big winning opening which is not to be released out of the two big winning openings. Even when a prize is won over a predetermined threshold, it may be determined that the prize is abnormal and an abnormality notification may be made. In this case, after the big winning opening to be opened is closed, the presence of a game ball detected by the count switch is taken into account, and an abnormal determination is made during a big hit game (the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more) The threshold value used for the value may be larger than the threshold value used for the abnormality determination when the big hit game is not being performed (the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5).

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 31, when an abnormal winning to the second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b (second big winning opening) is first detected after turning on the power to the gaming machine, the abnormality notification LED 24b is turned on. However, the method of making the abnormal winning notification mode different is not limited to this mode. For example, the second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b (second large first) after the power supply to the gaming machine is turned on. When an abnormal winning to (winning opening) is detected, both the abnormality notification LED 24a and the abnormality notification LED 24b may be lit.

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 31, the case where abnormality is notified by turning on the abnormality notification LEDs 24 a and 24 b is shown, but the form of abnormality notification is not limited to such a form. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command indicating that an abnormal winning is detected to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command. Then, an abnormality notification screen may be displayed on the effect display device 9, the frame LED 28 may be lit or blinked in a predetermined notification pattern, or a predetermined notification sound may be output from the speaker 27. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 may externally output an external output signal indicating that an abnormal winning is detected to a hall computer or the like.

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 31, the case where the abnormality winning notification mode is changed by using the two abnormality notification LEDs 24a and 24b is shown, but the abnormality winning notification is performed using only one abnormality notification LED. You may make it vary a mode. For example, when an abnormal winning is detected at the first second prize winning port after turning on the power to the gaming machine, the abnormality notification LED 24a is blinked so that an abnormal winning at the second winning prize winning after the second time is made. If detected, the same abnormality notification LED 24a may be turned on.

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 31, for example, the first abnormality notification flag is stored in the backup RAM, and after the abnormal winning notification manner to the second big prize opening is changed once, the next time the RAM is stored. Until the initialization is performed, the notification mode of the abnormal winning at the second big winning opening may be the same as the notification mode of the abnormal winning at the first big winning opening.

  In addition, in the modification shown in FIG. 31, the case where the notification mode of abnormal winning to the second big prize opening is changed only once after the power to the gaming machine is turned on is not limited to once but to the gaming machine. You may make it differ the alerting | reporting aspect of the abnormal winning to the 2nd big winning opening of the predetermined times after power-on. For example, after the power to the gaming machine is turned on, the abnormality notification LED 24b may be lit up to twice when an abnormal winning at the second grand prize opening is detected.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the big prize opening is opened only once per round in the big hit gaming state is shown, but the big prize opening may be opened a plurality of times per round. . Hereinafter, a description will be given of a modification in the case where the big winning opening is configured to be opened a plurality of times per round in the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening process (step S306) when the big winning opening is configured to be opened a plurality of times per round in the big hit gaming state. In the modified example shown in FIG. 32, in the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (see FIG. 23), if the big winning opening to be opened is controlled to be in the open state by executing step S1410, the CPU 56 is opening the big winning opening. The flag shall be set.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 32, the processes in steps S1451 to S1457 are the same as those shown in FIG. If the value in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer in step S1457 is not a value indicating an end code (that is, if the value indicates an opening time or a closing time), the CPU 56 sets the big prize opening opening flag. It is confirmed whether or not (step S1457A). If the big winning opening open flag is not set (that is, if the big winning opening to be opened is closed), the CPU 56 reads the opening time in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer, and stores it in the opening / closing time timer. Set (step S1457B).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the large winning opening to be opened to an open state (step S1457C). Specifically, when a value (for example, “1”) for designating the first grand prize opening is set as the big prize opening designation value in step S1407 of the big prize opening pre-processing, the solenoid 21a is driven. To control the first grand prize opening to the open state. If a value (for example, “2”) for designating the second big prize opening is set as the big prize opening designation value in step S1407 of the big prize opening pre-processing, the solenoid 21b is driven to set the second prize winning opening designation value. Control the big prize opening to the open state. Further, the CPU 56 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S1457D).

  If the big prize opening open flag is set (that is, if the big prize opening to be opened is being opened), the CPU 56 reads the closing time in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer, and stores it in the opening / closing time timer. It is set (step S1458).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the open prize winning opening to be closed (step S1459). Specifically, when a value (for example, “1”) designating the first grand prize opening is set as the big prize opening designation value in step S1407 of the big prize opening opening pre-processing, the solenoid 21a is driven. Stop and control the first grand prize opening in a closed state. In addition, when a value (for example, “2”) for designating the second grand prize opening is set as the big prize opening designation value in step S1407 of the big prize opening pre-processing, the driving of the solenoid 21b is stopped. The second big prize opening is controlled to be closed. Further, the CPU 56 resets the special winning opening open flag (step S1459A).

  Note that in the modified example shown in FIG. 32, the processes after step S1460 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., 1 is used when the change is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, This is a concept including a ratio that is different in a relationship of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses game media such as the above and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  The present invention performs a predetermined game by launching a game medium into a game area, and controls a specific game state in which a round game advantageous to the player is executed a plurality of times when the game result becomes a specific game result. It is preferably applied to a gaming machine.

  Next, a modified example of the big winning opening opening pattern for the big hit and the small hit for each big hit type will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory view showing the opening pattern of the special winning opening. The open pattern for the special winning opening shown in FIG. 33 is a modification of the open pattern for the special winning opening shown in FIG. Among these, FIG. 33 (A) shows the opening pattern of the big winning opening at the time of the normal big hit or the probable big hit (that is, the big hit of 15 rounds). FIG. 33B shows the opening pattern of the big winning opening at the time of sudden probability change big hit (that is, at the big hit of 2 rounds) or at the small hit.

  First, with reference to FIG. 33A, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the normal big hit and the probable big hit will be described. In this modification, when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), the first big winning opening is controlled to the open state in the first round, and the second round Will open the 2nd grand prize opening alternately in the order that the 2nd big prize opening is controlled to open and then the 1st grand prize opening is controlled to open in the 3rd round. Controlled by the state. In addition, when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the normal big hit or the probable big hit, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), the big winning opening is controlled to be open for T1 time (29 seconds in this example) per round. Thereafter, the closed state is controlled for a predetermined time.

  When the game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the normal big hit or the probable big hit, the time to be controlled to the closed state after the opening of the big winning opening is ended after the opening of the first big winning opening and the second big It differs depending on whether the prize opening is finished. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), after the opening of the first big prize opening is finished, the closing time until the second big prize opening is opened in the next round is T3 hours (in this example, As described later, 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds. Refer to FIG. 34), but after the second grand prize opening is completed, the first grand prize opening is opened in the next round. The closing time is T4 time (in this example, as described later, 1 second + 1 second = 2 seconds, see FIG. 34). In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 33A, the closing time T3 is set to be longer than the closing time T4.

  The reason why T3> T4 is set as described above is as follows. In this modification, since the first grand prize opening is arranged above the second big prize opening, the game ball reaches the second big prize opening from the first big prize opening. There is a slight time difference. For example, even if the timing when the game ball reaches the first grand prize opening is the closing timing of the first big prize opening, There may be a case where the opening of the 2nd prize opening is started and the 2nd prize winning opening is possible. Therefore, even if the closing time T3 from when the first grand prize opening is closed to when the second big prize opening starts to be opened is slightly longer, the substantial closing time is not so long. On the other hand, since the second grand prize opening is located below the first big prize opening, when the opening of the second big prize opening is finished, the opening of the first big prize opening is completely started. If it becomes impossible to win a prize and the closing time T4 from the closing of the second grand prize opening to the start of opening the first big prize opening is made too long, the substantial closing time will become long. Therefore, in this modification, the closing time T3 is set to be longer than the closing time T4 so that the game ball can be easily played at the winning prize opening and the interest in the game is improved.

  The game ball passes through the vicinity of the opening of the first grand prize opening without reaching the first grand prize opening provided on the upstream side, and reaches the vicinity of the opening of the second big prize opening on the downstream side. If the time required for this is TX time, the closing time T3 is preferably shorter than the TX time. Further, for example, 100 game balls can be fired continuously for 60 seconds, and the time interval (launch interval) of the game balls when the game balls are fired continuously is 60 seconds / 100 = 0.6 seconds. In this case, the closing time T4 is preferably shorter than the time obtained by subtracting the TX time from the firing interval of 0.6 seconds.

  In this modification, the case where the closing time T3 is controlled to be longer than the closing time T4 is shown, but the closing time T3 and the closing time T4 may be the same time. For example, the closing time T4 needs to be somewhat short for the above reason, but the closing time T3 does not necessarily have a long time. Therefore, the closing time T4 should be set as short as the closing time T4. May be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33 (B), explanation will be given on the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the sudden probability change big hit and the small hit. In this modified example, when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the sudden probability variation big hit, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), the first big winning opening is controlled to be open in the first round, and the second round is set to the first round. The two grand prize winning ports are controlled to be in the open state, and the first grand prize winning port and the second grand prize winning port are controlled to be in the open state alternately in the second round. In addition, when controlled to the small hit game state, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), in the same manner as the big hit game state based on the sudden probability change big hit, the first big winning opening is opened in the first opening. In the second opening, the second grand prize opening is controlled to be in an open state, and in the second opening, the first grand prize opening and the second grand prize opening are alternately controlled to be in an open state. The When controlled to the small hit game state, unlike the big hit game state, there is no concept of a round, but in the example shown in FIG. And the opening of the second grand prize opening is expressed as 2R.

  Also, when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the sudden probability change big hit or the small hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), the first big winning opening is set to T2 time (this example) Then, it controls to an open state for 1 second. In this modified example, as shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, the opening time T2 at the sudden probability variation big hit or small hit is shorter than the opening time T1 at the normal big hit or probability variation big hit (T1> T2). ) Is set.

  Further, in this modification, the closing time T5 from the closing of the first big prize opening in the big hit game or the small hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit to the opening of the second big prize opening in the second round is: As will be described later, 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds. On the other hand, the closing time T3 from the closing of the first big winning opening in the big hit game based on the normal big hit or the probable big hit to the opening of the second big winning opening in the next round will be described later. 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds (see FIG. 34), and the closing time T4 from when the second big prize opening is closed until the first big prize opening is opened in the next round will be described later. 1 second + 1 second = 2 seconds (see FIG. 34). Therefore, the closing time T5 at the sudden probability variation big hit or small hit (5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds in this example) is longer than both the closing time T3 and the closing time T4. For this reason, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit or the probable big hit, the disadvantage period (the closing time of the big prize opening) is relatively shortened, while in the sudden odd change big hit or the small hit, the disadvantage period is relatively long. In a gaming machine equipped with a big prize opening, it is possible to effectively control the disadvantage period and improve the interest of the game.

  Specifically, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, a round in which the big prize opening is opened for a long time of 29 seconds is executed for 15 rounds, and it is easy for game balls to win the big prize opening. Therefore, the disadvantageous period (the closing time of the big prize opening) is relatively shortened so that the game balls can easily win the big prize opening. On the other hand, in the event of sudden big odds or small wins, the goal is to make the game state appear to have suddenly changed (for example, suddenly changed to a positive state). Since it is not assumed that a game ball is won and a prize ball is given, the opening time of the big winning opening is as short as 1 second and the number of times of opening is reduced to 2 times. Therefore, in the case of sudden big odds or small wins, the disadvantageous period is relatively long so that the game balls are less likely to win the big prize opening. As described above, in this modification, the interest in the game is improved by effectively controlling the disadvantageous period according to the type of jackpot.

  In FIG. 33 (B), the closing time from the sudden opening of the first big prize opening to the start of the second big prize opening in the sudden change big hit or small hit is particularly determined. Although not mentioned, as will be described later, in this modification, the closing time from the end of the opening of the first first prize opening to the start of the second second prize opening is 6 It is assumed to be seconds.

  Further, in this modified example, the case where the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening are alternately controlled to be opened in the same manner as the sudden probability variation big hit is shown in this modified example. Only one of the first grand prize opening and the second big prize opening may be controlled to be in an open state. For example, in the small hit gaming state, the first big prize opening may be controlled to be in the open state in both the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening.

  The opening pattern data used for the opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game or the small hit game corresponding to the above-described modification will be described. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of opening pattern data used for opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game or the small hit game.

  First, with reference to FIG. 34, the opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the normal big hit or the probable big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, a value (special value designated value) for designating an open target to be opened for each round, an open time, a closing time, and an end code are set. The released pattern data is used.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, a value that designates the first big prize mouth is set in the first round as the big prize mouth designated value to be released, and the second big in the second round. A value for designating the first grand prize port and the second grand prize port are alternately designated according to the order in which the value for designating the prize mouth is set and the value for designating the first grand prize port is set in the third round. Value is set. For example, the big prize opening designation value “1” is set as a value for designating the first big prize opening, and the big winning prize designation value “2” is set as a value for designating the second big prize opening.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, the opening time is uniformly set to 29 seconds (corresponding to the opening time T1 shown in FIG. 33A).

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, 3 seconds is set as the closing time after the opening of the first big winning opening is finished. In this case, in the process for opening the big prize opening, which will be described later, when the round ends, 1 second is set as the interval period between rounds (see step S1464), so the opening of the first big prize opening for the round is finished. After that, the total closing time until the opening of the second grand prize winning opening of the next round is 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds (corresponding to the closing time T3 shown in FIG. 33A). Become.

  Further, after the opening of the second grand prize opening is completed, 1 second is set as the closing time. In this case, in the process for opening the big prize opening, which will be described later, when the round is finished, 1 second is set as the interval period between rounds (see step S1464), so the opening of the second big prize opening for the round is finished. After that, the total closing time until the opening of the first grand prize winning opening of the next round is 1 second + 1 second = 2 seconds (corresponding to the closing time T4 shown in FIG. 9A). Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 34, 1 second is set as the closing time in the final round (the 15th round), but the closing time is not set in the final round, and the big prize opening in the final round is opened. As soon as the game ends, the big hit game may be ended.

  As shown in FIG. 34, an end code indicating the final data of the release pattern data is set in the final record of the release pattern data of each round.

  The open control of the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit corresponding to the above-mentioned modification is the big winning opening designated value, the open time, the closing time and the end of the open target every round shown in FIG. Since the code is almost the same as the set open pattern data, the illustration is omitted.

  However, the difference from FIG. 22 (A) is that, in the case of suddenly probable big hit, a value (for example, “1”) that designates the first big prize mouth in the first round is designated as the big prize mouth designated value to be released. In the second round, a value (for example, “2”) for designating the second big prize opening is set. Specifically, after the opening of the first big prize opening in the first round, the total closing time until the opening of the second big winning opening in the next second round is started is 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 That means seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (B), the opening control of the big winning opening during the small hit game corresponding to the above-described modified example is all the open time and the closed time during the small hit game as shown in FIG. Since this is the same as the open pattern data in which the end code is set, the illustration is omitted. In this modification, the first big prize opening is controlled to be opened at the first opening, and the second big winning opening at the second opening, without using the designated value for the big prize opening when it is a small hit. Is controlled to open. As already explained, in the case of suddenly probable big success, after the opening of the 1st big winning opening in the first round, the closing time until the opening of the 2nd big winning opening in the second round is started. Since the total is 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds, the apparent opening time and closing time are the same when suddenly probable big hit and small hit.

  Incidentally, in response to the above-described modification, in step S2486 shown in FIG. 28, if the big prize opening open flag is not set (that is, the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening are closed). CPU 56 reads the release time in the release pattern data pointed to by the pointer and sets it in the open / close time timer.

  In step S2487, the CPU 56 controls the second big prize opening to be in an open state. Specifically, the solenoid 21b is driven to control the second grand prize opening to the open state. In step S2488, the CPU 56 sets a special winning opening open flag.

  Furthermore, in step S2489, if the big prize opening open flag is set (that is, if the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening is being opened), the CPU 56 is in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer. The closing time is read and set in the opening / closing time timer.

  In step S2490, the CPU 56 controls the first grand prize winning port or the second grand prize winning port to be closed. Specifically, if the opening of the first first prize winning opening is to be ended, the driving of the solenoid 21a is stopped and the first big winning prize opening is controlled to be in an open state. Further, if the opening of the second big winning opening is to be finished, the driving of the solenoid 21b is stopped and the second big winning opening is controlled to be in an open state.

  As described above, according to this modification, as the variable winning means, the first variable winning means (in this example, the first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a) and the second variable winning means (in this example, the first prize winning device). 2 special variable winning ball apparatus 20b). Further, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are arranged in a predetermined order (in this example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a and the second special variable winning ball device 20b are alternately opened). It is possible to control to a specific gaming state (in this example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state) to be changed to a state, and as a specific gaming state, the variable winning means is set to the first state (in this example, an open state). A first specific gaming state (a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit or a probable big hit in this example) that is changed for one period (29 seconds in this example), and a variable winning means in a first state shorter than the first period. It is possible to control to a second specific gaming state (in this example, a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state based on a sudden probability variation big hit) that is changed for two periods (in this example, one second). And when controlling to the 2nd specific game state, compared with the case where it controls to the 1st specific game state, either one variable winning means of the 1st variable winning means or the 2nd variable winning means is Control is performed such that a disadvantageous period from when the second variable winning means is changed to the first state until the second variable winning means is changed to the first state is increased. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the closing time from the closing of the first big winning opening in the big hit game based on the normal big hit or the probable big hit to the opening of the second big winning opening in the next round T3 (in this example, 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds) and the closing time T4 (in this example, 1 in the first round) from the closing of the second big prize opening to the opening of the first big prize opening in the next round (Seconds + 1 second = 2 seconds), the closing time T5 (from the closing of the first big prize opening in the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit to the opening of the second big prize opening in the second round) In this example, 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds) is longer. Therefore, while the disadvantage period is relatively short in the first specific gaming state, while the disadvantage period is relatively long in the second specific gaming state, in the gaming machine having a plurality of variable winning means, the disadvantage period is reduced. It can be effectively controlled to improve the interest of the game.

  In this modified example, the case where the first grand prize winning port and the second grand prize winning port are controlled to be opened alternately is shown. However, the first grand prize winning port and the second grand prize winning port are arranged according to a predetermined order. What is necessary is just to control to an open state, and it does not necessarily need to control to an open state alternately. For example, the first grand prize winning port → the first grand prize winning port → the second grand prize winning port → the first grand prize winning port → the first grand prize winning port → the second grand prize winning port. However, the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening may be controlled to be in an open state according to some predetermined order. Further, even when the grand prize opening is configured to be opened in an irregular order as described above, as shown in this modification, the downstream side second big prize opening is closed and the upstream side is closed. The time until the first big prize opening is opened may be shortened.

  Further, according to this modification, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are different in the ease of winning the game ball. Specifically, in this modification, the second special variable winning ball device 20b is easier to win than the first special variable winning ball device 20a. And when controlling to the 2nd specific game state, you may comprise so that the variable winning means for which a game ball is hard to win may be changed to a 1st state for a 2nd period. For example, in the small hit game state in the second specific game state, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S308 to S310 using the small hit release pattern data shown in FIG. You may make it open | release the 1st big prize opening of the one where it is hard to win a prize in both opening of the first big prize opening and opening of the second big prize opening. With such a configuration, it is difficult for the game ball to win the variable winning means in the second specific gaming state, so that the game can be sharpened and the interest in the game can be improved.

  For the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, it has been described that the process (S31 in FIG. 5) of outputting information (data) relating to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the information output circuit 64 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in S31 as described above may include a winning information signal that can identify the winning opening where the game ball has won and the number of winnings.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a first start winning opening 13, a second starting winning opening 14, a large winning opening (first special variable winning ball apparatus 20a, second special variable winning ball apparatus 20b), and a winning opening. There are multiple types of prize openings. And, the winning of game balls to these winning holes is a winning detection switch such as a first starting port switch 13a, a second starting port switch 14a, a first count switch 23a, a second count switch 23b, and a winning port switch. And a detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, processing for counting and storing the number of game balls (winning number) won in each winning port during a predetermined period based on the detection signal input from the winning detection switch. It is possible, and by performing such processing, winning information that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won during a predetermined period is stored. The game control microcomputer 560, based on such winning information, receives a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning points that the game ball has won in each predetermined period each time a predetermined period elapses. Is output from the information output circuit 64 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The number of winnings specified by the winning information signal that can be counted and stored in the game control microcomputer 560 and the winning mouth and the winning number that the game ball won can be specified is, for example, every predetermined elapsed time such as every 10 minutes. Information on the number of winnings (output every predetermined elapsed time), information on the number of winnings for each period required to generate one big hit gaming state (output every time a big winning gaming state occurs), each day Information regarding the number of winnings since the power was turned on (output every predetermined elapsed time), and information regarding the number of winnings for each player (when the player can be specified by player specifying information such as game card information) In addition, any information may be output when the end of the game is selected by each player.

  In addition, as the winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the winning number that the game ball has won, the winning opening and the winning number (one piece) that are output every time the gaming ball wins any of the winning holes, and May be a winning information signal that can identify the

  Further, as another example of outputting the winning information signal to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in order to perform an operation test on a part of the output terminals of the main board 31 with a test device provided outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. These connection parts may be connected, and a winning information signal indicating the latest winning information in the current gaming state may be output from the gaming control microcomputer 560 to the outside via the connecting portion.

  In this way, a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning points of the game balls is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the winning opening where the gaming balls have won outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. It is possible to recognize winning information that can specify the number of winnings.

[Second Embodiment]
As the second embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine having the game control as an example of the game control, such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the first embodiment, is configured as an enclosed circulation pachinko machine (pachinko gaming machine). An example of a system for managing the pachinko machine and the card unit will be described. Note that the gaming machine, card unit, and system for managing them described as the second embodiment below may be applied to any of the gaming machine and card unit described as the first embodiment.

  The present invention shown by the embodiment described below is a gaming machine that uses a gaming machine that is played by a player and a gaming value owned by the player that is specified by a recording medium that is connected to the gaming machine and received. A game system including a gaming device that enables a game of a player, and a game in a gaming machine using a gaming value owned by the player, which is specified by a recording medium connected to a gaming machine in which a game is played by the player And a gaming device that enables gaming on a gaming machine using a gaming value owned by the player that is specified by a recording medium connected to and received by the gaming machine on which the game is played by the player The present invention relates to a game control device for controlling a device.

  Conventionally, as authentication information for mutual authentication, the SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in the ROM of the CU communication control unit at the chip manufacturing stage, and the SID of the main control unit is stored in the CU communication control unit at the time of CU manufacture. It is known that the control unit downloads and stores the SID of the CU communication control unit from the key management server as authentication information (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-1000076).

  Also, there is known a gaming machine control board configured to monitor an illegal act with respect to a control chip mounted on one gaming machine via another control chip (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-89701). .

  However, among information transmitted and received at the time of mutual authentication, a storage method for particularly important information in terms of security is not described, and it cannot be said that security is sufficiently considered.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to appropriately store information that is particularly important in terms of security, thereby enabling a gaming system and game capable of further improving security. Device and game control device.

(1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (a sealed circulation pachinko machine (P 2F), a medal-free slot machine (S 2SF)) in which a game is played by a player, and a record that is connected to the gaming machine and received. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F, a call lamp device, etc.) that enables a game on the gaming machine using a gaming value owned by a player specified by a medium,
The gaming device is:
Including information transmission means (FIG. 86: communication control IC 325aF) for transmitting predetermined information,
The gaming machine is
Storage means (FIG. 86: payout control storage unit 171 cF) capable of storing the user program;
Arithmetic processing means that reads the user program from the storage means and can execute the read user program (FIG. 86: the payout control circuit 171aF reads and executes the user program stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF); ,
Communication means (FIG. 86: communication control circuit 171bF) for receiving the predetermined information,
The arithmetic processing means stores the predetermined information received by the communication means in the storage area of the arithmetic processing means without notifying the user program (the payout control circuit 171aF notifies the user program of the predetermined information). Without being stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF).

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information is stored only in the storage area of the arithmetic processing unit, and is not notified to the user program and is not stored in the storage unit. For this reason, it is possible to prevent outflow of predetermined information due to access to the storage means, and thus security can be improved.

(2) In (1) above,
The arithmetic processing means determines whether or not it is possible to return from the incommunicable state using predetermined information stored in the storage area (the payout control circuit 171aF uses the “store code” to make communication impossible) Whether or not it is possible to recover from the normal state).

  According to the above configuration, security can be improved because it is possible to determine whether or not it is possible to recover from a state in which communication is not possible using predetermined information that can prevent outflow.

(3) In (2) above,
The arithmetic processing means updates or deletes the predetermined information stored in the storage area when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the payout control circuit 171aF causes the P stand 2F to respond to a card insertion response). It is updated when it is transmitted to the CU 3F. The payout control circuit 171aF is erased when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2F is given.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information stored in the storage area is updated or deleted only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the predetermined information is not updated or deleted without permission. In addition, since the processing from storage to deletion of the predetermined information is performed only within the arithmetic processing means, it is possible to prevent outflow to the outside.

(4) In any one of the above (1) to (3),
The gaming device is:
Count processing means for counting the game points as points based on a count request from the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game point when a winning occurs (FIG. 49: CU3F is state information including information that count request = ON) When the response is received, the requested counting ball number is added to the holding ball number.)
The gaming machine is
History information storage means for storing the counting history information of the counting processing executed by the counting processing means (FIG. 50: P table 2F counts from P table 2F side from counting request ON state to counting request OFF state. The history of the number of game balls paid out to the CU3F side as the requested number of balls is stored as a counting history.

  According to the above configuration, since the counting history information is stored on the gaming machine side, it is possible to reflect the past counting history on the gaming device by referring to the counting history information on the gaming device side at the time of recovery. it can. Also, if the gaming device is out of order when returning the counting ball from the gaming machine to the gaming device, the counting ball will be lost, so the counting history is stored on the gaming machine side for maintenance. It also becomes a countermeasure.

(5) In the above (4),
When the communication means returns from the communication disabled state, the communication means transmits the count history information of the past predetermined number of count processes stored in the history information storage means based on the count history request from the gaming device. (The communication control circuit 171bF transmits the past two count histories (count history 1 and count history 2) to the CU3F),
The gaming device is:
It further includes history information receiving means (communication control IC 325aF of CU3F) for receiving the counting history information of the counting processing for the past predetermined number of times.

  According to said structure, a count log | history can be referred back to the past predetermined number of times. Thereby, the accuracy of the recovery process can be improved.

(6) In the above (4) or (5),
The predetermined information transmitted by the information transmitting means includes store information (store code) and device specifying information (SC board ID) that can specify a game control device included in the gaming device.

  According to said structure, the movement of the game apparatus to another store and the change of the combination of a game apparatus and a game machine in a store can be considered. Thereby, problems, such as taking over count history data between different stores, can be prevented.

(7) In any one of the above (4) to (6),
The information transmission means transmits count request reception information indicating the reception of the count request (status information response in a count response ON state) and time information (count reception time) when the count request is received to the gaming machine. ,
The history information storage means stores the time information in association with the count history information corresponding to the count request (stores the count reception time in the count history 1).

  According to the above configuration, since the count reception time is stored in association with the count history, it is possible to grasp which count history corresponds to which count request.

(8) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (a sealed circulation pachinko machine (P stand 2F), a medal-free slot machine (S stand 2SF)) in which a game is played by a player, and is specified by the received recording medium. A gaming device (CU3F, call lamp device, etc.) that enables a game in the gaming machine using the gaming value owned by the player,
Information transmitting means for transmitting predetermined information (FIG. 86: communication control IC 325aF) is provided,
The information transmitting means is not notified to the user program executed by the arithmetic processing means (FIG. 86: payout control circuit 171aF) of the gaming machine, but is stored in a storage area (register in the payout control circuit 171aF) of the arithmetic processing means. A gaming apparatus for transmitting the stored predetermined information to the gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information is stored only in the storage area of the arithmetic processing unit, and is not notified to the user program and is not stored in the storage unit. For this reason, it is possible to prevent outflow of predetermined information due to access to the storage means, and thus security can be improved.

(9) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (a sealed circulation pachinko machine (P stand 2F), a medal-free slot machine (S stand 2SF)) in which a game is played by a player, and is specified by the received recording medium. A game control device (FIG. 39: CU control unit 323F) for controlling a game device (a CU3F, a call lamp device, etc.) that enables a game on the gaming machine using a game value owned by the player,
Information transmitting means for transmitting predetermined information (FIG. 86: communication control IC 325aF) is provided,
The information transmitting means is not notified to the user program executed by the arithmetic processing means (FIG. 86: payout control circuit 171aF) of the gaming machine, but is stored in a storage area (register in the payout control circuit 171aF) of the arithmetic processing means. A game control apparatus for transmitting the stored predetermined information to the gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information is stored only in the storage area of the arithmetic processing unit, and is not notified to the user program and is not stored in the storage unit. For this reason, it is possible to prevent outflow of predetermined information due to access to the storage means, and thus security can be improved.

(10-1) A gaming machine (P stand 2F) including first control means (main control unit 161F) and second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas that can store user programs (main control storage unit 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF),
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF, 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit is
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88, etc.) for storing the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control units 600F, 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and the return process On the condition (SF292 in FIG. 90: a flag indicating the completion of recovery is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F in FIG. 90), the generation of the predetermined information by the execution of the user program is performed. 90 (SF293 in FIG. 90: A signal for starting the processing of the user program is transmitted, or the processing of the user program stopped by the stopping unit is canceled and the processing of the user program is restarted).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(10-2) In the above (10-1),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control unit and the second control unit include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the processing is appropriately restarted in both the first control unit and the second control unit. be able to.

(10-3) In the above (10-1) or (10-2),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuit (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).
When transmitting the predetermined information, the communication control circuit also transmits arrival confirmation information that is updated according to a predetermined update pattern in order to confirm the arrival of the predetermined information (FIG. 93: to the payout control unit 171F) Send the power-on notification command including the serial number sent last time (main control serial number = n + 1)),
The communication control circuit of one of the first control means and the second control means resends the arrival confirmation information transmitted last time when returning from the communication disabled state (FIG. 93: power supply for power-on notification command) Send response of input / output)
The first control means or the second control means including the other communication control circuit includes the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the communication disabled state and the arrival confirmation information received before communication is disabled. Is not based on the predetermined information (FIG. 93: main control sequence number = n + 1 and payout control sequence number = n do not match) based on the predetermined information transmitted by the one communication control circuit by the return processing. An information update process (FIG. 93: execute recovery process) is executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the communication disabled state and the arrival confirmation information received before the communication is disabled are not in a predetermined relationship, one communication control is performed by the return process. Since the information updating process based on the predetermined information transmitted by the circuit is executed, the communication burden between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced.

(10-4) In the above (10-1) to (10-3),
The information storage unit includes a nonvolatile storage area (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88) and a volatile storage area (for example, a register other than the transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87). And registers other than the data reception register 713F shown in FIG.

  According to the above configuration, since the information storage unit has the nonvolatile storage area and the volatile storage area, it is possible to suppress the amount of data required in the recovery process when communication is resumed.

(10-5) In the above (10-1) to (10-4),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set a valid period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written in the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner has expired (FIG. 88: main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting) The register 719cF sets an effective time during which the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written into the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is cut off. ).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit can set a valid period during which the predetermined information can be written to the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner expires. It is possible to reliably store the necessary information even after. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between nails of the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the predetermined information is continuously displayed. By setting an effective period writable in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information that the floating ball has won.

(10-6) A game board (game board 26F) provided with first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means includes
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (payout control unit 171F) included in the game frame (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit is
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87) that stores the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control unit 600F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined manner (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 161bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the return process. 90 (SF293 in FIG. 90: a flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F), the generation of the predetermined information by executing the user program is resumed (SF293 in FIG. 90: user program). A signal for starting the above process is transmitted, or the process of the user program stopped by the stopping means is canceled and the process of the user program is resumed).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(10-7) A game frame (front frame 5F) provided with second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control unit 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F). There,
The second control means includes
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit is
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88) for storing the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control unit 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the return process. 90 (SF293 in FIG. 90: a flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery request / completion register 718F), the generation of the predetermined information by executing the user program is resumed (SF293 in FIG. 90: user A signal for starting the program processing is transmitted, or the processing of the user program stopped by the stopping means is canceled and the processing of the user program is resumed).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(11-1) A gaming machine (P stand 2F) provided with first control means (main control part 161F) and second control means (payout control part 171F) communicating with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas that can store user programs (main control storage unit 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF),
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF, 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit is
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88, etc.) for storing the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF);
Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF) for transmitting encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is a decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information transmitted by the other (for example, the communication control circuit 161bF decrypts the information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF). including.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit encrypts the information stored in the information storage unit by the encryption unit of the communication control circuit and transmits the information transmitted by the other decryption unit. Since the information is decrypted, the processing of the encrypted communication performed between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced, and the contents of the encrypted information can be prevented from leaking and the security from being lowered. it can.

(11-2) In the above (11-1),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control unit and the second control unit include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the encrypted communication process is performed in both the first control unit and the second control unit. In addition to mitigation, it is possible to prevent the content of encrypted information from leaking and reducing security.

(11-3) In the above (11-1) or (11-2),
The communication control circuit is configured to generate an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when power is turned on (for example, an encryption key and a decryption key are generated by an authentication sequence performed when the power is turned on shown in FIG. 90); The encryption communication using the encryption key and the decryption key generated by the process is executed (after the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 90, the encryption communication can be performed using the generated encryption key and the decryption key).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit executes a process of generating an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when the power is turned on, and a process of performing encryption communication using the encryption key and the decryption key generated by the process Therefore, it is possible to reduce the encryption communication process performed between the first control unit and the second control unit, and to appropriately restart the process in at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit. .

(11-4) In the above (11-1) to (11-3),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set a valid period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written in the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner has expired (FIG. 88: main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting) The register 719cF sets an effective time during which the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written into the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is cut off. ).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit can set a valid period during which the predetermined information can be written to the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner expires. It is possible to reliably store the necessary information even after. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between nails of the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the predetermined information is continuously displayed. By setting an effective period writable in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information that the floating ball has won.

(11-5) A game board (game board 26F) including first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means includes
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (payout control unit 171F) included in the game frame (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit is
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87) that stores the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF);
The second control including decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF) Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(11-6) A game frame (front frame 5F) provided with second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control unit 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F). There,
The second control means includes
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit is
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88) for storing the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF);
The first control including decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, information encrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF). Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(12-1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that grants a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and is connected to the gaming machine in a communicable manner, and uses the valuable value owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 40: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 48). Count request transmitting means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 51: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P stand 2F sends a command of state information response including information of counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
The gaming device is:
Based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means, counting processing means for counting the game points to the points (FIG. 51: CU3F is requested when receiving a status information response including information of counting request = ON. The number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 35: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 51: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F) for processing the holding points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 51: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notification means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 51: CU3F prepares for card return when card removal is possible) Information on status OFF and card waiting for card removal is notified to P stand 2F.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(12-2) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and uses the valuable value possessed by the player to play a game in the gaming machine. A gaming device (CU3F) that enables
Count processing means for counting the game points based on the count request from the gaming machine (FIG. 51: When the CU3F receives a status information response including information of count request = ON, the requested counting ball And add the number to the number of balls.)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 35: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 51: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F) for processing the holding points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 51: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notification means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 51: CU3F prepares for card return when card removal is possible) The P table 2F is notified of information indicating that the state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(12-3) The present invention is connected to a gaming device (CU3F) that enables a game using a valuable value owned by the player so as to be communicable, and gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs ( P stand 2F)
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 40: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 48). Count request transmitting means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 51: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P stand 2F sends a command of state information response including information of counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
When the points counted based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means are processed in a manner that can be specified by the recording medium received by the gaming device, and the recording medium is returned, the recording medium is awaiting removal. The notification of being in a state can be accepted from the gaming device (FIG. 51: When the card 2F is ready for card removal, the CU 3F notifies the information of the card return ready state OFF and card waiting waiting ON). Receive.)

  According to the above configuration, since the game device receives a notification that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is in a removal waiting state, the game machine prompts the player to remove the recording medium. This makes it possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(12-4) In the above (12-1) to (12-3),
The gaming device includes notification means (for example, a display 312F shown in FIG. 35) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, so that it is possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(12-5) In the above (12-1) to (12-3),
The gaming machine includes display means (for example, a variable display device 278F shown in FIG. 35) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed based on the notification from the gaming device.

  According to the above configuration, since it is possible to visually notify the gaming machine that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented.

(12-6) In the above (12-1) or (12-2),
The removal waiting state notification means notifies the gaming device or a device connected to the gaming machine (for example, a hall computer, a call lamp on P units) that the recording medium is waiting to be removed. .

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the recording medium by notifying a device other than the gaming machine or gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

(12-7) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a prize is generated, and is connected to the gaming machine in a communicable manner, and uses the valuable value owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 35: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
When the recording medium is accepted by the recording medium accepting means, a game hall specifying information notifying means (FIG. 43) for notifying the gaming machine of game hall specifying information capable of specifying the game hall in which the gaming device is installed. When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including the “store code” added by the security board 325F to the P unit 2F.
The gaming machine is
Game hall identification information storage means for storing the game hall identification information notified by the game hall identification information notification means (FIG. 43: P stand 2F stores “store code” included in the insertion notification command). ,
The game room specifying information newly notified by the game hall specifying information notifying means when the communication is restored after recovering from the communication incapable state where the gaming machine and the gaming device cannot communicate, and the game hall specifying When a recovery request including a “store code” is transmitted from the CU 3F to the game hall specifying information comparing means to be compared with the game hall specifying information stored in the information storage means, the “store code” ”And the stored“ store code ”are determined to match.)
Game prohibition means for prohibiting continuation of the game when the game hall identification information is determined to be inconsistent by the game hall identification information comparison means (P store 2F stores “store code” from CU3F. If the store code does not match, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  According to the above configuration, if the newly notified game hall specifying information and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means do not match, the continuation of the game is prohibited. It is possible to prevent fraud in which the store is moved in the stored state.

(12-8) In the above (12-7),
The gaming device is:
A device capable of specifying a game control device (for example, security board 325F shown in FIG. 38) included in the game device when the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means and when the communication is restored. Device specific information notifying means for notifying the gaming machine of specific information (SC board ID) (FIG. 43: When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the CU 3F receives the “SC board ID” added by the security board 325F. And a card insertion notification command including:
The gaming machine is
Device specifying information storage means for storing the device specifying information notified by the device specifying information notifying means (FIG. 43: P platform 2F stores “SC board ID” included in the insertion notification command);
When the communication is recovered, the device specifying information comparing unit (P 2F) compares the device specifying information newly notified by the device specifying information notifying unit with the device specifying information stored in the device specifying information storing unit. Further compares “SC board ID” from CU3F with the stored “SC board ID”),
The game prohibiting means prohibits continuation of the game when the device specifying information comparing means determines that the device specifying information is inconsistent (in the case of mismatch, prohibiting continuation of the game).

  According to the above configuration, when the newly notified device identification information and the device identification information stored in the device identification information storage means do not match, the game is prohibited from being continued, so the counting balls are stored in the game medium. Unauthorized movement of the gaming machine in the state can be prevented.

(12-9) In the above (12-7) or (12-8) above,
The gaming machine is
A game hall identification information reading means for reading the game hall identification information added to the game medium used for the game (for example, a sensor is provided in the collection ball passage path of the P stand 2F, and the sensor is provided in the game ball. Read certain identification information (such as surface markings).
The game hall specifying information comparing means includes the game hall specifying information added to the game medium read by the game hall specifying information reading means, and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means. Compare (by the read identification information, it is determined whether or not it matches the identification information of the game ball of the own store. To do.)

  According to the above configuration, if the game hall identification information added to the game medium read by the game hall identification information reading means and the game hall identification information stored in the game hall identification information storage means do not match, the game medium It is possible to notify that game balls from other stores are mixed.

  Hereinafter, a second embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as “embodiment”) will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Configuration of pachinko machines>
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A plurality of game islands (not shown) arranged in the game hall (hall) may be abbreviated as an enclosed circulation pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a game machine, a pachinko machine, or a P machine) as an example of a game machine. ) 2F is attached. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3F, which is an example of a gaming device, is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2F at a side position on a predetermined side of the P table 2F. Yes. The card unit will be described below as an example of the gaming device according to the present embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but it is connected to the P stand 2F to collect game information such as jackpots and abnormalities, and the number of winnings. It may be a calling lamp device or the like.

  The P stand 2F encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting ball operating handle 25F, the firing motor 18F (see FIG. 38) is driven to make one shot of the enclosing ball. The game board 26F is configured so that it can be played one by one in the game area 27F in front of the game board 26F. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the hitting operation handle 25F, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the hitting operation handle 25F. Is detected by a touch sensor, and the firing motor 18F is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted according to the amount of turning operation of the hitting operation handle 25F by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27F.

  The launch strength of the pachinko ball (hereinafter simply referred to as launch strength T) can be adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting ball operating handle 25F (hereinafter also simply referred to as handle manipulation amount), and the handle manipulation amount is increased. The firing intensity T increases accordingly. Therefore, the player can adjust the firing strength T so that the pachinko ball passes through the region he / she aims by adjusting the handle operation amount.

  The P stand 2F shown in FIG. 35 is a so-called first type pachinko gaming machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278F is provided in the center of the game area 27F. In addition, the game area 27F is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27F shown in FIG. 35, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271F, three normal winning holes 272F, 273F, 274F, and three start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276F is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278F includes a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols), and based on the detection signals of the start winning balls that have won the respective start winning openings 275F, 276F, 277F. Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271F is opened.

  Further, the display result of the variable display device 278F becomes a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves). And a probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved after the end of the jackpot state.

  Pachinko balls that have been struck into the game area 27F are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 154F without winning. The pachinko balls won in any one of the winning openings and the pachinko balls collected in the out opening 154F are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the P stand 2F. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27F.

  The P base 2F causes the indicator 54F extending from the CU 3F to be fitted to the connection surface 54aF provided on the front surface of the P base 2F by installing the CU 3F in a lateral position. Therefore, a display 54F is provided at a position below the game area 27F in the P stand 2F. The display device 54F is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the points, the remaining card amount, or the display of the variable display device 278F to the player. Further, the display 54F is fitted to the P base 2F by connecting a connection terminal (not shown) provided on the back surface to a connection terminal 54bF provided on the connection surface 54aF of the P base 2F. Thus, if it is the structure which fits the indicator 54F of CU3F to the connection surface 54aF of P stand 2F, CU3F and P stand 2F can be connected more strongly and fraud can be prevented. Furthermore, fraud can be further prevented by preventing the connection and locking with the display 54F from being released unless the glass door 6F or the lower door provided with the hitting ball operating handle 25F is opened. As shown in FIG. 35, the display 54F is not limited to the structure formed integrally with the CU 3F and fitted to the connection surface 54aF of the P base 2F. The display 54F is formed independently of the CU 3F and is formed on the front surface of the P base 2F. The structure which can be attached may be sufficient.

  In addition, a game ball number display for displaying the number of game balls is provided above the connection surface 54aF of the P stand 2F. The game ball number display 29F is composed of a 7-segment LED display and is controlled by a payout control unit 171F described later. The number of game balls display 29F displays the number of game balls to be described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like. Note that the game ball number display 29F is not limited to a 7-segment LED display, and may be a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  Furthermore, a counting button 28F for counting the gaming balls to the holding balls is provided on the left side of the gaming ball number display 29F on the P stand 2F. In the present embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the time for which the counting button 28F is kept pressed. It should be noted that, regardless of the pressing duration time, if the button is pressed once, a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) may be counted from the gaming ball to the holding ball, or when the counting button 28F is pressed once. All of the game balls currently owned by the player may be counted regardless of the pressing time (regardless of whether the button is pressed for a long time). Further, the counting speed is further improved when a card return operation is performed, and a smooth card return process is realized.

  Thus, since the counting button 28F is provided on the P table 2F side, the operability of the player sitting facing the P table 2F can be improved as compared with the case where the counting button 28F is provided on the CU 3F side. . In addition, the P platform 2F is provided with speakers 270F for outputting music data to be reproduced in accordance with the effects displayed on the variable display device 278F at the upper right position and the upper left position of the game area 27F. Note that the position and number of speakers are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 35, and the position and number may be changed as necessary.

  The P stand 2F according to the present embodiment can be divided into a game board 26F and another front frame (game frame) 5F. In particular, the game board 26F is different for each model of pachinko gaming machine developed by each company, while the front frame 5F is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, the game store only needs to replace the game board 26F when replacing a new stand.

  As described above, the P stand 2F is configured such that a game machine that performs game control like the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is configured as an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, and the basic game control and effect control are performed as described above. Controls similar to those of the gaming machine 1 (for example, variable display control based on hold storage information, big hit game control based on hold storage information, and probability change control based on hold storage information) are performed.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the CU3F according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This CU3F is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, and a member player who has registered as a member in the playground. A membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to, is accepted. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The CU3F that has received these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, or the number of accumulated balls) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. . In the P stand 2F, a ball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the game ball data is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining balls that can be fired. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the CU3F, a bill insertion slot 302F for inserting bills, a card insertion / discharge port 309F for inserting membership cards and visitor cards, and the like are provided. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  On the front side of the CU3F, when a member card is received, the display unit 312F is identified by the member card ID (also simply referred to as a card ID or C-ID) recorded on the member card and the member card ID. A replay button 319F for performing a replay game using the number of stored balls is provided.

  The display 312F displays the prepaid balance (also referred to as card balance or simply the balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), but can display the number of game balls and other various information. In addition, the surface is configured by a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312F with a finger.

  When the replay button 319F is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game by the P stand 2F. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possession balls is not recorded and the storage ball is recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the storage ball is withdrawn and becomes a game ball. It is converted and the game by P stand 2F becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. In addition to the replay button 319F, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the holding ball may be provided, and the replay button 319F may be a button dedicated to savings ball withdrawal.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The storage ball is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Mochitama” is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by paying out the possessionball. The number of possessed balls is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall. That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  A “game ball” is a ball that can be fired by a gaming machine. As described above, the data on the number of game balls is generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card, holding balls, or storing balls.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but stored in association with the membership card number on a server installed in a game hall such as a hall management computer, and the corresponding storage ball is searched based on the membership card number. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. When storing the hall server 801F in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801F may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  In addition, the timing of storing the holding ball in a card (member card, visitor card) or hall server is stored in a fixed period, for example, in real time every time the counting button 28F is operated and the counting process is performed. It is conceivable that the timing is such that it is stored in a lump or when the card is returned.

  Also, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the CU3F, the holding ball stored in the CU3F is temporarily stored as a stored ball in the hall server 801F, and the date when the player receives the return of the card When the card is inserted into the same or another CU3F again on the same day, only the possession balls for the day that are once stored as accumulated balls are stored again in the CU3F, and the game balls are added within the range of the possession balls. You may be able to do it.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302F is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320F, a ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321F, and a card return button 322F are further provided on the front side of the CU 3F. The IR photosensitive unit 320F is an IR photosensitive unit 320F that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a game attendant, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal. The ball lending button 321F is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the remaining amount recorded on the inserted card and using it in a game by the P stand 2F. The card return button 322F is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 36, the P base 2F opens and closes a front frame (hereinafter also referred to as a cell) 5F and a glass door 6F with respect to the frame-shaped outer frame 4F with the left edge as a swing center. It is provided as possible.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging projections 6aF and 6bF are provided near the edge of the front frame 5F opposite to the center of swing (the free end side). The engaging protrusions 6aF and 6bF are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF of the outer frame 4F. When the open front frame 5F is pressed against the outer frame 4F, the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF get over the engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF, and the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF are moved downward by the urging force of the spring in the state of being over. Move and become locked.

  Then, a game attendant inserts a key into the keyhole 10F shown in FIG. 35 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, clockwise rotation), so that a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6aF against the biasing force of the spring, 6bF is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6aF and 6bF are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF to be in the unlocked state, and the front frame 5F is released.

  Further, the front frame 5F is also provided with an engaging protrusion 8F for the glass door 6F, and an engaging hole 9F is provided in the glass door 6F portion facing the engaging protrusion 8F. The engaging protrusion 8F is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engaging protrusion 8F is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engaging hole 9F by pressing the opened glass door 6F against the front frame 5F. By getting over, the engagement protrusion 8F is pushed down by the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8F and the engagement hole 9F are engaged with each other to be in a locked state. In this state, a game attendant inserts a key into the keyhole 10F shown in FIG. 35 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation), thereby raising the engaging protrusion 8F against the biasing force of the spring. Then, the engagement between the engagement protrusion 8F and the engagement hole 9F is released, and the lock door is released, and the glass door 6F is opened.

  A front frame opening detection switch 13F is provided at a position in contact with the outer frame 4F in the lower portion of the front frame 5F, and it is detected that the front frame 5F has been opened. Further, a glass door open detection switch 12F is provided in a contact portion with the glass door 6F in the upper portion of the front frame 5F, and the glass door open detection switch 12F detects that the glass door 6F has been opened.

  The number of times the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F are opened is counted by a counter not shown. The counting counter is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by a backup power supply even when the power supply of the P stand 2F is interrupted. And the count value can be transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Here, the backup power source is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P stand 2F.

  A main control board 16F is provided on the back surface of the game board 26F (the surface opposite to the surface facing the glass door 6F). Since the back surface of the outer frame 4F is closed, the main control board 16F can be detached from the game board 26F by first opening the front frame 5F and removing the game board 26F from the front frame 5F. That is, in order to remove the main control board 16F from the game board 26F or replace the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F, it is necessary to open the front frame 5F, so the front frame opening detection switch 13F is used. The work can be detected without fail. Therefore, if the main control board 16F is illegally removed from the game board 26F, or the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F is illegally replaced, the front frame opening detection switch 13F can always detect.

  Further, a payout control board 17F is provided on the back surface of the front frame 5F. The payout control board 17F also needs to be removed from the back surface of the front frame 5F after first opening the front frame 5F. Therefore, if the payout control board 17F is illegally removed from the back surface of the front frame 5F or the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F is illegally replaced, the front frame open detection switch 13F can always detect.

  Next, the structure which installs the game board 26F in the front frame 5F is demonstrated. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a state before and after the game board 26F is attached to the front frame 5F. As shown in FIG. 37, attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF are provided on the back surface of the front frame 5F so as to be openable and closable around hinges 35aF and 35bF, respectively. The attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF have a square shape and have a bottom having a width corresponding to the game board 26F. By pushing the game board 26F into the front frame 5F in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 37 (b), the game board 26F is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF as shown in FIG. 37 (a). When the game board 26F is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF, the convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F side is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33F provided on the front frame 5F side. Here, the convex-type drawer connector 32F and the concave-type drawer connector 33F are floating connectors having flexibility with respect to displacement.

  Further, when the game board 26F is installed on the front frame 5F, the convex drawer connector 32F is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33F, so that the main control board 16F on the game board 26F side and the payout control board on the front frame 5F side. 17F is connected. Further, the game board 26F is fixed at a fixed position, and the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F have flexibility with respect to a certain degree of positional deviation, so that the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer These can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship with the connector 33F. Even if the game board 26F is installed on the front frame 5F with only the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F without the mounting mechanisms 34aF and 34bF, the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are provided. Since they are flexible connectors themselves, they can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship between the game board 26F and the front frame 5F. Here, the convex drawer connector 32F is connected to the main control board 16F via an internal wiring (not shown) of the game board 26F, and the concave drawer connector 33F is a payout shown in FIG. 36 via the signal cable 36F. It is connected to the control board 17F.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the CU 3F and the P platform 2F. With reference to FIG. 38, the outline of the control circuit of CU3F and P stand 2F is demonstrated.

  The CU 3F is provided with a CU control unit 323F composed of a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323F is a main control function unit of the CU3F, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program and control data for operating the CPU, A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area for the CPU, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323F is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801F (see FIG. 39) for security management. Connected to the CU control unit 323F is a security board (SC board) 325F for communicating with the payout control board 17F of the P platform 2F while ensuring security. The security board 325F is a security monitoring function unit of the CU 3F. Note that the CU control unit 323F may be provided on the security board 325F, or the CU control unit 323F may be provided on a board different from the security board 325F. The CU3F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the P stand 2F side, and the P stand 2F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the CU3F side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325F on the CU3F side and the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side are connected to be communicable via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325F is provided with a communication control IC 325aF for controlling communication between the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F, and a security chip (SC) 325bF for monitoring the security of the P base 2F. Further, the SC 325bF includes a fraud detection unit 1325F, and the fraud detection unit 1325F performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323F to the P stand 2F. The server 800F (see FIG. 39) is notified. Also, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800F as board control information.

  To the CU control unit 323F, the authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input. In addition, when the IR photosensitive unit 320F receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, a light reception signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. The card reader / writer reads the recorded information of the inserted card into the CU control unit 323F, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323F, and the CU control unit 323F writes the information to the card reader / writer. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card recording information includes a card ID. The CU control unit 323F stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the game ends.

  The CU control unit 323F manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as the remaining amount or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323F to the display control unit 350F, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350F. The display data converted by the display control unit 350F is transmitted to the display 312F provided on the front surface of the CU3F and the display 54F disposed on the front surface of the P table 2F as shown in FIG. The display data transmitted to the display 54F is first input to the relay board 14F. Images corresponding to the display data are displayed on the display 312F and the display 54F. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F via the display control unit 350F. When the player operates the ball lending button 321F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the ball lending button 321F is not limited to the configuration provided on the CU 3F, and may be configured to be provided on the P base 2F and to input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the replay button 319F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the card return button 322F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F.

  The P base 2F has a main control board 16F that controls the progress of the game of the P base 2F, a payout control board 17F that manages and stores game balls, and a drive control of the firing motor 18F based on commands from the payout control board 17F. A launch control board 31F, a variable display device 278F, and an effect control board 15F that controls display of the variable display device 278F based on a command transmitted from the main control board 16F.

  The main control board 16F and the effect control board 15F are provided on the game board 26F. The main control board 16F is equipped with a game control microcomputer which is a main control unit 161F. The main control unit 161F is a main control function unit of the gaming machine. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161F is connected to a winning sensor 162F and a radio wave sensor 163F provided on the game board 26F.

  The main control unit 161F draws random numbers for determining big hits (or further including small hits) / off when the balls win the start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F, and stores the random numbers. This is called reserved storage. The maximum value of the number of reserved memories is “4”, for example. When the variable display device 278F can start a new variable display, the main control unit 161F digests one reserved memory, makes a jackpot determination based on the reserved memory, and derives the display result from the variable start. The variable display time to reach is determined from multiple types. Further, when the big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not the probability fluctuation is caused. The main control unit 161F transmits the result of the jackpot determination (including whether or not to change the probability) and information regarding the variable display time to the effect control unit 151F mounted on the effect control board 15F as commands.

  The command related to variable display transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the production control unit 151F specifies a variable start command indicating the start of variable display, a display result command indicating the result of variable display (big hit / miss), and a variable display pattern. A variable display time command that is possible, a variable stop command that indicates the timing for deriving and displaying a variable display result, and the like are included. Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the production control unit 151F include a command that can identify the progress status of the big hit during the big hit, a command that indicates the occurrence of a new reserved memory, and an occurrence of a gaming state error. There are commands to show.

  The effect control unit 151F determines the variable display content of the variable display device 278F based on these commands transmitted from the main control unit 161F. For example, the effect control unit 151F specifies a variable display result and a variable display time based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 161F, determines a stop symbol, and a variable display pattern (reach presence / absence, reach type). In addition, the effect pattern of the notice effect related to the big hit or reach is determined. The effect control unit 151F controls display of the variable display device 278F according to the determined variable display content.

  The effect control board 15F is also connected to the display 54F via the relay board 14F of the CU3F. The effect control unit 151F transmits a display control signal for variable display or the like to the variable display device 278F, and transmits a display control signal for performing display in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278F to the display 54F. Is possible. The relay board 14F and the display 54F may be provided on the P platform 2F side. In this case, the effect control board 15F on the P table 2F side is directly connected to the relay board 14F on the P table 2F side without going through the CU 3F.

  The payout control board 17F is provided on the front frame 5F. On the payout control board 17F, a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171F is mounted. The payout control unit 171F is a payout control function unit of the gaming machine. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  In addition, a firing ball detection switch 903F, an out ball detection switch 701F, a foul ball detection switch 33AF, a counting button 28F, and a radio wave sensor 173F are provided in a state of being electrically connected to the payout control board 17F. The radio wave sensor 173F is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173F is input to the payout control unit 171F via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17F. The ball raising switch (upper) 41aF detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and based on the detection, the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls.

  Therefore, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173F.

  From main control board 16F to payout control board 17F, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, manufacturer specific Jackpot information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16F of the P base 2F, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P base 2F is turned on. Information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, ordinary winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening). This is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the table 2F is powered on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P unit 2F is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16F and the payout control board 17F are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17F receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17F performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize in any of the starting winning awards. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17F that an error has occurred while the main control board 16F is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a prize ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the main control board 16F. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16F is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F to which this out ball detection signal has been input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27F), as will be described later. In the payout control board 17F to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33AF, as described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch 903F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F, to which this shot ball detection signal has been input, subtracts and updates the number of balls in game.

  The security board 325F of the CU 3F and the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F are electrically connected, and various commands are transmitted from the security board 325F to the payout control board 17F as described later. Conversely, various responses are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the security board 325F, as will be described later.

  In addition to the payout control board 17F, the front frame 5F is provided with a launch control board 31F, a launch motor 18F, and a game ball number display 29F. The game ball number indicator 29F may be directly attached to the front frame 5F, but the front frame 5F is similar to an upper plate or lower plate provided on the front side of a normal pachinko gaming machine where balls are paid out. And may be provided in such a manner that it can be rotated. The same applies to the display 54F. The payout control unit 171F of the payout control board 17F displays the number of game balls currently owned by the player on the game ball number display 29F.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17F to the firing control board 31F. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31F outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18F of the launcher. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state of being bullet-launched into the game area 27F. The firing control board 31F emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 18F when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F is input.

  The launch intensity sensor 19F detects the launch intensity T of the pachinko ball by the launch motor 18F. For example, the firing intensity sensor 19F detects, as the firing intensity T, a value obtained by converting an analog value output from a variable resistor configured to change the electrical resistance value according to the handle operation amount into a digital value. Hereinafter, as an example, it is assumed that the firing strength T varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) according to the amount of steering operation. The detection result of the launch intensity sensor 19F is output to the payout control board 17F and the CU 3F via the launch control board 31F.

  A display 54F and a relay board 14F extending from the CU 3F are provided on the front surface of the P base 2F. The display unit 54F receives display data (display control signal) from the display control unit 350F of the CU3F via the relay board 14F. Further, the display 54F receives display data (display control signal) from the effect control board 15F via the relay board 14F.

  The relay board 14F outputs a display control signal from one of the effect control board 15F and the display controller 350F to the display 54F, and the display 54F is based on the display control signal from the effect control board 15F or the display controller 350F. A switching circuit 141F for displaying an image is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the display 54F extending from the CU3F provided on the front surface of the P base 2F is configured to be controlled on the CU3F side. Instead, the display 54F is provided on the P base 2F side. The display 54F may be provided on the P base 2F side, and the display control board may be provided on the P base 2F side so that the display control can be performed on the P base 2F side. In this case, the display control board controls the display of the display 54F based on a command from the payout control unit 171F.

  The RAM clear switch 293F is a switch for erasing game table information and game information stored in the RAM of the P table 2F. After the P table enters an error state, the store clerk operates the switch to initialize It becomes possible to return to the state. The RAM clear switch 293F is operated by a store clerk after the card is discharged, for example.

<Pachinko ball circulation route>
Here, with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. 38, the circulation route of the pachinko balls in the P platform 2F will be outlined.

  When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the firing motor 18F is driven. Thereby, one pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position is shot by the hitting hammer and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27F.

  The detection of the launch of the game ball is detected when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF changes from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on a payout control board 17F (see FIG. 38) provided with a payout control unit 171F. Based on the detection, the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls. To do.

  Out of balls that have been driven into the game area 27F, the out balls that have entered the out port 154F (see FIG. 35) flow down the out ball flow path and are detected by an out ball detection switch 701F provided in the middle of the ball. . The foul ball flows down through the foul ball return path and is detected by a foul ball detection switch 33AF provided in the middle of the foul ball.

  All winning balls that have won the winning opening and the variable winning ball device are collected on the back of the gaming machine and guided to the collection ball passing path. Similarly, out balls and foul balls are also guided to the collection ball passing path. A firing ball detection switch 903F is provided in the collection ball passage route. For this reason, all the winning balls, out balls, and foul balls are detected by the firing ball detection switch 903F. That is, the fired ball detection switch 903F is a switch that detects all of the pachinko balls that are bulleted. When the number detected by this switch is equal to the number of shots of the pachinko balls shot by the firing motor 18F, it can be determined that all of the hit pachinko balls have been collected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference between the number of detections of the shot ball detection switch 903F and the number of bullets is calculated. When this difference number is not 0, the balls that have been driven into the game area 27F have been collected. It is determined that it is not. By making this determination, it is possible to determine whether the game area 27F is rolling, or whether there is a floating ball that does not fall due to being caught between nails or the like in the game area.

<Notification processing for abnormalities occurring in card units and pachinko machines>
FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 39, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323F, security board 325F, payout control unit 171F, or main control board 16F, notification is given in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. In this case, the CU control unit 323F, the security board 325F, the payout control unit 171F, or the main control board 16F may be replaced with another illegally manufactured product, or may malfunction or break down due to noise or the like. Or offline status due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800F shown in FIG. 39 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. The key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F.

  First, when an abnormality occurs due to the security board 325F of the CU 3F, the CU control part 323F detects the abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control part 323F and the security board 325F described above. This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security board 325F, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325b when the security chip 325b of the security board 325F is manufactured. When the CU3F is loaded into the amusement hall and connected to the hall server 801F, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800F of the key management center via the hall server 801F and stored in the CU control unit 323F. The

  When the CU control unit 323F detects an abnormality of the security board 325F, the CU control unit 323F notifies the hall server 801F of the fact and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F controls the display 312F to display that an abnormality has occurred and causes the display control unit 350F to perform an abnormality notification by lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, the CU control unit 323F transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F, the security board 325F detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and notifies the payout control unit 171F of the signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that. The security board 325F notifies the payout control unit 171F as a parallel signal via the PIF circuit 326F which is a parallel interface circuit. In response, the payout control unit 171F notifies the main control board 16F that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, main control board 16F performs control for operating the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325F detects an abnormality in the payout control unit 171F, the security control unit 325F notifies the CU control unit 323F to that effect, and the CU control unit 323F notifies the hall server 801F accordingly.

  As described above, when the security board 325F detects an abnormality in the CU control unit 323F, the security board 325F notifies the payout control unit 171F via the PIF circuit 326F, while when detecting an abnormality in the payout control unit 171F. Is notified to the CU control unit 323F, and the notification destination of the occurrence of abnormality by the security board 325F is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. Moreover, the security board 325F has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout control unit 171F that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the security board 325F via the PIF circuit 326F notifies the main control board 16F accordingly. In response to the notification, the main control board 16F performs control for abnormality notification similar to that described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171F, the fact is detected by the security board 325F, the fact that the abnormality has occurred is notified to the CU control unit 323F, and the CU control unit 323F performs the above-described abnormality notification control. Notify the hall server 801F that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171F, it is detected that the main control board 16F has occurred, and upon receiving the notification, the above-described abnormality notification control is performed.

  As described above, the payout control board 17F detects and notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16F when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325F, and informs the main control board 16F of the abnormality when the abnormality occurs. Detected and notifies the security board 325F that an abnormality has occurred. As with the security board 325F described above, the payout control board 17F is also controlled for anomaly notification even when a notice is given to the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The security board 325F and the payout control board 17F are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and perform abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Although described as having no function, an abnormality notification function may be provided in the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on the CU 3F side and the P stand 2F side, and the transmission / reception mode thereof. With reference to FIG. 40, main data of various data stored on each of the CU (card unit) 3F side and the P unit (pachinko gaming machine) 2F side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the P ball 2F side calculates the variation in the number of game balls, and stores and manages the current latest number of game balls. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU3F side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2F side. On the other hand, the number of possessed balls (the number of cards possessed), the number of accumulated balls, and the remaining card amount (remaining amount) are managed and stored on the CU3F side.

  FIG. 40 shows storage data of RAM provided in the CU control unit 323F on the CU3F side and storage data of RAM mounted on the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side. First, when the power is turned on with the P units (pachinko gaming machine) 2F and the CU (card unit) 3F being electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game hall, the payout control board on the P unit 2F side 17F has a main chip ID (main control chip ID) transmitted from the main control board 16F, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3F side, and also issues a payout chip ID (payout) stored in the payout control board 17F itself. Control chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data at the time when the communication is started after the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P stand 2F side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3F side are stored on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P stand 2F as that of the previous time is connected. The connection time data is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P unit 2F side by sending new connection time data from the CU3F side when communication between the CU3F side and the P unit 2F side is started. Time data is stored on the P platform 2F side.

  Both the CU and the P platform transmit the “sequential number” added to the message. Further, both the CU and the P platform store the “serial number” received from the other party. There are three types of “serial number”: “normal serial number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Normal sequence number” indicates the sequence number of the message. The “normal serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with the initial value “1” on the CU3F side (primary station side). However, the “normal serial number” is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The P station 2F side (secondary station side) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that there is no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The “additional serial number” is a serial number used when the CU 3F requests the P platform 2F to add game balls. The “counting serial number” is a serial number used when the P stand 2F requests the CU 3F to count game balls.

  Only the CU3F has a normal serial number update right. When the same normal serial number as the transmitted normal serial number is returned, the CU 3F stores the normal serial number as a backup and transmits the updated normal serial number. Only the CU3F has the addition update right of the addition serial number. When making an addition request, the CU 3F transmits an addition serial number obtained by adding 1 to the addition serial number that has been used for communication to the P unit 2F. The P base 2F returns the same addition serial number when accepting the request. When rejecting the request, the previously received addition sequence number (the addition sequence number received this time-1) is returned. Only the P platform 2F has the addition update right of the counting sequence number. When making a count request, the P platform 2F transmits a count sequence number added to the count sequence number that has been used for communication to the CU 3F. When the CU3F accepts the request, it returns the same counting sequence number. When rejecting the request, the received counting sequence number (counting sequence number-1 received this time) is returned.

  In the following, regarding “normal serial number”, a configuration in which the serial number received by the CU 3F at the time of transmission is counted up (+1) and transmitted will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and each of the P base 2F and the CU 3F or the P base 2F counts (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission, and the other receives the serial number received. May be transmitted as it is.

  The “addition serial number” and “counting serial number” are special serial numbers that are counted up in the addition request processing and the count request processing, respectively. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a configuration in which “normal serial number” is also counted up when the “additional serial number” and “counting serial number” are counted up. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to stop the “normal sequence number” from being counted up when the “additional sequence number” and the “counting sequence number” are counted up. In the following, “normal serial number” is simply referred to as “serial number”. The “additional sequence number” and “counting sequence number” are also collectively referred to as “request sequence number”.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2F side to the CU 3F side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171F (see FIG. 38) on the P table 2F side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2F side to the CU 3F side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later. However, instead of this, or in addition to the game ball counter, the number of game balls may be included in the latest game table information.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”. Here, the “prize ball” is a ball that is paid out when a ball wins a winning opening, and is a safe ball. The “fired ball” is a ball fired by the gaming machine. When there is a back ball, the number of balls obtained by subtracting the back ball is the number of fired balls. The “back ball” is a ball in which the fired ball returns without jumping onto the board surface. The “out mouth passing ball” is a ball that has passed through the out mouth 154F, and the total number of the out balls and the safe balls means the number of balls passing through the out mouth.

  For example, when a pachinko ball placed in the game area 27F wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F, the adding ball to which the gaming ball is added based on the winning information The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value (added ball number) of the added ball number counter is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. Moreover, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27F, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171F counts the number of game balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28F, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting ball number) from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the P stand 2F side, every time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3F side, the count values are stored in the previous game machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171F). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before), data of the number of added balls, the number of subtraction balls, and the number of counted balls, which are the game table information transmitted to the CU3F side immediately before, are backed up. Stored as data. When the latest gaming machine information is not transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side, this backup data includes not only the value of each counter of this time but also the value of each previous counter that has not been sent at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission. You may make it memorize | store by adding the number of game balls transmitted immediately before to this last game machine information.

  In addition, the payout control board 17F updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU3F side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3F side, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of balls, the remaining amount, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total subtraction are stored in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM. The number of balls (the total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) transmitted from the P stand 2F side, and the number of balls is updated. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2F side. Further, the number of cards held is added and updated based on the value of the counting ball counter transmitted from the P platform 2F. Thus, the CU3F can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2F one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3F has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of the game ball counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2F side. The CU3F updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU3F stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (number of subtracted balls), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801F (in this case, hall management). An error notification may be made by a computer or hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P unit 2F side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU3F side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU3F side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P unit 2F side. (CU3F side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3F side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3F side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side and stored on the P unit 2F side by the hall server 801F or hall management computer connected to the CU3F. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the CU3F has a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the remaining card amount of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 38) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, pressing input of a replay button 319F provided on the CU 3F (when no holding ball is present)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 38) is an input requesting the use of a holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU3F when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 38) subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area for storing the card remaining amount in response to an input requesting the use of the card remaining amount (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321F).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls that are deducted is the number of balls The number of balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side. In response to this, the P stand 2F side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  In the gaming system according to the present embodiment, on the other hand, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image that prohibits the use of the ball before counting remaining in the dish by hand and using it for the wagon service in the conventional enclosed circulation pachinko gaming machine provided with each counter.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. Has been. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. On the CU3F side, in response to this, the number of game balls is subtracted and the number of cards held is added and updated.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
Next, communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail. A message used in the communication is composed of a frame having a predetermined format. Transmission data (message) is always transmitted in units of one frame. That is, the divided transmission of the message is not performed. Moreover, when transmitting a message | telegram continuously, the space | interval of 1 millisecond or more is opened.

  One frame of transmission data includes a data length, a normal sequence number, an addition sequence number, a counting sequence number, a command, and a data portion. “Data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). “Command” is a command code of the message. The “data part” is data of a message.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU (card unit) 3F and the P units (pachinko gaming machine) 2F will be described.

  FIG. 41 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information to the P base 2F. In response to this recovery request, a response named recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this recovery response notifies the CU3F of recovery information.

  The recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F after the CU 3F completes the authentication. The recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F, and the CU 3F transmits the command first after the authentication is completed. The recovery request includes “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, and “previous final transmission count serial number”. “Serial number” is a sequence number (1 to 255). “Command” is a command code for the recovery request, and is represented by binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The “last last transmission serial number” is the serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2F at the previous connection. When “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number” is “0”, this indicates a state where there is no stored sequence number. The “previous last transmission serial number” is a serial number that stores the “sequential number” as the previous final transmission serial number (serial number) on the P unit 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received at the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. It is.

  “Previous last transmission count sequence number” is a count sequence number of a response to the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the previous connection. “Last transmission count sequence number” indicates that there is no stored sequence number when “0”. The “previous last transmission count sequence number” is a sequence number that stores the count sequence number as the previous last transmission count sequence number on the P unit 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received to the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. .

  In the recovery process (number of balls) of the P base 2F, the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F in the counting history sequence described later, and the “store code” held by the P base 2F And the coincidence determination with “SC board ID” is performed, and if they coincide, the following processing is performed. If they do not match, the count request ball count = 0 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program.

  The P stand 2F refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3F, and when the CU 3F has not performed the count process for the count request, sets the count request ball count = 0 in the subtraction register. The user program executed on the P platform 2F is notified. When the counting process has been performed by the CU 3F, the count request ball number notified to the CU 3F is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match. Further, when the “store code” notified from the security board 325F and the “store code” held in the P stand 2F do not match, the user program side is notified of the store code mismatch via the register. Note that, when the P unit 2F receives a recovery request command from the CU 3F, it notifies the user program side via the register.

  The response of the recovery response is a response to the recovery information held in the P base 2F to the CU 3F. Recovery information includes “Serial Number”, “Command”, “Last Last Sending Serial Number”, “Last Inserted Card ID”, “Previous Card Insertion Time”, “Last Last Sent Additional Serial Number”, “Unit Price”, “Game Information” It includes “presence / absence of storage”, “previous gaming machine information”, and “previous gaming information”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Previous last transmission serial number” is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no stored serial number. “Previously inserted card ID” is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and “0” indicates that there is no inserted card. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores and holds the card ID that was being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU3F.

  “Previous card insertion time” is data on the insertion time of a card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when it is “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no additional serial number. The “ball unit price” is a unit price per ball (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) played on the P platform 2F. “Game information storage presence / absence” is “0x00” when game information is not stored, and “0x01” when game information is stored.

  “Previous game machine information” is game machine information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “game ball number”, “game ball information”, “count request ball number”, and “counting serial number”. “Number of game balls” is the number of game balls previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game ball information” is the game ball information notified last time. The game ball information is, for example, information such as the number of fired balls, the number of out-passed balls and the total number of prize balls notified to the CU 3F last time. The “count required ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. “Counting sequence number” is the counting sequence number notified to the CU3F last time.

  The “previous game information” is game information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “number of game information” and “game information 1” to “game information n”. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3F last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Game information 1” is the game information 1 previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game information n” is the game information n previously notified to the CU 3F. The game information n includes, for example, type information or game prize ball information that was previously notified to the CU 3F.

  The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is a serial number stored as the last final transmission addition serial number on the CU3F side and the P base 2F when the status information request is transmitted in the CU3F and when the status information request is received in the P base 2F.

  In the recovery process (game information) of the P table 2F, the “store code” and “SC substrate ID” notified from the security board 325F in the counting history sequence described later, the “store code” held in the P table 2F, and A match with “SC board ID” is determined, and if the “store code” does not match, the recovery data is not processed. If they match, the following processing is performed.

  When there is recovery data of game information, “game information storage presence / absence” is stored: set to 0x01, the previous “game ball number”, the previous “game ball information”, the previous “count request ball number”, the previous “ The recovery data held by the P table 2F is set in the “counting serial number”, the previous “number of game information”, and the previous “game information 1 to n”. When there is no recovery data of game information or when the last transmission serial number is 0, “game information storage presence / absence” is set to “0x00” without storage, the previous “game ball information”, the previous “count request ball number”, the previous “0” is set in the “counting serial number” and the previous “number of game information”. However, the number of game balls notified last time is set as the number of game balls. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match.

  When it is determined that the “store code” notified from the security board 325F does not match the store code held by the P platform 2F, the card is processed as having no card. That is, ALL “0” is set for “last inserted card ID” and “previous card insertion time”.

  The P base 2F stores the serial number at the time of the status information request response as the previous last transmission serial number. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F do not match the information held by the P units, the last transmission serial number = 0 is notified. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F match the information held in the P units, the last transmitted serial number stored is notified.

  The P base 2F stores the counting sequence number as the last last transmission counting sequence number when transmitting the status information response. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the SC 325bF do not match the information held in the P units, the last transmission count serial number is notified as 0. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F match the information held in the P units, the last transmitted transmission number is stored.

  In addition, when the process of the “last previous transmission serial number” notified from the P unit 2F has not been performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information. When the “last last transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using only the previous game machine information. However, the number of balls is not recovered.

  In addition, when the recovery process cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3F or the P base 2F), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P base 2F. For example, the display information of the P platform 2F can be displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278F. Alternatively, a display device that is controlled by the payout control unit 171F may be further provided on the P platform 2F, and information for manual correction may be displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The command of this recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the addition recovery information to the P unit 2F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission additional serial number”, and “number of additional balls”. Yes. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when the CU 3F determines that the additional ball recovery process needs to be performed on the P platform 2F. The CU 3F compares the “previous last transmission addition sequence number” included in the recovery response received from the P platform 2F with the “previous final transmission addition sequence number” stored in the CU 3F. It is determined that processing is not necessary, and in the case of mismatch, it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary. When it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary, a recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “last last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the time of the previous connection. This is data on the number of balls added.

  Next, the recovery process of the P platform 2F will be described in detail. In the recovery process of the P unit 2F, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “previous last transmission serial number” notified from the CU 3F based on the recovery request 2, the number of balls is referred to the game ball. This is a process of performing addition.

  The response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F on the P platform 2F, and includes “serial number”, “command”, and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is a recovery result process OK when “0x00”, and a recovery result process NG when “0x01”. In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, the process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  When the recovery process (additional number of balls) of the P unit 2F is performed, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “last previous transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F, the process OK is processed as a “recovery result” to the CU3F. And the number of balls to be added notified from the CU3F is set in the addition register and notified to the user program. When the number of added balls notified from the CU3F = 0, the number of added balls = 0 is set in the addition register, notified to the user program, and the process OK is returned to the CU3F. However, if the game table state 1 responds with the game ball addition result (Bit5 = 1) in the state information response when the CU state of the state information request to be described later is a game ball addition request (Bit = 1), a “recovery” is sent to the CU3F. Processing NG is returned as a “result”, and the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register and notified to the user program.

  When the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is the same as the “previous final transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P stand 2F, the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register, The user program is notified, and processing NG is returned as a “recovery result” to the CU 3F. If the “last last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F = 0, regardless of the number of additional balls notified from the CU3F, the number of additional balls = 0 is set in the addition register, and the user program is notified to the CU3F. The process OK is returned.

  In addition, at the timing when the recovery process is completed (for example, when the recovery completion flag is set), the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is notified to the user program via the register regardless of the recovery result. . When the recovery request 2 is not received, the “previous last transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P platform 2F is notified to the user program at the timing when the recovery process is completed.

<< 5. 5. Communication start request, Communication start response >>
A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication start request command requests the P base 2F to start communication. In response to this communication start request, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This communication start response is a response to the CU3F to start communication.

  The communication start request command notifies the P base 2F that communication has started normally. The P base 2F that has received the communication start request clears the recovery information stored so far. The communication start request command includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The CU 3F sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after the communication start request, and the P unit 2F also sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after receiving the communication start request.

  The response of the communication start response notifies the CU 3F that the communication has started normally, and the CU 3F clears the recovery information. The response of the communication start response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 7. 7. Communication end request, Communication end response >>
A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2F to end communication. In response to this communication end request, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of the communication end response is a response to the CU3F for the communication end.

  The communication end request command notifies the P unit 2F that the communication has ended normally, and includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3F that the communication has ended normally, and the CU 3F and the P stand 2F stop communication and wait for restart after the notification. The response of the communication end response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3F to the P base 2F. The CU 3F periodically checks the state of the P stand 2F using this command. Further, the status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes “serial number”, “command”, “CU state”, “additional ball number”, “additional serial number”, “counting serial number”, “ball unit price”, and “counting receipt time”. Is included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “CU state” represents the state of the CU 3F notified to the P base 2F, and indicates that the card is being inserted when Bit 0 is “1”, and the card is not inserted when “0”. That is, Bit0 represents a state in which a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3F. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing a stock card (general 0 yen 0 coin card) stocked in advance in the card stock section of the CU3F.

  When Bit 1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0”, the card unit is being closed. That is, Bit1 notifies the card unit opening state to P stand 2F according to the state of CU3F. The timing for notifying the opening of the card unit is, for example, when the opening of the card unit is completed. The timing for notifying that the card unit is closed is, for example, when the store is closed. When the same state changes from opening to closing, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F as a count information of all the game balls it holds as a count information response.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is in progress, and when “0”, the card return preparation is not in progress. The CU3F notifies the P stand 2F of “preparing for card return” for a certain period (10 seconds) by setting this bit during each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the counting button 28F is detected, the P table 2F has operated the counting button once or a plurality of times if it receives a status information request with the bit being prepared for card return turned on. Regardless of the operation duration, regardless of the operation duration time, all the stored game balls are notified to the CU 3F by the status information response as the number of balls.

  When Bit 3 is “1”, a game ball addition request is shown, and when Bit 3 is “0”, no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  When Bit 4 is “1”, completion of counting ball reception is indicated, and “0” indicates that counting ball is not received. Bit 4 notifies the P stand 2F that the receipt is completed when the counting ball is received. That is, it is used to confirm delivery of the response “count ball” of the state information response. When receiving the counting ball reception completion, the P stand 2F checks whether the counting sequence number is the same as that of the P stand 2F, and if it does not match, notifies the CU 3F without subtracting the number of game balls.

  When Bit 5 is “1”, card removal is waiting, and “0” indicates completion of card removal. Bit5 notifies the P stand 2F that the card is waiting to be removed from the CU 3F. Bit 6 to Bit 7 are not used.

  The “added ball number” is the added ball number of game balls, and the data of the added ball number is valid only when Bit 3 in the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is an addition sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number when a game ball addition request is made. The “counting sequence number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the count sequence number received when the count is requested is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting sequence number is not established, the counting is not received.

  The “ball unit price” is a unit price (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) per game ball played on the P platform 2F. The unit price notified from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F is stored in, for example, the RAM of the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F. And P stand 2F notifies ball unit price memorized by RAM to CU3F by a status information response when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when recovery information for returning from a communication disabled state is requested from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F (recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F), the P unit 2F receives a response to the response of the recovery response. Set unit price and send to CU3F. That is, the ball unit price is not output to the outside except for notifying the CU 3F at the time of recovery response. The unit price stored in the P stand 2F is set in the response of the recovery response when the recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F, and is transmitted to the CU 3F. Thereby, it is possible to accurately grasp the unit price of the game balls that have been played on the P platform 2F before the recovery, and the player can be resumed with an appropriate game value after the recovery. Further, by not outputting the ball unit price stored in the P stand 2F to the outside other than notifying the CU 3F at the time of a recovery response, security is secured so that the ball unit price is not changed illegally. Furthermore, the ball unit price stored in the P unit 2F prohibits overwriting a new unit price when the P unit 2F holds the number of game balls. In addition, even when the P stand 2F holds the number of game balls, overwriting of the ball unit price stored in the P unit 2F is permitted and converted into a ball unit price overwritten with the number of game balls held. May be configured to update.

  The “count reception time” is information for notifying the P table 2F of the time when the CU 3F received the count request from the P table 2F, and the CU state Bit 4 (game ball count reception response) is “1” ( It is valid only when it is completed. The “count reception time” information is notified to the P platform 2F, but is processed only within the CPU of the payout control unit 171F, and stored in a RAM or the like accessible from the outside without being notified to the user program. Absent. Therefore, the information of “count reception time” is deleted in the CPU of the payout control unit 171F, so that security can be ensured.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the status information response notifies the CU 3F of the information / status of the P platform 2F. The response of the state information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  The specific data of this status information response includes “sequential number”, “command”, “number of game balls”, “number of fired balls”, “number of balls passed through outro”, “total number of ball balls”, “count request ball” Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “launch strength”, “game table state”, “fraud detection information” and “game information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). “Number of game balls” calculates the number of game balls held by the CU 3F using the “total number of ball balls”, “number of fired balls”, and “count ball number” described later. Thereafter, the CU 3F checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3F matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2F.

  “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. That is, the “number of fired balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  “The number of balls that have passed through the outlet” is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 154F (when there are multiple passing balls at the time of transmission, they are added together).

  “Total number of prize balls” is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is the number of prize balls for each prize opening type such as a start opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening), and the like. Note that the “total prize ball count” (addition) does not include the “addition request ball count” transmitted from the CU 3F. Further, the CU3F adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the total prize ball number data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not add the number of game balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “count ball” (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F and added to the number of cards held. The number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is open, the operation of the counting button 28F is performed, so that the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted and set as the counting balls without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28F.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is updated (+1) and notified when a counting is requested.

“Launch strength” is information on the launch strength of a game ball.
The “gaming table state” indicates the state of the P table 2F at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P table 2F. It includes information on “game table state 3” and “game table error state”.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 1” indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. Bit1 indicates whether or not the fan (player) is playing (balls are being fired), and is “0” when waiting (the fan is not firing a ball), and “1”. A game is in progress (a state in which a fan is firing a ball), but there is a game ball, and a game is being played in a state in which the launch handle (hitting ball operation handle 25F) is touched (a state in which the touch sensor is touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence / absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. That is, it shows whether or not all the floating balls in the game area 27F have been collected. However, it does not include ball stoppages due to a fire stop switch (also called a single shot switch). When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). If the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball firing, the P stand 2F times out and the game is completed.

  Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. “0” indicates game ball indefinite (state where all balls are undetermined), and “1” indicates game ball definite (state where all balls are definite). Here, for example, if the P ball 2F has not been able to confirm the whereabouts of the game ball for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball launching, it will time out and determine the game ball. Further, the P stand 2F is set in a state in which the whereabouts of the game balls are determined (game ball determination) when the power is turned on or the RAM is cleared.

  Bit 4 indicates whether or not there is a game ball count request (whether or not a count button is pressed). When “0”, there is no request, and when “1”, there is a count ball payout request at the start of counting. When the counting operation is detected, the P platform transmits this counting request ON state information response to the CU 3F and confirms whether or not the counting request has been received. When “1”, it is a count request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, which is addition OK when “0” and addition NG when “1”. In addition, when the P platform 2F makes an addition NG response, the addition sequence number is notified without being updated. Bit 6 indicates a pressed state of the firing stop switch. When “0”, the switch is released, and when “1”, the switch is pressed. Bit 7 is reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 2” represents jackpot information jackpot 1 (all jackpots), and “1” is set during all jackpots. Bit 1 represents big hit 2 of big hit information (big hit + small hit), and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (big hit of the big ball), and “1” is set during the big hit where the big ball is big. Bit 3 represents big hit 4 of big hit information (big hit of small ball), and “1” is set during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 represents a big hit 5 of the big hit information (a big hit in the outgoing ball), and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the outgoing ball. Bit5 to Bit7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 3” represents a big hit in the gaming state information + short time, and “1” is set in the big hit and short time. Bit1 represents the probability change of the game state information, and “1” is set during the probability change. Bit 2 represents the time of the game state information, and “1” is set during the time reduction. Bit 3 indicates that the game state information is changing, and “1” is set during the change. Bit4 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “gaming table error state” indicates an error code occurring in the P table 2F, and each error code is expressed using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that there is no error when Bit 0 to Bit 5 are all “0”. Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents payout control when “0” and main control when “1”. Bit 7 indicates an error output method. When it is “0”, only an alarm is issued, and when it is “1”, it indicates an alarm + output to the hall server 801F.

  The “fraud detection information” is information detected by the P stand 2F at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. , “Illegal detection information 1” to “fraud detection information 4” and “additional serial number” are included.

  The “fraud detection state 1” is fraud detection information of the main control board 16F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 1” indicates fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit1 indicates that it is the positive detection information that the magnetic sensor is not detected when “1”. Bit2 represents fraud detection information for fraud detection when “1”. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “fraud detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 2” indicates fraud detection information for opening the glass plate when “1”. Bit 1 represents fraud detection information for opening the frame body when “1”. Bit 2 represents fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 represents fraud detection information of the proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 represents fraud detection information for detecting a prize ball goto when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine. Bit 5 represents fraud detection information for complex goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 represents fraud detection information for fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 represents fraud detection information for nighttime frame opening / monitoring SW abnormality detection when “1”.

  “Injustice detection information 1” is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor got (number of winning inconsistent balls). The “fraud detection information 1” is valid when Bit 4 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “injustice detection information 2” is data indicating information of composite sensor goto detection (launch / OUT inconsistent ball number). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The “fraud detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 3” is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The “fraud detection information 3” is valid when Bit 6 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 4” is data indicating nighttime frame opening information. The “fraud detection information 4” is valid when the Bit 7 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”.

  Bit 7 of “illegal detection information 4” is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 4 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 4 occurrence when “1”. Bit 6 is information indicating whether or not the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 3 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 3 occurrence when “1”. Bit 5 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 2 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 2 occurrence when “1”. Bit 4 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 1 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 1 occurrence when “1”. Bits 0 to 3 are information indicating the number of opening of the main body frame. When the bit is “0”, there is no opening, and “1” to “15” indicate the number of opening. The number of times of opening is counted up to 15 times, and the count after 16 times is held at 15 times.

  “Addition sequence number” is a sequence number for addition, and the addition sequence number received at the time of addition request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the addition sequence number is not established, the addition NG is notified.

  The “fraud detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates fraud detection information of other store game ball detection when “1”. Bit 5 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates that when “1”, the card unit previously connected to the P stand 2F was the development CU 3DF (development CU connection). Bit 6 of “illegal detection state 3” indicates that the card unit to which the P stand 2F was connected in the past when “1” is the game board development jig 3EF (game board development jig connection). . Bit 7 of “illegal detection state 3” indicates that the gaming machine connected when “1” is the gaming machine simulator 2AF (gaming machine simulator connection). Bit1 to Bit4 are reserved. In addition, the other store game ball detection is, for example, a sensor is provided in the collection balls passing path of P units, the sensor reads identification information (such as a marking on the surface) provided on the game ball, the game ball of the own store It is determined whether or not it matches the identification information. In the case of a mismatch, it is assumed that the game balls of other stores are mixed in the game balls, and Bit 0 of “injustice detection state 3” is set to “1” and notified to the CU 3F.

  The “game information” is information on the P device 2F at the time when the command for requesting the state information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P device 2F. The “game information number”, “type information 1” to “type information n” , “Count information 1” to “count information n”.

  “Number of game information” is the number (n) of type information / count information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). “Type information 1” to “Type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. The type information is data type information from Bit 4 to Bit 7 and indicates the data type of the game information. When it is “0”, there is no information, when it is “1”, when it is “2”, it is a big prize opening. “3” is a winning opening, “4” is the number of symbol stops, “5” is a big hit, and “6” is a small hit. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information, which indicates the data number for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, each data number is indicated. . For example, when the data type is a big hit of “5”, the data number is “1”, the ball is large, “2” is the ball is small, “3” is the ball, “4” to “6” It is a spare time. Further, when the data type is a small hit of “6”, the data number is a small hit when “1”, and a spare when “2” to “15”.

  “Count information 1” to “Count information n” indicate game count information 1 to game count information n, respectively.

  Here, when the data type is a start opening, a large winning opening, and a small winning opening, the count information is information on the number of winning balls from Bit 4 to Bit 7, and the winning ball at the time of winning for each type information of game information. The numbers indicate the number of award balls when “1” to “15”. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are information on the number of wins, which indicates the number of wins (cumulative) for each type of game table information, and each of the numbers “1” to “15” represents data on the number of wins. In the count information, when the data type is the symbol stop count, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the symbol stop count, and when “1” to “15”, the symbol stop count Represents. In the count information, when the data type is big hit or small hit, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the number of hits, and when “1” to “15”, the number of hits is shown. It represents.

  Furthermore, the response of the state information response includes a “launch intensity signal”, a “passing area signal”, a “during fluctuation signal”, and a “handle touch signal”.

  The “fire strength signal” indicates the fire strength T that is a detection result of the fire strength sensor 19F. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing intensity T is a variable value that varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) in accordance with the amount of steering operation. In addition, when the communication interval (for example, 200 msec) between the P stand 2F and the CU3F is shorter than the interval between the pachinko balls (for example, 0.6 sec), a firing intensity signal is basically output for each ball. become. Further, the firing intensity signal may be output as a set with data indicating whether or not it has actually been fired.

  “Passing area signal” indicates the above-described passing area signal. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass area signal is one of the pass area signals A1 to A8. Each passing area signal is associated with the firing intensity T at the time when each passing area signal is detected.

  The “in-change signal” indicates that the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278F changes as the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning openings 275F, 276F, and 277F.

  The “handle touch signal” indicates that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F.

<< 11. Card insertion notification, 12. Card insertion response >>
A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card insertion notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of card insertion. In response to this card insertion notification, a response of a card insertion response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response to the card insertion response is a response to the effect that the card insertion notification has been received with respect to the CU 3F.

  The card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2F when the card is inserted, and “sequential number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC board ID” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Card ID” is identification ID information of an IC card inserted into the CU 3F, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. “Card insertion time” is the time when the IC card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309F (see FIG. 35) of the CU3F. The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, and the day information is two digits. The data is DD, time information is represented by two digits hh, minute information is represented by two digits mm, and second information is represented by two digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held on the P platform 2F is the current day ball or the past ball.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3F is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. It is also used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been moved to the store. The CU3F stores a store code where the CU3F is installed. The store code is notified from the security board 325F with information added thereto. The “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying the CU3F, and is used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been replaced. The SC board ID is added to the security board 325F and notified to the P platform 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time. The “store code” and “SC board ID” are not notified to the user program side and are deleted in the payout control circuit.

  The response of the card insertion response notifies the CU 3F that the card insertion notification has been normally received, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion / return notification will be described. First, a card or general card is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F of CU3F, or a card is notified to the P stand 2F as a card insertion notification by depositing a general 0 yen 0 coin card. Information such as ID and card insertion time is notified. When there is a card insertion notification, the P table 2F backs up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. However, when a card insertion notification command is received and a status information request including information on the status of the CU 3F being inserted into the card (Bit 0 = 1 in the CU status) is received (determined that the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F) ), The P base 2F transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. When the card return button 322F of the CU 3F is pressed, a card return notification is made to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F clears information such as the backed up card ID and card insertion time. The condition for canceling the card insertion state is when the P stand 2F receives the card return notification command.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of the card return. In response to this card return notification, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to the CU3F.

  The card return notification command is for notifying the P platform 2F of the card return, and the CU 3F transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed. The card return notification includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response to the card return response is to send a response to the card return notification to the CU 3F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. “Serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. Note that the CU3F does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the currently inserted card or there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Here, the operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if the CU3F is used to insert a member card, a general card, or a deposit to a general 0 yen 0 coin card, the P stand 2F backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. When an operation of pressing the “card return” button is performed on the CU 3F at the time of the card return notification, the P stand 2F clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. In response to this communication test request, a response of a communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to the CU3F.

  The communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2F is not encrypted. The communication test request command includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data to be notified to the P base 2F and is arbitrary data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU3F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the CU3F is not encrypted. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the CU 3F, and is arbitrary data.

<< 17. Count history request, 18. Counting history response >>
A count history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This count history request command is for requesting a count history to the P base 2F. In response to the count history request, a response of a count history response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response to the counting history response is to notify the counting history to the CU3F.

  The count history request command requests a count history from the P base 2F, and the CU 3F transmits it to the P base 2F in the count history sequence after the authentication sequence. The count history request includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “store code”, and “SC board ID”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3F is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. The store code is notified from the security board 325F with information added thereto. The “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying the CU3F, and is used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been replaced. The SC board ID is added to the security board 325F and notified to the P platform 2F.

  A process for detecting the shipment maker code of the SC board ID will be described. The SC board ID includes an identification code and a shipping manufacturer code. The P units recognize connected units (commercial CU3F, development unit, etc.) by detecting the shipping manufacturer code included in the SC board ID.

  Specifically, a description will be given of a case where the P platform detects whether a unit to be connected is a connection device other than a commercial CU3F (specifically, a development unit or a game board development jig). When the game history when these development units and game board development jigs not used for commercial use are connected to the unit (CU3F) used for commercial use after that, the game balls given during development This causes a problem that allows a game to be played during commercial use. Therefore, in order to avoid the problem, the P stand 2F detects whether the development unit or the game board development jig is connected when connected to the unit, and stores the result in the recovery register.

  In order to detect whether the development unit or the game board development jig is connected when connected to the unit, the P base 2F, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before the count history request, and the count history request The shipping manufacturer code of the later SC board ID is compared. First, if the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “None”, the development unit or the game board development jig is detected regardless of the shipment maker code of the SC board ID after the count history request. do not do. Even if the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request matches the shipment maker code of the SC board ID after the count history request, it is not detected as a development unit or a game board development jig.

  However, when the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history and the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history match the upper byte, but the lower byte is different, it is detected as a development unit. Also, the upper byte of the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history is the code of the commercial unit, and the upper byte of the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history is the code other than the game board development jig Also detected as a development unit. If the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history is the code of the commercial unit, and the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history is the code of the game board development jig, the game board Detect with development jig.

  The P stand 2F stores the detection that the development unit is connected by setting Bit 4 of the recovery register to “1”, and the detection that the game board development jig is connected is the recovery register. This bit is memorized by setting Bit 5 to “1”.

  If the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “none”, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is a unit newly connected after the recovery process is performed. The shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID is overwritten. When the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “present”, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is subjected to the recovery process if there is no game ball to be recovered. After that, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID of the newly connected unit is overwritten. However, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is the same as the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID of the newly connected unit after the recovery process if there is a game ball to be recovered. Prohibit overwriting. It should be noted that the prohibition state of overwriting the shipment maker code of the SC board ID is canceled by clearing the RAM of the P unit 2F (particularly clearing the number of game balls). By prohibiting the overwriting of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID when there are game balls, the number of game balls given by the development unit is recovered as the number of game balls that can be played by the connected commercial unit thereafter. This can be prevented.

  The response of the counting history response is to notify the counting history to the CU 3F, and the P unit 2F receives the counting history request command and transmits the counting history information stored in the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. . The count history response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “count history result”, “count history 1”, and “count history 2”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Counting history result” is information indicating whether or not the counting history is stored in the P table 2F by the counting history process in the P table 2F. Here, the counting history is a history of the number of game balls paid out to the CU3F side as the number of counting request balls from the P table 2F side during the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. “Card ID”, “Counting receipt time” included when receiving a count receipt response (count response ON) from the CU3F, and the cumulative number of count balls dispensed up to the count request OFF state “cumulative count balls” It also includes information on “number”. Note that the P platform 2F holds the history of the past two times (the history of the number of game balls in the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state is one time).

  In the count history result, “0x00” indicates that there is no history, “0x01” indicates that there is a history (with information on count history 1), and “0x02” indicates that there is a history (with information on count history 2).

  “Counting history 1” is the most recent history (final counting) of the past two histories, and includes information on “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “game ball number”. Is included. “Card ID” is identification information of the card inserted into the CU 3F at the time of counting request. The “count reception time” is the time when the CU 3F receives the number of game balls requested to be counted from the P stand 2F. The “cumulative counting ball number” is the cumulative number of counting balls counted during the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls held on the P stand 2F at the end of counting.

  “Counting history 2” is an old history (counting immediately before the last counting) of the past two times, and includes “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number” and “game ball”. Contains number information. The information of “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “game ball number” is the same type of information as included in “counting history 1”, and detailed description thereof will not be repeated. .

  Next, conditions for outputting the count history data held by the P platform 2F to the CU 3F will be described. When the P store 2F matches the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the “store code” and “SC board ID” included in the count history request command received from the CU 3F in the counting history sequence, The “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” are included in the response of the counting history response and output to the CU 3F. Further, if the “store code” stored in the count history request command received from the CU 3F matches the “store code” stored in the P table 2F, even if the “SC board ID” is different, the count history response Including “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” in the response to the CU3F. This takes into account changing the combination of P stand 2F and CU 3F in the store, and if it is in the same store, it is disadvantageous even if the counting history data stored in P stand 2F is transferred to another CU 3F Is not given.

  However, if the “store code” stored in the “store code” included in the count history request command received from the CU 3F is different from the “store code” stored in the P table 2F, It is prohibited to include the “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” in the response of the response to output to the CU 3F. Even if the same CU3F is moved to another store, even if it is connected to the P stand 2F holding the same “SC board ID”, if the counting history data is taken over, it is disadvantageous to the other store. It is because there is a possibility of giving.

  Of course, the P base 2F outputs the counting history data stored in the P base 2F when not connected to the CU3F but connected to the game board development jig or the development unit, or when not connected to any unit. There is no. By restricting the output of the counting history data, the security of the game machine including the P machine 2F and the P machine 2F is enhanced.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P platform>
<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of commands and responses between the CU 3F and the P base 2F will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU3F (primary station) to the P station 2F (secondary station), and the P station 2F returns a response to the CU3F in response to the command. In other words, the transmission of the business message is a command / response system in which the CU 3F is the primary station and the P stand 2F is the secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command to the P stand 2F from the CU 3F to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted at intervals of 200 ms between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25F, the P platform 2F hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27F per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2F can notify the CU 3F of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P base 2F. It is also possible to match with

<< Communication line disconnection detection on CU side >>
Next, processing when communication disconnection is detected on the CU3F side will be described. When the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3F transmits the command to the P base 2F, the same command is transmitted to the P base 2F again. Further, if no response is received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P platform 2F. The same command is retransmitted up to 14 times on the P platform 2F. If a response is not received from the P platform 2F even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3F determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication cut off”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3F is disconnected from the connector of the P base 2F, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2F is cut off. The CU3F does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< Communication line disconnection detection on P side >>
Processing when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2F side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F returns a response to the CU 3F in response to the command. After that, when the state in which the command from the CU 3F is not transmitted to the P stand 2F continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2F determines that the communication is cut off, stops the driving of the firing motor 18F, and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the CU3F connector and the P-base 2F connector, disconnection of the connection wiring, or the power supply disconnection of the CU3F.

  The command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2F side include recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication. Does not include test request / communication test response command and response.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 42 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU3F is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the P base 2F stops the firing motor 18F to stop the game, and then starts communication. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the last last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2F, and requests recovery information from the P unit 2F. The P base 2F refers to the previous last transmission count serial number notified from the CU 3F and executes the count recovery process. Specifically, the P base 2F refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3F has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3F has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2F returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) to the CU 3F as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous game machine information, and the like.

  In the CU3F that has received the recovery response, if the previous last transmission addition serial number process included in the recovery information has not been executed, the CU3F additional recovery process is performed using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When performing the addition ball recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F and transmits recovery data to the P unit 2F. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P base 2F executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3F (recovery response 2). In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, a recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F, and is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU3F counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2F receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3F has retransmitted the command. The CU 3F transmits a command, and backs up the sequence number when a response with the same sequence number is notified from the P unit 2F. When transmitting a response corresponding to the received command, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the received serial number as it is. The P base 2F backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request command to the P platform 2F with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2F returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3F as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F with a serial number “2”. The P platform 2F returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3F as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2F clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  The CU 3F counts up the serial number to “4” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F. The status information request command includes information on the unit price of the balls. By transmitting the ball unit price to the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F can recognize whether the game ball is playing at 4 yen per ball or whether the game is played at 1 yen per ball. . In addition, since the status information request command is transmitted in a cycle of 200 ms as described above, it is possible to transmit information on the unit price of the ball up to three times to the P stand 2F during the cycle of 600 ms that the game ball is fired. is there. Therefore, it is possible to change the unit price for each game ball played on the P platform 2F. If the unit price can be managed for each game ball in a small number (for example, one ball unit), the player's request (for example, a desire to play a game slowly with a small amount, or the remaining number of game balls in a short time) It is possible to provide a variety of games tailored to the demand for consumption. The command for the status information request transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F described below includes the ball unit price information, but is not specified when the information on the unit price is not directly related to the content of the sequence to be described.

  In response to this, the P table 2F updates the game table information, the game information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time a response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2F returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “4”. The response of the status information response does not include information on the unit price of the ball. This prevents illegally changing the information of the ball unit price currently being played on the P stand 2F and sending it to the CU 3F and illegally managing the ball unit price of the game ball managed by the CU 3F. . Thereby, the security of the game system can be improved.

  In response to this, the CU3F updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU3F counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F sends the response of the status information response to the CU3F with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F when a card is inserted will be described. CU3F shown in FIG. 43 transmits the command of the status information request | requirement including serial number = n and card return preparation state = OFF before card insertion to P stand 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n and game prohibition to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, in the CU3F, when a card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed. Note that information (card ID or the like) recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer may be stored in the CU3F.

  The CU3F is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the midst of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the game hall, or inquiring the hall server 801F, for example, holding balls, storage balls, and the remaining amount of the card. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312F and displaying on the display 54F on the P platform 2F side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3F does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312F, the status information request including the serial number = n + 1 and the card return ready state = OFF. Is sent to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU 3F. The display 54F on the P platform 2F side is controlled by the display control unit 350F of the CU 3F to display that the card is being inquired.

  After that, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3F stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and the serial number = n + 2, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the store code. And a card insertion notification command including the SC board ID is transmitted to the P base 2F. The store code and the SC board ID are information added to the command when the card insertion notification command passes through the security board 325F. In response to this, the P unit 2F backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM of the payout control unit 171F, and a response to the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3F. Also in CU3F, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of CU control unit 323F.

  In response to this, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 3 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F, thereby notifying the P unit 2F that the card is being inserted. . The P unit 2F receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3F. To notify.

  While the card is being inserted, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F. The P unit 2F responds with a status information response including a serial number = n + 4 and a game permission. Is returned to CU3F.

  Further, a case where a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F during card insertion will be described. First, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + x, a card ID, a card insertion time, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P unit 2F. When a card insertion notification command is transmitted during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID and card insertion time of the card being inserted, and are stored in the P base 2F. There is a high possibility that fraud that intentionally changes the current card ID or the card insertion time has been performed.

  Therefore, the P table 2F does not back up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F. Whether or not the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F can be easily determined based on the card return preparation state = ON information included in the state information request command.

  Next, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + x to the CU 3F without performing backup of the received card ID, card insertion time, and the like. Note that the CU3F does not store the card ID, the card insertion time, and the like transmitted by the card insertion notification command in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, the card ID is intentionally transmitted to the P base 2F during the card insertion, and the illegal action such as falsification of the card ID stored in the P base 2F can be prevented, and security is improved. Can do.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing processing at the time of insertion executed by the CU 3F when a card is inserted into the CU 3F. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 44, each step of SF1 to SF7 is executed by CU3F. SF8-SF10 and SF12-SF15 are executed by the P stand 2F. More specifically, the deletion process of SF8 to SF10, SF12, SF13, and SF15 is executed by the effect control board 15F provided on the P stand 2F, and the transmission process of SF14 and SF15 is provided by the effect control unit 151F. The produced effect control board 15F transmits to the payout control unit 171F, and the payout control unit 171F transmits to the CU3F.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as SF) 1, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not the game is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not an interrupt operation has been performed and a game interruption sequence has been executed. If it is suspended, it is determined by SF2 whether or not the C-ID and type of the inserted card matches the C-ID and type of the interrupted card. The inserted card is ejected and a transition is made to standby. In FIG. 44, the “type” is not shown.

  On the other hand, if the C-ID and type of the inserted card and the C-ID and type of the interrupted card match, the interrupted player returns to the gaming machine and starts the game. Therefore, the control proceeds to SF4, the suspended state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game by SF6 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by SF1 that it is not interrupted, it is determined at SF3a whether or not a card is already inserted. Whether or not the card is being inserted is determined based on whether or not the card reader provided in the card insertion / discharge port 309F accepts the card. If it is determined by the SF 3a that the card is not being inserted, the C-ID and type of the inserted card are stored and transmitted to the P base 2F by the SF 3. In the P stand 2F, the C-ID and type are received and stored in the received C-ID, type and backup area (for example, a backup data storage unit provided on the effect control board 15F shown in FIG. 38). The C-ID and type are compared (SF8). Then, it is determined by SF9 whether or not the comparison results match, and if they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing is completed. .

  If it is determined by the SF 3a that the card is being inserted, in order to prevent the C-ID and type different from the C-ID and type of the card being inserted from being overwritten and stored in the CU 3F or P stand 2F, the SF 3 Skip processing in.

  In this way, the player identification information storage means (current player game history data storage section) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination means (SF8, SF9) for performing the same determination processing are used. Display control means (the effect control board 15F provided with the effect control unit 151F), it is not necessary to provide the same determination processing function on the communication means side (the payout control unit 171F side). A common communication means can be used between the gaming machine having the means and the gaming machine not having the display control means, and it is possible to mass-produce small quantities of the communication means.

  In addition, you may perform the process of SF15 and SF7 as a control content of a modification. The game history data, C-ID, and type stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU3F and then deleted by SF15. The CU3F receives it and transmits the received data to the hall server (upper server) 801. The hall server 801F backs up the received game history data, C-ID, and type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by SF9 that they match, the process proceeds to SF12, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is stored in the current area (for example, the backup data storage unit provided on the effect control board 15F shown in FIG. 38). The game history data is newly updated from the game history data.

  Note that the processing of SF10, SF13, and SF14 may be performed as the control content of the modification. If YES in SF9, the control proceeds to SF10, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data, the game history data, the C-ID, and the type in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted by SF13. Further, after SF12, SF14 sends a notification that the players are the same to the CU. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of SF10, SF13, SF14 and the processes of SF15, SF7.

  The conditions for overwriting (updating) the card ID and insertion time will be described in more detail. As described above, the card ID and the insertion time are prohibited from being updated during card insertion. As a prohibiting condition, the relationship between the card insertion notification command and the CU status included in the status information request command will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 45 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the relationship among the card insertion notification command, the CU state included in the state information request command, and the card insertion state.

  First, FIG. 45A shows an example in which the CU state included in the status information request command is in the card insertion state (Bit0 = “1”) before the P table 2F receives the card insertion notification command. ing. The state (1) shown in FIG. 45 (a) is a card insertion waiting state, and the card insertion notification command is not received by the P base 2F, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. Is when the card is not being inserted (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Next, a state (2) shown in FIG. 45A is a card insertion preparation state, and the card insertion notification command is not received by the P base 2F, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the CU state to be inserted is card insertion (Bit0 = "1"). Also in this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time. A state (3) shown in FIG. 45 (a) is a card insertion state, and the P unit 2F receives a card insertion notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is the card. This is the case during insertion (Bit 0 = “1”). In this case, the P base 2F is prohibited from overwriting the card ID and the insertion time because the CU 3F is inserting the card.

  Next, the state (4) shown in FIG. 45A is a card return preparation state, and the card return notification command is not received by the P stand 2F, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the CU state to be displayed is not card insertion (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, overwriting of the card ID and the insertion time is prohibited in the P base 2F on the assumption that the CU 3F has not yet returned the card and the card is being inserted. The state (5) shown in FIG. 45 (a) is a card return state, and the card unit 2F receives the card return notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is the card insertion. This is the case (Bit 0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  FIG. 45 (b) shows an example in which the CU state included in the status information request command becomes the card insertion status (Bit0 = “1”) after the P unit 2F receives the card insertion notification command. The state (1) ′ shown in FIG. 45 (b) is a card insertion waiting state, and the card insertion notification command is not received by the P base 2F, and the CU included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the card is not being inserted (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Next, state (2) ′ shown in FIG. 45 (b) is a card insertion preparation state, and the P table 2F has received a card insertion notification command, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the CU state is not card insertion (Bit0 = "0"). Also in this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time. The state (3) ′ shown in FIG. 45 (b) is a card insertion state, and the P unit 2F receives the card insertion notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is This is the case when the card is being inserted (Bit0 = "1"). In this case, the P base 2F is prohibited from overwriting the card ID and the insertion time because the CU 3F is inserting the card.

  Next, the state (4) ′ shown in FIG. 45 (b) is a card return preparation state, and the P table 2F has not received the card return notification command, but the state information request command sent from the CU 3F This is a case where the included CU state is not card insertion (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, overwriting of the card ID and insertion time is prohibited for the P base 2F on the assumption that the card is being inserted because the CU 3F has not yet returned the card. The state (5) ′ shown in FIG. 45 (b) is a card return state. When the P table 2F receives the card return notification command, the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is the card. This is a case where no insertion is in progress (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  In this way, by limiting the conditions for overwriting (updating) the card ID and insertion time, the card ID or the like is intentionally transmitted to the P base 2F, and the card ID stored in the P base 2F is falsified. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as doing and improve security.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 46, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3F lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321F is pressed, the CU 3F confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, the CU3F is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, the display unit 54F displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the remaining amount and are being added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3F makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3F counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Since the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the serial number = n + 1, the number of addition balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 5, the number of additional balls = 175, and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding out the stored balls will be described. In FIG. 47, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  After that, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3F determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the holding balls or the storage balls is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the operation of pressing the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3F notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of additional balls = 125 to the P stand 2F after confirming the consumption from a holding ball or a storage ball. Specifically, the CU 3F displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P platform 2F. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Then, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU 3F. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 2, an additional ball number = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 48 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, all the bits in the card return ready state transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F are OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  Also, in FIG. 48, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  For the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3F, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P stand 2F. In response to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3F, the same counting sequence number m is returned from the P stand 2F. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28F. In FIG. 48, immediately after the operation of pressing the count button 28F once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3F. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F.

  When the operation of the count button 28F is detected, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323F transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350F. In response to the instruction, the display control unit 350F controls the display 54F on the P platform 2F side. As a result, the display 54F displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof decreases, while the number of holding balls increases.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 2, a count serial number m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P platform 2F finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 800 to 700. At this stage, although the count request state of the P base 2F is OFF, since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2F transmits a second count request to the CU 3F. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3F. However, even at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the ball | bowl equivalent to the number of count balls requested | required, and updates the display of a ball | bowl to 200. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2F that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to the CU 3F. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  CU3F which received this status information response determines with completion of counting. Although not shown, the CU 3F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return preparation state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2F.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< game ball counting (automatic counting) >>
When the store is closed, if a card is not inserted and a game ball remains on the P stand 2F, the store clerk goes around the P stand 2F where the game ball remains and inserts a store card into one stand and performs a counting operation. It was necessary to collect the remaining game balls, and the work at the time of closing the store was complicated. In addition, if the game machine and the card unit are configured so that physical game balls are paid out as in the past, the work at the time of closing the store can be performed simply by collecting the remaining game balls and resetting the card unit. Can be done. However, in the configuration in which the P stand 2F and the CU 3F communicate with each other by performing mutual authentication as in the present embodiment to manage the game balls (game points), the remaining game balls are collected by simply resetting the card unit. It is not possible to do the work at the time of closing. Thus, with reference to FIG. 49, the automatic counting process of game balls at the time of closing will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process that is automatically performed when the game hall is closed. First, CU3F is in a state where there is no stock card with card holding ball = 0 balls. On the other hand, the P stand 2F recognizes that a game ball = 50 balls and no card is inserted in the CU 3F. Then, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card insertion state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  When closing is set in the game hall where the CU 3F and the P stand 2F are installed, if it is determined that no card is inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2F, processing described below is performed. The fact that no card is inserted can be determined from the information of the card insertion state = OFF included in the command for requesting the state information, and the fact that a game ball remains in the P stand 2F indicates that the state information response It can be determined from the information of the number of game balls included in the response = 50.

  The CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + 1, a card ID = 0, and a card insertion time = 0 to the P unit 2F. That is, the P card 2F is notified that the card with card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, has been inserted into the card reader of the CU3F at the card insertion time = 0. As described above, since the virtual card is inserted into the CU 3F, it becomes unnecessary for the store clerk to go around the P table 2F where the game balls remain and insert the store card into one unit. In response to this, the P base 2F recognizes that the card has been inserted into the CU 3F, and executes the following processing. In response to this, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 1 to the CU 3F.

  Next, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F that the CU opening state is OFF. Specifically, a status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU opening status = OFF, card return preparation status = ON, counting sequence number = m, and counting response = OFF is transmitted to P unit 2F.

  The store closing setting in the amusement hall is, for example, that the CU control unit 323F distributes a closing command to the CU3F from the hall management computer or the hall server 801F installed in the amusement hall, for example. It is done by judging the end of business in Japan. Specifically, when a staff member closes the hall management computer or hall server 801F, a closing command for closing the shop is distributed to each CU 3F. Alternatively, the closing time may be set and stored in the hall management computer or hall server 801F, and the closing command may be automatically distributed to each CU 3F at the closing time. As another method, a sales end signal may be transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation of a business end by a store clerk, and the CU control unit 323F may determine the end of business at the game hall. As yet another method, each CU3F is provided with a clock function, and when it is a closing time (for example, 10 o'clock), a time (for example, 10:20) after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) of the closing time has elapsed. When timed by the function, control may be performed so that each CU 3F transmits a status information request including the CU opening status = OFF to the P stand 2F.

  In response to this, in the P stand 2F, the serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls at the current time = 50, the count serial number of m + 1 updated by adding “1” to the received count serial number m, the count ball number = 50 and the count request = ON A status information response including is transmitted to the CU3F. That is, since the P stand 2F requests the CU 3F to count the remaining game balls, the P ball 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 50, the count acceptance request, and the counting sequence number count up, and the last transmission count of the previous time. Back up the serial number update and counting ball request status ON information.

  CU3F which received it adds the number of count balls = 50 sent from P stand 2F to the number of balls. Note that the number of counting balls = 50 added to the number of holding balls is not fixed, and the CU 3F backs up the information of the last last transmission counting number update while keeping the current number of holding balls = 0. And CU3F returns to P stand 2F in order to notify receipt of a counting ball. Specifically, a status information request including a serial number = n + 3, a CU opening state = OFF, a card return preparation state = ON, a counting serial number = m + 1, and a counting response = ON is transmitted to the P unit 2F. The counting balls received from the P stand 2F are stored in the storage means (for example, RAM) of the CU 3F as the number of balls held by the card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, and the card insertion time = 0.

  In the P stand 2F that has received it, the number of counting balls is subtracted from the number of gaming balls (number of gaming balls = 50−number of counting balls = 50), and the number of gaming balls = 0 is displayed. Then, the P stand 2F subtracts the number of counting balls from the number of gaming balls, and there is no remaining gaming balls (number of gaming balls = 0) and notifies the state that the counting request is unnecessary (counting request state OFF). = N + 3, Number of game balls = 0, Count sequence number = m + 1, Count ball number = 0 and Count request = OFF Sends a status information response to CU3F.

  When all the remaining game balls are counted, a process of returning the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) inserted in the CU3F is performed. Specifically, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification including a serial number = n + 4 to the P unit 2F in order to notify the P unit 2F that the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) has been returned. Upon receiving this, the P platform recognizes that the virtual card inserted into the CU3F has been returned, and transmits a response to the card return response including the serial number = n + 4, the card ID = 0, and the card insertion time = 0 to the CU3F.

  Next, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F that the CU state is the card insertion state = OFF. Specifically, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = n + 5 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P base 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 0, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting ball number = 0 to the CU 3F.

  In this way, in the counting process at the time of closing in the game hall, the counting process is automatically performed without the store clerk inserting the card and pressing the counting button 28F, and the remaining game balls All the numbers can be collectively counted as the number of balls in the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) and stored in the storage means of the CU3F. Note that the CU3F may transmit the number of possessed balls obtained by counting the number of remaining game balls to the hall server 801F together with the identification information of the P stand 2F or CU3F. In the hall server 801F, the number of possessed balls sent from the CU 3F is stored for each date, P stand 2F or CU 3F, so that the retained balls can be returned to the player at a later date. In addition, the CU 3F may transmit the card ID inserted immediately before closing the store to the hall server 801F in association with the counted number of remaining balls (remaining game balls). The remaining game balls are likely to be game balls of the player with the card ID that was inserted immediately before closing the store, so it is possible to reduce the work of identifying the owner of the counted number of balls. Returning the number of held balls to the player can be performed more easily.

  In the above-described embodiment, the store closing process when the card is not inserted and the game ball remains in the P stand 2F has been described. However, the store closing process when the card is inserted is described later as “game ball counting ( The same processing as the processing of “card return)” (see FIG. 51) is executed. However, regarding the counting process of the remaining game balls, the store clerk may perform the counting process by depressing the counting button 28F, or may automatically perform the counting process by the closing setting. In any case, when a card is inserted, the card is returned by the closing process and is in a waiting state for removal, so the store clerk needs to collect the card.

<< Counting history processing >>
Next, processing of count history data stored in the P platform 2F will be described. FIG. 50 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing of count history data stored in the P base 2F. In FIG. 50, the initial number of game balls is 600. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n (not shown), a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In the P platform 2F, the player operates the counting button 28F from the response of the status information response transmitted before receiving the status information request command until the response to the status information request command is transmitted. The counting process is started.

  Then, in the P stand 2F, the response of the status information response including the serial number = n (not shown), the number of game balls = 600, the counting serial number = m + 1, the counting ball number = 100 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU 3F. Here, in the P platform 2F, the counting request is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, so the counting history processing is started. Specifically, the P stand 2F uses the history of the number of game balls paid out to the CU 3F side as the count request ball number from the P stand 2F side between the count request ON state and the count request OFF state as a count history for one time. Remember. That is, when there are a plurality of count requests, the history from the count request ON state to the count request OFF state is stored as the first count request as the first count request. Thereafter, as the second count request, the history from the count request ON state to the count request OFF state is stored as the second count history. Although depending on the period during which the count button 28F is pressed, a response to a status information response including a plurality of count request ON states is received between the count request ON state and the count request OFF state. It is returned to CU3F. The count history to be stored includes the “card ID” at the time of the count request, the “count reception time” included in the status information response of the count response ON state from the CU3F, and the number of balls that have been paid out until the count request is OFF. The information includes the cumulative number “cumulative counting ball number” and “game ball number” at the end of counting.

  Next, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 (not shown), a count serial number = m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P-unit 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed. . At this stage, the number of balls counted = 100 is provisionally confirmed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P stand 2F subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counted balls = 100, and the number of game balls is collated, and if it is 500 balls, the temporarily fixed 100 balls are confirmed. . Then, the display on the game ball number display 29F is updated from 600 to 500. Further, when the player continues to operate the counting button 28F, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1 (not shown), the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number = m + 2, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request. A response of a status information response including = ON is returned to the CU3F. Next, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 (not shown), a count serial number = m + 2 and a count response = ON to the P unit 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed. . At this stage, the number of balls counted = 100 is provisionally confirmed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P stand 2F subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and the number of game balls is collated, and if it is 400 balls, the temporarily fixed 100 balls are fixed. . Then, the display on the game ball number display 29F is updated from 600 to 500. After that, when the operation of the counting button 28F by the player is finished, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 2 (not shown), the number of game balls = 400, the counting serial number = m + 3, the number of counting balls = 100 and the counting request. = Response of status information response including OFF is returned to CU3F. When the P stand 2F is changed to the counting request OFF state, the counting history stores 100 balls + 100 balls = 200 balls as the counting history 1 as the “cumulative counting ball number”. Further, the P stand 2F stores the number of game balls when changed to the count request OFF state in the counting history 1 as the “number of game balls” at the end of counting. Further, the P base 2F stores the “count reception time” included in the state information response of the count response ON state from the CU 3F in the count history 1. When a new history is stored in the counting history 1, if the counting history 1 already exists, the counting history 1 is stored as the counting history 2 and then the new history is stored in the counting history 1. . In addition, since the history for the past two times is stored in the P platform 2F, it is stored as the counting history 1 and the counting history 2, but even if the history for the past one time or the history for the past three times or more is stored. Good.

  As described above, it is possible to recover the number of game balls counted by storing the counting history, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the recovery processing by storing a plurality of past pieces.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 51 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 51, the number of card possessions specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is 0, and the initial number of game balls is 800. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game table, the player presses the “card return” button. However, when the player presses the “return card” button, the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls, and the CU 3F determines that the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is not zero. Further, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU3F sets the card return ready state = ON, and the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to P unit 2F. Note that the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3F displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54F or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28F to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2F determines that the counting operation for pressing the counting button 28F is a counting operation with the card return ready state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU3F of a counting acceptance number of 800 balls, and a counting acceptance number request for 800 gaming balls, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1, a gaming ball number = 800, a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a count request message, the P unit 2F counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the counted number of 800 balls to the number of held balls, and subtracts the counted number of 800 balls from the gaming ball number of 800 balls to 0 balls. Further, the CU3F backs up the updated data of the last transmission count sequence number last time. Then, in order to notify the receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3F sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU store opening state = ON, card return ready state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F subtracts the counting ball number 800 from the gaming ball number 800 and displays the gaming ball number 0 on the display 54F or the like. Further, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F that the number of game balls is 0 and counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to the CU3F. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  The CU3F counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28F and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322F, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of a card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17F, and the card insertion time to the CU 3F. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3F, the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17F are cleared.

  In response to this, the CU 3F performs a match determination between the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P stand 2F, and if it matches, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801F or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3F stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F and returns the card to the player. In addition, when the player starts the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in the CU3F Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU3F transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801F, and the hall server 801F associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3F can be removed from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309F (card removal possible state). The CU 3F is attached with a sensor capable of determining whether or not the card can be removed in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F, and when the signal of the sensor is in the ON state, the card is determined to be ready for card removal. If it is in the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal is complete.

  When the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of information indicating that the card return ready state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Therefore, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4, the CU opening state = ON, the card return ready state = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Send. In response to this, the P stand 2F displays “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278F to the player in order to prevent forgetting to remove the card. Further, in order to notify the card removal, the P base 2F may turn on the LED or output a voice message “Please remove the card” with the speaker 270F. Further, the P stand 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 4, a game ball number = 0, a count serial number = m + 1, a count ball number = 0, and a count response = OFF to the CU 3F.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is in the ON state, the CU 3F transmits a command for requesting the state information including “waiting for card removal = ON” to the P base 2F. However, when the player removes the card from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is turned off, so the CU3F is waiting for the serial number = n + 5 and card removal = OFF A command for requesting the status information including is transmitted to the P base 2F.

  In response to this, the P base 2F stops displaying “please remove the card” displayed on the variable display device 278F, and terminates the card removal notification. The notification of card removal is continued until a status information request command including ON card waiting = ON is received until a status information request command including OFF card waiting = OFF is received. Further, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3F.

  The sequence of the game ball counting process when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 51 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can also be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<< Abnormal Sequence 1 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information request is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and a status information request command from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power of the P base 2F is turned off and then turned on again), and the status information request has not arrived (a command has not reached the P base 2F from the CU 3F) ) Shows a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 52, before the power interruption occurs during the game, CU 3F transmits a status information request including serial number = n to P unit 2F. In response to this, in order to notify the game machine information CU3F, the P machine 2F transmits a status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU3F. . The P table 2F updates the previous last transmission serial number as the previous game table information to “n”.

  CU3F receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the previous last transmission serial number to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the P stand 2F during the game, when a status information request including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F is in a power cut off state. Status information request cannot be received. After that, since the status information response from the P stand 2F is not transmitted, the CU 3F performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. From the time when the P table 2F transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3F until the power is cut off, the game is continued in the P table 2F and the game table information is changed, the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6. Number of balls to be subtracted = 36, which is the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P base 2F is restored, and the P base 2F starts to operate. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission serial number = n to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In the P machine 2F that has received it, the P machine 2F first receives the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request and the last last data that is backed up inside the P machine 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). It is determined whether or not the transmission sequence number = n matches. If they match, it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F before the communication disconnection has reached the CU 3F. In this case, the status information response is included in the status information response. The game information is updated on the CU3F side based on the game information to be played. Therefore, in this case, the P stand 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1, ball unit price) to the CU 3F as no game information storage (specifically, no previous game stand information). If the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request does not match the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F), the communication is interrupted. Since it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU3F before the CU3F has not reached the CU3F, in such a case, the game information is stored (specifically, the previous game table information A recovery response (sequence number = 1, ball unit price) including game information is returned to the CU3F. The P stand 2F transmits the response of the recovery response including the unit price when transmitting the response to the CU 3F, and transmits the unit price of the game ball played before the recovery process to the CU 3F. As a result, the game can be played after the recovery process at the unit price of the game balls played before the recovery process. The ball unit price information is also included in the response of the recovery response transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F, which will be described later, but is not specified in particular when the ball unit price information is not directly related to the contents of the sequence to be described.

  In FIG. 52, CU3F does not store the game information included in the recovery response, and therefore does not perform the addition recovery process. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since no game information is stored, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Upon receiving this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (the number of game balls as the latest game table information = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. CU3F receives a status information response including unreported gaming machine information, updates the last transmission number last time, and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Counting history sequence >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a process for reading the count history stored in the P platform 2F to the CU 3F will be described. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of processing for reading the count history stored in the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. First, the CU 3F transmits a count history request command including a serial number = n, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P platform 2F. The P stand 2F compares the store code transmitted from the CU 3F with the card insertion notification command and stored with the store code transmitted from the CU 3F with the count history request command. If the store code matches as a result of the comparison, the P platform 2F sets the stored count history 1 and count history 2 data to the response of the count history response so that it can be transmitted to the CU 3F. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the counting history response including the serial number = n, the counting history 1 and the counting history 2 to the CU 3F.

  On the other hand, if the store code does not match as a result of the comparison, the P platform 2F sets data as no counting history in the response of the counting history response transmitted to the CU3F. Although not shown, the P base 2F returns a response of a counting history response including a serial number = n and no counting history to the CU 3F.

  Thus, the counting history sequence can recover the number of game balls counted by transmitting the counting history stored in the P platform 2F to the CU 3F, and can further recover a plurality of past (counting history 1 and counting history). By transmitting 2) to CU3F, the accuracy of the recovery process can be improved. Note that the plurality of count histories transmitted to the CU3F is not limited to two times, and may be three or more count histories.

<< Abnormal sequence 2 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information response has not reached yet due to power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and the response of the status information response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P base 2F is turned OFF and then turned ON again), and the status information response has not reached (the command has not reached the CU 3F from the P base 2F) ) Shows a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 54, after a power failure occurs in the game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2F to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3F is not transmitted, the P stand 2F performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued on the P stand 2F, and the game stand information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of addition balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game stand information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, in the CU3F, since the power is cut off, the inserted card is forcibly ejected and returned to the player. At that time, the number of balls currently held is stored in the card and discharged. If the number of possessed balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU or the like, the hall server 801F that regularly receives the number of retained balls from the CU 3F (for example, every 5 seconds) and stores it in a backup manner. The loss may be compensated for by the player based on the stored data (the number of balls). Thereafter, the power failure of the CU3F is restored and the CU3F is turned on and starts operating. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission serial number = n−1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, in the P unit 2F, the previous last transmission sequence number of the received recovery request = n−1, and the last final transmission sequence number backed up in the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) = n. Are compared. As a result, since they do not match, it is determined that the state information response transmitted last before the occurrence of the power interruption has not reached the CU 3F. Therefore, the P stand 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including the game information storage presence (specifically, the previous game stand information exists) to the CU 3F, assuming that the game information has not been notified to the CU 3F. To do. That is, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, which are the previous game table information, are included in the recovery response and transmitted to the CU 3F.

  The CU 3F executes a recovery process based on the game information included in the recovery response. However, since the game ball addition request is not transmitted immediately before the communication line disconnection is detected, the addition recovery process is unnecessary. For this reason, after receiving the recovery response, the communication start request is transmitted without transmitting the recovery request 2. The CU 3F executes the first check process before transmitting this communication start request. In the first check process, whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P table 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value by the CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response Is checked. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3F transmits a communication start request including a serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. In response to this, in the P stand 2F, unreported game stand information (game balls = 450, added balls = 6, subtracted balls) included in the status information response that did not reach the CU 3F before the power failure occurred. = 36) is notified to the CU 3F by a status information response, and the last transmission serial number is updated last time to back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. CU3F receives a status information response including unreported gaming machine information, updates the last transmission number last time, and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the card ID of the reinserted card is properly read by the card information reading process, whether the read card ID matches the card ID included in the recovery response or not Is determined by the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F, and the insertion time of the card inserted at the start of the game before the power interruption occurs is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and the stored card insertion time and recovery are stored. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F may determine whether or not the card insertion times included in the response match and match. In this case, it is determined that both match, and if there is no addition recovery, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  In this embodiment, a card ID and a card insertion time are used as player specifying information that can specify a player when determining the identity of the player. This card ID includes not only the card ID of the member card that identifies the individual player of the member but also the card ID of the visitor card used by the player who visited the store as a visitor. In the case of this visitor card, it is used for an unspecified player and does not specify a specific player individual. That is, in the case of this card ID, whether the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line disconnection and the player who intends to play the game after the power interruption is restored are the same player. It can be specified whether or not, but it cannot be specified to which specific individual the player is. Therefore, the above “player identification information” is not limited to identifying a specific individual player, and the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line interruption and the game after the power interruption recovery is performed. It is a broad concept that includes information that can be used to determine the identity of the player who is trying to correct.

<< Abnormal sequence 3 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, another recovery process of the number of game balls when the status information response is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and the response of the status information response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power outage / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of CU3F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not arrived (a command has not arrived from P stand 2F to CU3F) The sequence diagram for demonstrating the counting process in case the communication partners after a mismatch do not correspond is shown. This power OFF / ON can also be turned OFF / ON, for example, by failure of the CU3F, or by manually turning the power OFF / ON, or by removing / inserting the CU3F from the card unit holder.

  Referring to FIG. 55, after a power failure occurs during the game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2F to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3F is not transmitted, the P stand 2F performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued on the P stand 2F, and the game stand information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of addition balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game stand information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, in the CU3F, since the power is cut off, the inserted card is forcibly ejected and returned to the player. Thereafter, the power failure of the CU3F is restored and the power is turned on, and the CU3F is replaced and a new CU3F starts operation.

  In addition, when CU3F which was operating before CU exchange has memorized the number of balls, the number of balls may be stored in another card (for example, a card inside the CU) and discharged. At that time, if the number of balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU, etc., the number of balls is received regularly from the CU3F (for example, every 5 seconds) and stored in a backup. The player may be compensated for the loss based on the data stored in the server 801F (the number of balls).

  When the exchanged CU3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU3F. Is done. The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. However, since CU3F has been exchanged, it does not have the last transmission serial number of the previous time. In response to this, in the P base 2F, the previous last transmission serial number = 0 transmitted from the exchanged CU 3F and the last final transmission serial number backed up in the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) = n Are compared. As a result, since the two do not match, the game information stored in the P base 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F in order to perform the recovery process. Specifically, the P-base 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including game information storage presence to the CU 3F as having game information to perform recovery processing for the exchanged CU 3F. The recovery information notified to the CU3F by this recovery response includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n, the card ID of the inserted card, the card insertion time, the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m as the previous game table information, and the previous game table information. It is included. The previous game table information includes the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3F transmits a communication start request including a serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. Note that the CU3F performs recovery processing (game balls = 480, added balls total = + 3, subtracted balls total = + 23) using the previous game table information received from the P table 2F, and sets the previous last transmission serial number. Update and back up the data, card ID, and card insertion time. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. Upon receiving a status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3F waits for insertion of a card that was being inserted last time or waits for a store clerk remote control operation (game ball count). When a card is inserted in this state, the CU 3F reads the ID of the inserted card with a card reader / writer. Then, it is determined whether or not the read card ID matches the recovery card ID stored based on the recovery response (the card ID of the previously inserted card). If it is determined that they match, the store clerk waits for a remote control operation to resume the game. If there is a remote control operation, a card insertion notification command including the store code and SC board ID is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. The P unit 2F backs up the store code and SC board ID data received at the time of the previous card insertion before communication interruption to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F, and the backed up data and the CU3F are transmitted. The store code and the SC board ID are compared to determine whether or not they match. If they match, the game can be resumed. Note that the card insertion notification command including the store code and the SC board ID may be transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F without waiting for the remote control operation. If they do not match, error processing such as invalidating the number of game balls in the P platform 2F is performed, for example. Alternatively, an error notification may be made instead of or in addition to this. Further, it may be controlled to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player. When the card that was being inserted last time is not inserted, the state of waiting for the clerk remote control operation (game ball counting) is continued.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal sequence 4 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the addition request has not yet reached (the command for addition request from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F has not reached) due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 56, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the status information request command, the P stand 2F is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3F.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F starts operation. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request to the P platform 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. Here, the last last transmission addition serial number = m is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. The CU3F has a larger value (newer) than the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the backup CU3F compared to the final transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of the P unit 2F (mismatch) Then, it is determined that the previous status information request command has not been reached, and the addition recovery process is performed.

  As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2F.

  The P base 2F performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. At this timing, an addition process that has not been realized due to power-off is realized, and the number of game balls matches on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. Further, the P platform 2F returns a recovery response 2 to the CU 3F indicating that the addition processing is OK (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). The CU3F receiving it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P table 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3F. In addition, the CU 3F transmits a status information request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 5 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the addition response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition response has not reached (the response of the addition response from the P platform 2F to the CU3F has not reached) due to power-off or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 57, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3F, and the operation of CU3F stops. However, the P stand 2F cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3F is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3F. In order for the P platform 2F to detect the disconnection of the communication line, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3F for one second or longer is required.

  Therefore, in the P stand 2F, without knowing that the operation of the CU 3F is stopped, a command for requesting the status information of the CU 3F is received, the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number. Response of the status information response including = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. However, the response of the status information response returned to the CU3F is not reached to the CU3F because the operation of the CU3F is stopped. The P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3F, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the updated data and the number of game balls = 175.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time in the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F matches the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F, the CU3F performs the addition recovery. Clear the addition request state without requesting processing. In addition, the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P unit 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The CU3F has a matching card ID and card insertion time, and depends on whether or not the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F matches the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F. In addition, an addition recovery process determination as to whether or not to perform an addition recovery process is performed. In the addition recovery process determination, when the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F matches the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F. Therefore, it is determined that the addition recovery process is not performed, and it is determined that the addition recovery process is performed otherwise.

  When the CU 3F basically determines that the addition recovery process is not performed in the addition recovery process determination, the CU 3F does not transmit the command of the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. However, although the CU 3F determines that the addition recovery process is not performed in the addition recovery process determination, if the recovery request 2 command is erroneously transmitted to the P unit 2F, the recovery process is performed. There is an inconvenience of being changed to a different number of game balls.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the CU 3F transmits the recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F after the determination of the addition recovery process determination, the P unit 2F includes the previous last transmission addition serial number included in the recovery request 2 command. Then, it is determined whether or not the previous last transmission addition serial number stored in the P base 2F matches, and it is determined again whether or not the addition recovery processing is performed.

  Specifically, the CU 3F transmits the command of the recovery request 2 including the serial number = 2, the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1, and the number of additional balls = 125 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F adds the previous final transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 included in the command of the recovery request 2 of the CU3F and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the P unit 2F. It is determined that the recovery process is not performed, and the information of the process NG is notified to the CU3F. Therefore, the P platform 2F transmits a recovery response 2 including a serial number = 2 and a processing result = processing NG to the CU 3F.

  Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal Sequence 6 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the addition response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition response has not reached (the response of the addition response from the P platform 2F to the CU3F has not reached) due to power-off or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 58, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3F, and the operation of CU3F stops. However, the P stand 2F cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3F is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3F. In order for the P platform 2F to detect the disconnection of the communication line, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3F for one second or longer is required.

  Therefore, the P base 2F receives the CU3F status information request command and processes the addition request without knowing that the operation of the CU3F is stopped. However, for some reason (for example, the number of game balls has reached the upper limit), a situation in which game balls cannot be added occurs. In this case, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50, the game ball addition result = NG and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. However, the response of the status information response returned to the CU3F is not reached to the CU3F because the operation of the CU3F is stopped. In addition, since the game ball addition abnormality has occurred in the P stand 2F, the addition ball from the CU 3F cannot be processed, and the previous last transmission addition serial number = m is not updated.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. In addition, in P stand 2F, it is in the state of game ball addition abnormality. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time in the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of the P unit 2F does not match the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F, the CU3F performs addition recovery. Request processing. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits the recovery request 2 including the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 and the number of added balls = 125 to the P unit 2F.

  In response to this, the P stand 2F notifies the recovery response 2 that the game ball addition is not processed (game ball addition NG) due to the game ball addition abnormality. The recovery response 2 includes recovery result = processing NG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response 2 including the recovery result = processing NG, the CU 3F clears the game ball addition request state and turns it off, and performs a third check described later. Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  Further, since the CU3F is in the OFF state after the game ball addition request state is cleared, state information including the game ball addition request = OFF and the addition serial number = m + 1 without notifying the P stand 2F again of the addition request. The request is transmitted to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the current number of game balls = 50 without adding if the number of balls to be added = 125 of the recovery request 2 cannot be added to the number of game balls = 50 due to an abnormal addition state. To do. Specifically, the P stand 2F transmits a state information response including the number of game balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. The addition serial number remains “m” without being updated to “m + 1” transmitted in the status information request because the game ball addition result is NG. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3F performs a process of canceling the determined consumption of the stored balls based on the information of the current number of game balls = 50 included in the state information response transmitted from the P stand 2F.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 7 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition request has not been reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition request has not yet reached due to power-off or communication line disconnection (addition request command from CU3F to P-unit 2F has not arrived) and the communication counterpart after the restoration is inconsistent The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 59, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the status information request command, the P stand 2F is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3F.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F is replaced and the new P base 2F starts operating. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request to the P platform 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. Note that the CU 3F performs addition recovery even when the P stand 2F is replaced. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. However, since the P base 2F is newly exchanged, the previous last transmission addition serial number is not backed up, and the initial value “0” is transmitted to the CU 3F.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. When the last transmission addition sequence number = 0 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F does not match the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F being backed up, the CU3F has not received a previous status information request command. It is determined that it has been reached, and addition recovery processing is performed. As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2F.

  The P base 2F performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. Further, the P platform 2F returns a recovery response 2 to the CU 3F indicating that the addition processing is OK (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). The CU3F receiving it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P table 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3F. In addition, the CU 3F transmits a status information request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 8 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls when the count response is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the count response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection (the counting response command from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 60, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU 3F. The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the number of balls to the number of balls and sets the number of balls to 100, updates the last transmission count sequence number last time, and backs up the updated data. However, after receiving the status information request command, the P platform 2F stops operating due to power failure. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1, a count serial number = m + 1, and a count response = ON from the CU 3F. That is, in the P base 2F, the count response from the CU 3F has not reached yet.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F starts operation. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission count serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, in the P base 2F, the last transmission count sequence number of the received recovery request = m + 1, and the last final transmission count sequence number backed up in the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) = m + 1. Therefore, it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU3F before the communication disconnection has reached the CU3F. In this case, the P stand 2F executes a process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P stand 2F is updated from the number of game balls = 500 to the number of game balls = 400 at this time. The P platform 2F returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since the CU 3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 400) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3 and number of game balls = 400. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal system 9 >>
Next, a recovery process for the number of counting balls when the count request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and a count request command from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting request is not reached (the counting request command from the P platform 2F to the CU3F has not reached) due to power-off or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 61, the initial number of balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU 3F. The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  However, before the CU3F receives the status information response command, the power is cut off and the operation stops. In other words, the CU 3F has not yet reached the counting request from the P platform 2F. Thereafter, since the status information request from the CU 3F is not transmitted, the P stand 2F performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission counting serial number = m to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, in the P unit 2F, the last transmission count sequence number of the received recovery request = m, and the last final transmission count sequence number backed up in the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) = m + 1. Since they do not match (mismatch), it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU3F before the communication disconnection has not reached the CU3F. In this case, the P stand 2F does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P stand 2F cancels the count request transmitted immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption, and maintains the number of game balls = 500 at this time. The P platform 2F returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since the CU 3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Receiving it, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal Sequence 10 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of counting balls when the counting response is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the count response from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection (the counting response command from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 62, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, the counting serial number m + 1, and the counting request = ON to the CU3F. . The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU3F executes a process of adding the counted number of balls to the number of possessed balls, but some abnormality occurs and the addition process cannot be performed. For this reason, a command for requesting status information including a count sequence number = m and a count response = OFF (because of an abnormal count state) is transmitted from the CU 3F. However, after receiving the status information request command, the P platform 2F has stopped operating due to power failure. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3F. That is, in the P base 2F, the count response from the CU 3F has not reached yet.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F starts operation. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission counting serial number = m to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, in the P base 2F, the last transmission count sequence number of the received recovery request = m (not updated as “m” due to counting abnormality) and the inside of the P base 2F (specifically payout control) Since the last transmission count serial number backed up by the circuit board 17F) does not coincide with m + 1 (mismatch), the status information response last transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU3F before the communication interruption reaches the CU3F. It can be judged that it is not. In this case, the P stand 2F does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, turns off the count request state, and decreases the last transmission count sequence number by 1 (−1). At this time, the P stand 2F cancels the count request before the occurrence of the power interruption and maintains the number of game balls = 500. The P platform 2F returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since the CU 3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Receiving it, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Addition request error >>
Next, processing for abnormal addition request will be described. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is an abnormality in the result of game ball addition at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. In particular, there is shown a sequence diagram for explaining the processing when the addition result of game balls at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout is abnormal.

  In FIG. 63, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the possession payout button. Therefore, the CU3F confirms the consumption of the holding balls / storing balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Then, the information (addition number of balls = 125 balls) of converting the possession balls / storage balls into game balls is notified. At that time, the CU 3F backs up the data of the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of add balls) = 175, the updated last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in the process of adding game balls on the P platform 2F. Therefore, upon receiving the CU3F status information request command, the P stand 2F sets the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the game ball addition result = NG and the last transmission addition serial number information.

  The CU3F that received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG receives the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. Resend to the base 2F. The CU3F retransmits the status information request command, but the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 1 to n + 2, and the additional serial number remains m + 1 and the status information request command is retransmitted.

  However, the P stand 2F remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command of the CU 3F, the P stand 2F receives a serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG and an addition serial number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to the CU3F.

  Further, the CU3F that has received the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG again receives the status information request including the serial number = n + 3, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The command is retransmitted for the second time to P platform 2F. Note that the CU3F retransmits the status information request command, but the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 2 to n + 3, and the status information request command is retransmitted while the addition sequence number remains m + 1.

  The P stand 2F still remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F receives the serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG and the addition serial number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to the CU3F.

  CU3F is a process of adding a game ball in the P stand 2F when receiving a response of a response of a state information response including a game ball addition result = NG even if the state information request command is retransmitted twice. As a result, it becomes a state of waiting for addition abnormality recovery.

  After the addition abnormality is restored in the P unit 2F, the CU 3F retransmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + X, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. . In P 2F, since the addition abnormality has been recovered, the addition processing to the game balls is performed and the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the addition of game balls) +125 (the number of additional balls) = 175. The last transmission addition serial number is updated and the data is backed up.

  After the addition process to the game balls is performed, the P stand 2F transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + X, the number of game balls = 175, the addition serial number = m + 1, and the game ball addition result = OK to the CU 3F. In response to this, the CU 3F turns off the addition request state.

<Operation related to addition serial number>
FIG. 64 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operation of the P platform 2F and the CU 3F regarding the addition serial number. When a game ball addition request is not generated, a message including a normal serial number and an addition serial number as shown in (1) to (4) of FIG. 64 is transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and an additional serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The P table 2F that has received the electronic message (1) returns the electronic message (2) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received electronic message as shown in (2).

  The CU 3F that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, addition sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. The P table 2F that has received the message (3) returns the message (4) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received message.

  In this way, every time a message is received from the P platform 2F, the CU 3F updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2F does not update the normal serial number. Further, unless an addition request is generated, the addition sequence number is not updated.

  Next, when an addition request (due to a ball lending operation or a withdrawal operation for a storage ball) occurs, a request message of (5) in which one addition serial number is updated is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F (normal serial number n + 2). , Addition serial number m + 1). This request message includes data in which the addition request bit is turned ON. At this stage, the CU 3F has already confirmed the processing for the addition request (card balance withdrawal or savings withdrawal).

  The P base 2F receives the request message (5) and recognizes the addition request based on the fact that one addition serial number has been updated from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current addition request. This determination is performed, for example, by the payout control unit 171F of the P stand 2F. The payout control unit 171F determines whether or not processing for adding game balls is possible on the P stand 2F side. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached a predetermined upper limit value.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (6) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (6) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (5). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (6). The normal serial number is n + 2 included in the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message.

  The CU3F includes an area for backup storage of the added serial number included in the immediately previous transmission message, and an area for backup storage of the normal sequence number included in the reception message. These areas are provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the message (6) compares the addition sequence number stored in the backup with the addition sequence number included in the message (6). As a result, if the stored addition sequence number is the same as the addition sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, when the transmitted addition serial number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (5) 'of FIG. 64 shows a case where the request message has not reached the P table 2F due to noise or other factors. In this case, since the P base 2F waits for a telegram arrival from the CU 3F, no telegram is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The CU 3F waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the request message (5) ', and retransmits the same request message (5) "because there is no response from the P-unit 2F.

<Operation related to counting serial number>
FIG. 65 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2F and the CU 3F relating to the counting sequence number. When no counting request is generated, a message including a normal serial number and a counting serial number as shown in (1) to (3) of FIG. 65 is transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and a counting serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The P table 2F that has received the electronic message (1) returns the electronic message (2) including the same normal serial number n and counting serial number m as the received electronic message, as shown in (2).

  The CU 3F that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, count sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. In this way, every time a message is received from the P platform 2F, the CU 3F updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2F does not update the normal serial number. Further, the counting sequence number is not updated unless a counting request is generated.

  Next, when a counting request (detection of counting operation) occurs, the request message of (4) in which one counting sequence number is updated is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F (normal sequence number n + 1, count sequence number m + 1). ). This request message includes data in which the count request bit is turned ON. Note that the P platform 2F does not execute the counting process at this stage.

  The P table 2F receives the request message (4) and recognizes the counting request based on the fact that the counting sequence number has been updated by one from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current counting request. This determination is performed, for example, by the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F determines whether or not a counting process (addition process for holding balls) is possible. The case where the counting process is not possible is, for example, a case where the process using a holding ball (such as a wagon service) is in progress.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (5) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (5) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (4). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (4). The normal serial number is updated from the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message, and is n + 2.

  The P base 2F has an area for backup storage of the counting sequence number and the normal sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. Such an area is provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the payout control unit 171F of the P stand 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F that has received the message (5) compares and determines the count sequence number stored in the backup and the count sequence number included in the message (5). As a result, if the stored counting sequence number is the same as the counting sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, if the transmitted counting sequence number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (4) 'of FIG. 65 shows a case where the request message has not reached the P table 2F due to noise or other factors. In this case, the CU 3F waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the message (3), and retransmits the same message (3) because there is no response from the P platform 2F. The P base 2F that has received the retransmitted message (3) has the normal sequence number included in the message n + 1, and the normal sequence number is transmitted even though the request message (4) ′ has been transmitted first. Therefore, it is determined that the request message (4) ′ has not arrived. Then, the P platform 2F retransmits the same request message (4) ″ as (4) ′.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request sequence number (additional sequence number, counting sequence number) different from the normal sequence number is included in the message and transmitted. These request serial numbers are added and updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and otherwise, the addition and update are not performed even if a message is transmitted / received.

  In contrast, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is transmitted from the CU 3F regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is updated by both the CU 3F and the P unit 2F). You may act.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party can be determined using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but is the received message an acknowledgment message indicating request acceptance? It cannot be specified whether the message is a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, a request message with an updated request sequence number is transmitted using a request sequence number such as an addition sequence number or a counting sequence number as in this embodiment, and the request sequence number included in the request message as a response to this request message If a message containing the same request serial number is received, depending on the value of the serial number, not only whether the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party, but whether the message returned from the other party is an acceptance message. Can be specified. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. It is possible to identify whether the message is a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

  In this embodiment, the update value for the request sequence number when a request is generated is +1. However, this is an example, and other update values such as +2, +3, -1, and -2 are adopted. May be.

<First to third check processing>
Next, the first check process, the second check process, and the third check process executed by the CU control unit 323F will be described based on FIGS. 66 (a), 66 (b), and 67. FIG.

  First, the first check process will be described with reference to FIG. In step SF (hereinafter simply referred to as SF) 300, it is determined whether or not game table information is stored. This is to determine whether or not the game table information is included in the recovery response transmitted from the P table 2F. In the case of FIGS. 54 and 55 described above, the game table information (specifically, Since the previous game table information) is included, the SF 300 makes a determination of YES. If it is determined that the game table information is not included, the first check process ends.

  If it is determined that game table information is stored, control proceeds to SF 301, and the number of additional balls included in the received game table information (specifically, previous game table information) is a predetermined threshold value. A determination is made whether N1 or greater. This threshold value N1 is the maximum number of game balls to be added during a period (200 ms) between the status information request and the status information response between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F (for example, the maximum addition ball at the time of big hit) The number is set to a value (for example, 125) slightly larger than (number = 120). Therefore, in the normal case, the received number of added balls should be smaller than the threshold value N1. However, when the number of additional balls is larger than the threshold value N1, game table information including the number of additional balls and the number of game balls that have been illegally increased due to fraud etc. being performed on the P unit 2F while offline is a recovery response. May be transmitted to the CU3F. In that case, the control proceeds to SF 304 and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, and control is performed to transmit an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred to the hall server 801F. (In this case, error notification by the hall server 801F may be performed). In addition, instead of or in addition to the hall server 801F, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to SF305, and the CU control unit 323F enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323F stops control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The control unit 323F is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 42).

  Even if an abnormality is determined as a result of the check processing of SF301 and SF303, the information stored on the CU3F side is that the cause is that the CU3F or the P stand 2F is replaced with a new one after communication disconnection, and then the communication is restored. And the information transmitted from the P platform 2F during the recovery process may be completely different. Even though it is not such a fraudulent act, it may be determined that there is an abnormality, and for this reason, it is possible to cancel the reset waiting state by operating the remote control by the game hall staff, and intervene by human judgment by the game hall staff. So that they can respond normally.

  On the other hand, if NO is determined by SF301, the control proceeds to SF302, and the number of added balls received from the P units is added to the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323F and the number of subtracted balls is set. An operation for subtracting and calculating R1 as the calculation result is performed. That is, when it is determined that the number of added balls included in the game table information received from the P table 2F is appropriate, the latest number of game balls R1 is calculated using the added number of balls and the number of subtracted balls. It is calculated. Next, in SF303, the calculated R1-absolute value of the received game balls, that is, the difference between R1 and the received game balls is calculated, and whether or not the difference is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N2. Judgment is made. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility of fraudulent behavior as described above, and control proceeds to SF304 and thereafter as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F.

  Next, the second check process will be described with reference to FIG. The number of balls to be added in the game table information (specifically, the current game table information) included in the status information response from the P table 2F returned in response to the status information request immediately after the communication start response is determined in advance. The SF 310 determines whether or not the threshold value N3 is greater than or equal to the threshold value N3. The number of added balls received is the time from when the P unit last transmits a status information response to the CU3F until the P unit loses power or until the P unit detects a communication line disconnection and the game stops. The number of added balls that fluctuated in (5) is such that the amount of change in the number of added balls within a relatively short limited period of time is not so large, but within a certain upper limit. Therefore, a value (for example, 125) slightly larger than the upper limit (for example, 120) is determined as the threshold value N3. When the received number of added balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3, the control proceeds to SF314, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312F, and an error occurs in the hall server 801F. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801F may be performed). In addition, instead of or in addition to the hall server 801F, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to SF315, and the CU control unit 323F enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323F stops control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The control unit 323F is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 42).

  On the other hand, if NO is determined by SF310, the control proceeds to SF311 and the received number of added balls is added to the number of game balls stored in CU control unit 323F and the received number of subtracted balls is subtracted. Thus, an operation for calculating R2 is performed. Note that the “number of game balls stored” here is the number of game balls received from the P stand 2F when NO is determined in SF303, as described above. Then, SF 312 determines whether or not the difference between R2 and the number of game balls received from P stand 2F is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N4. Originally, R2 and the received number of game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N4. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N4, there is a risk of fraudulent behavior as described above, and control proceeds to SF314 and subsequent steps as described above.

  If NO is determined in SF 312, the control proceeds to SF 313, and the CU control unit 323 F stores the number of game balls received from the P stand 2 F as the initial number of game balls, and then performs the second check process. Control ends.

  After the processing of SF 313 is performed, normal status information requests and status information responses are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F uses the SF 313 to set initial values. Using the number of game balls stored as the number of game balls as an initial value, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and transmitted from the P unit 2F based on the current number of game balls It is determined whether or not the difference from the number of game balls coming exceeds a predetermined number of error balls (for example, 5). If it exceeds, an abnormality is determined, and the above-described SF 304, SF 305, SF 314, SF 315 The same control is performed.

  Next, the control of the third check process will be described based on FIG. The CU control unit 323F executes the third check process immediately after receiving the recovery response 2 from the P platform 2F (see FIGS. 56, 58, and 59).

  As described above, the recovery request 2 and the recovery response 2 are the game balls in which the P unit 2F complies with the game ball addition request even though the CU 3F outputs a request for adding the number of game balls to the P unit 2F. This is for performing recovery of the number of game balls when the addition process is not performed. Then, the recovery result 2 is sent from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F to notify the processing result as to whether or not the addition recovery processing has been normally performed. The CU control unit 323F uses the SF 320 to determine whether the recovery result is processing NG. If processing NG, that is, addition recovery is not performed normally, control proceeds to SF324, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, and an error has occurred in the hall server 801F. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to that effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801F may be performed). In addition, instead of or in addition to the hall server 801F, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control proceeds to SF325, and the CU control unit 323F enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323F stops control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The control unit 323F is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 42).

  On the other hand, if the recovery result is processing OK, the control proceeds to SF321, and the CU control unit 323F performs a process of adding the number of added balls transmitted to the P unit 2F to the number of game balls currently stored. . This is because the addition recovery for the number of added balls in the game ball addition request output by the CU3F has been normally performed in the P unit 2F, and the added number of balls is added to the number of game balls and the current normal game ball This is a process for calculating the number.

  Next, the control advances to SF322, and an operation of calculating R3 by adding the added ball number transmitted from the P unit 2F to the added game ball number and subtracting the subtracted ball number is performed. The number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are game table information (specifically, previous game table information) transmitted from the P unit 2F as a recovery response, and the previous game table information is included in the recovery response. When there is no ball, the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are both zero, and as a result, the number of game balls after addition = R3 is calculated.

  Next, SF 323 determines whether or not the difference between the calculated R3 and the number of game balls received by CU3F is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value N2. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility of fraudulent behavior as described above, and the control proceeds to SF324 and subsequent steps as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the CU control unit 323F.

  As described above, the previous gaming machine information is transmitted as gaming machine information first from the P machine 2F to the CU 3F, and then the gaming machine information is transmitted this time, so that both gaming machine information can be distinguished on the CU 3F side. Since it is transmitted, the CU control unit 323F can determine the suitability of each of the game machine information. As a result, for example, the number of game balls in the previous game table information sent from the P table 2F should not be significantly different from the number of game balls stored at the present time by the CU control unit 323F. The game ball number data in the current game table data sent thereafter, for example, should not be very different from the game ball number data in the previous game table information received by the CU3F. If there is a large gap in the difference between these data, it can be determined that the game ball number data is illegally inflated.

  If the total data obtained by adding the previous game machine data and the current game data is collectively transmitted from the P machine 2F to the CU 3F, compared to the case where the previous game machine data and the current game machine data are individually determined. Therefore, it is only possible to roughly discriminate, and accordingly it is difficult to discriminate fraud. In order to prevent such inconvenience, the game table data is transmitted in two stages so that the CU control unit 323F can distinguish between the two types of data, making it possible to perform detailed abnormality determination for each game table data. It is easy to distinguish.

  In the first check process to the third check process described above, after determining whether or not the number of balls to be added is appropriate, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of balls to be added when it is appropriate. The number of game balls is compared with the number of game balls transmitted from the P unit 2F to determine whether or not the number of game balls transmitted is appropriate, but it is simply transmitted from the P unit 2F. The number of game balls may be compared with the number of game balls stored in the CU3F, and the suitability may be determined.

  Further, the CU 3F stores the final number of game balls stored before the recovery process (hereinafter referred to as “CU game ball number”) and the number of game balls in the previous game table information received from the P unit 2F (hereinafter referred to as “P The number of game balls in the latest game table received from the P table 2F (hereinafter referred to as the “P game latest game ball number”) is compared and determined by the three parties. You may make it perform determination. As a specific example of comparison between the three players, the number of CU gaming balls and the number of previous P balls are compared and determined. If correct, the previous number of P balls and the number of latest P balls are compared and determined. To do. Alternatively, the number of CU game balls and the number of previous P game balls are compared and determined, and if they are correct, the number of CU game balls and the latest number of P game balls are compared and determined. Furthermore, the P number of the previous game balls and the P number of the latest game balls are compared and determined first, and if they are correct, the CU game ball number and the P number of previous game balls are compared and determined. The latest number of game balls is compared and determined.

  The first check process to the third check process are preferably executed when the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is not exchanged (replaced). When exchange (replacement) is performed at the time of communication disconnection, the number of game balls on the CU side and the P stand side is generally greatly different in the recovery process. This is because an error is determined as a result of the check process to the third check process. Therefore, when the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is exchanged after the communication is cut off, the first check process to the third check process may be controlled not to be performed in the recovery process when the communication is restored. Specifically, when the difference between the last last transmission sequence number transmitted from the P unit 2F as a recovery response and the last latest transmission sequence number stored in the CU control unit 323F is 2 or more, the CU 3F or the P unit 2F The CU control unit 323F determines that it has been replaced, and controls so that the CU control unit 323F does not perform the first check process to the third check process.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is exchanged, control may be performed so that the previous game stand data and the current play stand data are not checked at the CU 3F side at the time of recovery. In this way, it is possible to prevent annoyance in which a check abnormality determination due to replacement of the CU 3F or the P base 2F occurs.

<Operation related to request serial number>
Next, the serial number update method described in the communication sequence shown in FIGS. 40 to 65 is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this method. For example, a serial number update method as described below may be applied to the communication sequences shown in FIGS.

<< Update both serial number and requested serial number >>
FIG. 68 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2F and the CU 3F related to the request sequence numbers. One of the A device and the B device shown in FIG. 68 is a P stand 2F, and the other is a CU3F. A device that generates a request to the other party is an A device, and a device that receives a request from the A device is a B device.

  When A device is CU3F and B device is P stand 2F, the request sequence number is an addition sequence number, and the request is a game ball addition request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  When the A device is the P stand 2F and the B device is the CU3F, the request sequence number is a count sequence number, and the request is a game ball count request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  Here, both cases will be conceptualized and described. While there is no request for the B device, the A device transmits a message in which the request serial number m is not updated as shown in (1). However, the normal serial number n is updated every time a message is transmitted. The device B receives this and returns a message as shown in (2). In this message, the normal serial number is updated to n + 1. However, the request sequence number is not updated as m.

  While the request is not generated in the device A, as shown in (1) and (2), both of them transmit a message while updating the normal serial number. During this time, it is determined whether or not the message transmitted immediately before has reached the partner by looking at the normal serial number included in the message received from the partner.

  When a request is generated in the A device, the A device updates the request sequence number to m + 1, and transmits a request message including the updated request sequence number m + 1 to the B device as shown in (3). At this time, the normal serial number is also updated to n + 2. The request message includes data in which the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) is turned ON.

  The B device that has received the request message including the request sequence number m + 1 determines whether or not to accept the request. For example, if it is a counting request, it is determined whether or not the process of adding balls is possible on the CU3F side. Or if it is an addition request | requirement, it will be determined whether the process which adds a game ball in the P stand 2F side is possible. The case where the addition processing of the holding balls is not possible is, for example, the case where the processing using the holding balls (such as a wagon service) is in progress. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached the predetermined upper limit value.

  When accepting the request, as described above in (4), an acknowledgment message with the request serial number updated to m + 2 is transmitted to the A device. On the other hand, when rejecting the request, as described below in (4), a rejection message (also referred to as a rejection message; the same applies hereinafter) that has not been updated with the request sequence number being m + 1 is sent to the A device. Send. The normal serial number is updated to n + 3 in any case.

  The A device includes storage means for storing the request sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. The device A that has received the message (4) compares and determines the request sequence number stored in the storage means and the request sequence number included in the message (4). As a result, if the stored request sequence number is the same as the request sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected. On the other hand, if the value obtained by adding a predetermined number (1 in this example) to the stored request sequence number and the request sequence number included in the transmitted message are the same (m + 2 in this example) (in other words, If the request sequence number that has been transmitted is advanced by one), it is determined that the request has been accepted. If it is determined that the request has been accepted, the request sequence number is further updated by one, and a message including a specific request value (the number of counting balls or the number of additional balls) is transmitted to the B device. On the other hand, when it is determined that the request has been rejected, a message including the received request sequence number is transmitted to the B device.

  FIG. 68 (3) 'shows a case where the request message of (3) does not reach the device B due to noise or other factors. In this case, the device B determines that there is no response when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 200 ms) has elapsed since the transmission of the message (2), and retransmits the message (2). As a result, the message (2) arrives at the A device that transmitted (3) '. Then, although the device A has transmitted the request message of the request sequence number m + 1, the request sequence number of the reply message to this does not correspond to either request acceptance or request rejection (from the request sequence number included in the request message). Since the request serial number is delayed), it is determined that the request message has not arrived. Such a determination can also be made using a normal serial number. That is, the normal sequence number included in the request sequence number is n + 3, whereas the normal sequence number included in the reply message is n + 2, and it can be determined that the request message has not been reached based on such a situation.

  When it is determined that the request message has not arrived, the device A retransmits the request message (3).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request serial number is included in a message and transmitted separately from a normal serial number. The request sequence number is updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and the update is stopped when the request operation ends or when the request is rejected. In other periods, the message is not updated even if a message is transmitted / received.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is exchanged regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is updated only on one of the A device and the B device, The other may perform the operation of returning the serial number received from the other party as it is.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, it is possible to determine whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but the received message is an acceptance message indicating the request acceptance. Or a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, when the request sequence number is used as in this embodiment, not only whether the requested request message has arrived at the other party, but also the message returned from the other party is accepted by the request sequence number. It is possible to specify whether it is a message or a rejection message. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. Or a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

<< Update only one of serial number and requested serial number >>
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the operations of the P base 2F and the CU 3F regarding the normal serial number and the requested serial number. This modification is different from the example shown in FIG. 68 in that the normal sequence number is not updated when the requested sequence number is updated.

  That is, in this modified example, when a request is not generated between the normal serial number and the request serial number, only the normal serial number is updated and the message is exchanged. However, when a request occurs, the normal sequence number update is stopped and only the requested sequence number is updated. Thereafter, when a series of processing for the request ends or when a rejection message for the request is transmitted, the update of the request sequence number is stopped, and the update of the normal sequence number is started instead.

  For this reason, in the exchange of messages before the occurrence of the request shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 69, the normal sequence number is updated to n and n + 1, while the request sequence number m is not updated. However, in the request message (3) transmitted when a request is generated, the normal sequence number remains n + 1 and is not updated, while the request sequence number is updated to m + 1. Similarly, neither the acceptance message nor the rejection message (4) for the request message is updated with the normal serial number kept at n + 1.

  Even in this case, the device A that has received the message (4) can determine whether the message is an acceptance message or a rejection message by determining the request sequence number included in the message.

  In addition, as shown in (3) ′, even when the request message does not reach the B device and the message (2) is retransmitted from the B device, the A device receives the request message based on the request sequence number. You can determine that you did not.

  As in this modification, even if the update of the normal sequence number is stopped from when the request occurs until the processing for the request is completed, there is no problem because the request sequence number takes over the function of the normal sequence number during that time. Does not occur. In addition, there is also an effect that processing for updating the normal serial number or collating the normal serial number is unnecessary during that time.

<When recovery information is registered (updated) and deleted (cleared)>
In the abnormal sequence shown in FIGS. 52 to 62, the sequence for executing the recovery process using the recovery information stored in the P stand 2F or the CU 3F to restore the system has been described. The recovery information used in this recovery process includes, for example, “last last transmission sequence number”, “previous last transmission addition sequence number”, “previous last transmission count sequence number”, “count required number of balls”, “card ID”, “card insertion” There are “time”, “store code”, “SC board ID”, “game ball information”, “game information”, “game ball number”, “ball unit price”, and the like.

  The timing (trigger) at which these recovery information is newly registered or updated and stored in the P stand 2F or CU 3F differs depending on the information. FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the trigger for recovery information registration (update) and deletion (clear). With reference to FIG. 70, the timing (trigger) of registration or update of each recovery information will be described. The “previous last transmission serial number” is newly registered or updated when the P platform 2F transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3F (when the status information response is transmitted). “Previous last transmission addition serial number” is CU state Bit3 = “1” (at the time of game ball addition request) included in the state information request command transmitted from CU3F, and P unit 2F sends a response of the state information response to CU3F. Is newly registered or updated when it is transmitted (when the status information response is transmitted).

  “Previous Last Transmission Count Sequence Number” and “Count Requested Number of Balls” are those corresponding to Bit 4 = “1” (when counting is requested) of the gaming machine state 1 included in the response of the state information response transmitted by the P machine 2F to the CU 3F. It is newly registered or updated when the response of the status information response is transmitted to the CU 3F (when the status information response is transmitted). The “card ID” and “card insertion time” are newly registered or updated when the P base 2F transmits a card insertion response response to the CU 3F (at the time of card insertion response transmission).

  "Store code" and "SC board ID" are when the P base 2F transmits a card insertion response response to the CU 3F (when the card insertion response is transmitted) or when the P base 2F receives a counting history request command from the CU 3F. Newly registered or updated (when counting history is requested). The “game ball information”, “game information”, “game ball number” and “ball unit price” are newly registered or registered when the P stand 2F transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3F (when the status information response is transmitted). Updated.

  Next, the timing (trigger) of erasing (clearing) each recovery information will be described with reference to FIG. “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number”, “Previous Last Transmission Count Sequence Number”, and “Count Requested Number of Balls” are the values when the P base 2F transmits a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F (at the time of communication start response transmission) or the P base 2F. Information is erased when an instruction to clear the provided RAM is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction). The “last previous transmission addition serial number” is erased when an instruction to clear the RAM provided on the P base 2F is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction).

  "Card ID" and "Card insertion time" are when the P base 2F transmits a card return response response to the CU 3F (when the card return response is transmitted) or when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2F is made Information is deleted at the time of RAM clear instruction. The “card ID” and “card insertion time” are when the P stand 2F detects a store code mismatch and transmits a communication start response response to the CU 3F (when a communication start response is transmitted when a store mismatch is detected). The information is deleted.

  The “store code” and “SC board ID” are erased when an instruction to clear the RAM provided on the P base 2F is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction). The “game ball information” and “game information” are used when the P base 2F transmits a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F (when the communication start response is transmitted) or when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2F is given. Information is deleted at the time of RAM clear instruction. The “game ball number” and “ball unit price” are deleted when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P stand 2F is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction).

<Encryption key used for communication between key management server and communication control IC>
Next, an encryption key used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an encryption key used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325aF. First, encryption keys used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325aF mainly include a board shipment key, a board initial key, a board authentication key, a main authentication key, a temporary authentication key, and an effective key (commercial). , Communication key 1 (session key) and communication key 2 (session key). The board shipment key is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, and is used only for encryption of a communication test message before shipment. The board initial key is used for communication of the CU control unit-SC, and is received by the CU control unit 323F at the first communication with the hall server, and is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. Authentication communication (substrate initial key mode) using the substrate initial key is permitted (timed operation) only for a limited period. Here, in the board initial key mode, as described above, it is necessary to communicate normally with the hall server at least once to acquire the board initial key, and thus security is ensured.

  Here, the “limited period” is a limited period of two days, for example. In this way, by enabling timed operation, even if the key cannot be exchanged with the key management server immediately after the system is installed in the hall, the hall will start operating immediately after the system is installed. It becomes possible. In addition, as a limited period, you may set the period defined in one day, for example to every morning from 9:00 to 17:00.

  The above-described board initial key mode has a restriction that enables authentication communication using the board initial key for a limited period of time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of money that can be used ( Card balance or cash) may be limited. Alternatively, when the number of symbol variations in the variable display device reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. Alternatively, when the cumulative number of jackpots reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. In addition, it may be possible to allow only a game by inserting cash and prevent a game using the remaining card amount, or to limit the game to a game using a holding ball.

  The board authentication key is an encryption key that is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC and is received as part of the board security information from the key management server. By performing authentication communication using the board authentication key, the communication mode (board authentication key mode) is switched from the timed operation using the board initial key to the permanent operation (normal operation). This board authentication key is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit and the RAM of the SC.

  For both the timed operation using the board initial key and the permanent operation using the board authentication key, the CU control unit 323F receives the valid key stored in the hall server, and the SC 325bF receives the valid key as the communication control IC 325aF. This is realized by enabling communication between the P platform and the CU.

  This authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, is generated by the SC 325bF from the update information received from the key management server, and is stored in the RAM of the SC 325bF. The communication control IC 325aF is also similar to the SC 325bF. Are generated from the update information and stored in the RAM of the communication control IC 325aF. Note that this authentication key may be acquired from a key management server or the like. Further, the CU control unit 323F and the communication control IC 325aF may generate themselves without receiving update information from a key management server or the like. In addition, the CU control unit 323F and the communication control IC 325aF themselves generate predetermined second data by acquiring predetermined first data from a key management server or the like, and the authentication key is obtained from the first data and the second data. You may make it produce | generate.

  The temporary authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and until the authentication key is generated (or until the set allowable time (for example, two days) elapses), the SC 325bF Used for encryption communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The encrypted communication using the temporary authentication key (temporary authentication key mode) is allowed (timed operation) only for a limited period (for example, 2 days). The SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF store temporary authentication keys in their respective ROMs from the manufacturing stage. The valid key (commercial) is a key that is received by the SC 325bF via the CU control unit 323F and transmitted (set) to the communication control IC 325aF during the initial communication with the hall server. Communication with P devices becomes possible by setting the effective key. The valid key is data for activating the communication control IC 325aF. In other words, the valid key is permission information for permitting communication between the CU and the P platform.

  The communication key 1 (session key) is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, is used for business message communication for anti-game machines, and is created every business day by the SC 325bF using some variable. For example, a counter value (random number) or date / time information may be used as the variable. The communication key 2 (session key) is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and is used for business message communication for gaming machines.

  Note that even if the key described above has a configuration in which the key data is embedded in each part as it is, the information for generating the key data is stored in each part. The key data may be generated by using the key.

  Next, a method for acquiring an encryption key and a method for performing encrypted communication using the acquired encryption key will be described. First, the SC 325bF obtains an effective key via the CU control unit 323F at the first communication with the hall server. The SC 325bF transmits (sets) the acquired effective key to the communication control IC 325aF, thereby enabling communication with the P units. The CU control unit 323F receives the board initial key at the first communication with the hall server, and is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. The SC 325bF performs cryptographic authentication with the CU control unit 323F using the acquired board initial key, and performs cryptographic communication with the CU control unit 323F in a timely manner using the board initial key. Further, the hall server that has received the connection request sent from the CU control unit 323F when the power is turned on returns a unified store code for identifying the game arcade where the hall server is installed to the CU control unit 323F. Specifically, the unified store code is transmitted from the input / output interface of the hall server to the CU control unit 323F according to the control of the CPU of the hall server.

  On the other hand, authentication is performed between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using the board manufacturer code stored as the initial information in both. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325F. A board connection request and a board connection response are exchanged on the condition that the authentication using the board manufacturer code is successful (see FIG. 77). The unified store code is included in the board connection request transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF, and the SC 325bF acquires the unified store code by receiving the board connection request.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F requests the board security information from the key management server and receives the board security information transmitted from the key management server via the hall server, so that the board security information is included in the board security information. Get the board authentication key. The CU control unit performs cryptographic authentication with the SC using the acquired board authentication key, and performs cryptographic communication with the SC using the board authentication key. Note that the CU control unit 323F does not change the key from the board initial key to the board authentication key immediately after obtaining the board authentication key, but on the condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state as described later. Change the key.

  The board authentication key may be generated by the CU control unit 323F itself instead of being acquired from the key management server or the like, and the CU control unit 323F acquires the first predetermined data from the key management server or the like. Predetermined second data may be generated, and a board authentication key may be generated from the first data and the second data.

  Next, the SC 325bF performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF using the stored temporary authentication key. Then, the SC decrypts the update information acquired from the key management server by performing cryptographic communication with the CU control unit using the board authentication key, and inquires about the board inquiry number. If the inquiry board inquiry numbers match, the SC generates a main authentication key from the update information, and performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF using the generated main authentication key. The authentication key is not stored in the communication control IC 325aF from the time of shipment, and is generated from the update information as in the SC325bF.

  Next, the SC notifies the CU control unit of the communication key 1 and performs communication with the CU control unit using the communication key 1 so that business message communication with the gaming machine is possible. It becomes. In addition, the SC sets an effective key for the communication control IC, thereby receiving a notification of the communication key 2 from the communication control IC and performing communication with the communication control IC thereafter using the communication key 2. As a result, business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU control unit and the SC>
Next, communication within the CU3F shown in FIG. 38 will be described. In particular, communication between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b of the security board 325F will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 72 and FIG. 73, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b will be described.

  72 and 73 show the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named board connection request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board connection request command requests the SC 325bF to connect to a gaming machine (P unit 2F). A response named “substrate connection response” is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response to the board connection response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of a response to the board connection request.

  A board shipment key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board shipping key request command is for requesting the board shipping key from the SC 325bF. A board shipment key response response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipment key response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipment key.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325F, and is stored in the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. The command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 is for requesting the board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325bF. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board maker code authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board maker code authentication information.

  The board serial ID authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 is a request for the board serial ID authentication to the SC 325bF. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  The board serial ID authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 requests the board 325bF to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board initial key. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the board initial key authentication result.

  A command of the board initial key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The board initial key authentication request 2 command requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board initial key. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the board initial key authentication result.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board authentication key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board authentication key. A response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  The board shipment key authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 1 is for requesting the board 325bF to authenticate the board shipping key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipping key authentication result.

  The board shipment key authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 2 is for requesting the board 325bF to authenticate the board shipping key. A response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipping key authentication result.

  A version information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This version information notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the version of the board authentication key. A version information response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the version information response notifies the CU control unit 323F that the version information has been received.

  A board authentication result notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. A response of the board authentication result response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication result response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  A security board inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This security board inquiry instruction notification command requests security board inquiry information from the SC 325bF. A response of the security board inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323F of the security board inquiry information.

  A security board information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This security board information notification command notifies the security board information to the SC 325bF. A response of the security board information result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board information result notifies the CU control unit 323F that the security board information has been received.

  A counter information request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This counter information request command requests counter information from the SC 325bF. A response of the counter information response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the counter information response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the counter information.

  A communication key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This communication key request command requests the SC325bF for a communication key. A response of the communication key response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the communication key response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the communication key.

  A gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command requests gaming machine chip inquiry information from the SC 325bF. A response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323F of gaming machine chip inquiry information.

  A gaming machine chip information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This gaming machine chip information notification command notifies the game result of gaming machine chip information to SC325bF. A response of the gaming machine chip information result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response to the gaming machine chip information result notifies the CU control unit 323F that the gaming machine chip verification result has been received. The notification result included in the response of the gaming machine chip information result is a gaming machine chip information notification result by combining the matching result of the main control chip and the payout control chip. Therefore, if the gaming machine chip information notification result is “0x00”, the verification result of the main control chip is OK and the checkout result of the payout control chip is also OK, and if it is “0x01”, the verification result of the main control chip is “OK” indicates that the check result of the payout control chip is not acquired, and “0x02” indicates that the check result of the main control chip is not acquired and the check result of the payout control chip is OK, and “0x03” In this case, the verification result of the main control chip is not acquired, and the payout control chip is not acquired. In addition, when the gaming machine chip information notification result is “0x04”, the verification result of the main control chip is OK and the verification result of the payout control chip is NG, and when “0x05”, the verification result of the main control chip is NG indicates that the check result of the payout control chip is OK. When “0x07”, the check result of the main control chip is NG, and the check result of the payout control chip has not been acquired. When “0x08” This indicates that the collation result of the main control chip is not acquired and the collation result of the payout control chip is NG. In this way, the gaming machine chip information notification result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as information that individually represents the verification results of the main control chip and the payout control chip. In this way, since the respective verification results of the main control chip and the payout control chip acquired from the key management server 800F are output as information individually representing, it is easy to determine which control means has not been verified. Can do.

  A substrate state request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board status request command requests the board status to the SC 325bF. A response of the substrate state response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the substrate state response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the substrate state.

<Main sequence in communication between CU control unit and SC>
Next, processing executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323F and processing executed by the security chip (SC) 325b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 74, a process for starting up the CU control unit 323F when the power is turned on and the hall is installed will be described. FIG. 74 shows a sequence when the power supply is first turned on after the CU3F is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a startup sequence at the time of hall installation using the board initial key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. When the power is first turned on when the CU 3F is installed in the amusement hall, the CU control unit 323F receives the board initial key A and the board initial key A message authentication code (specifically, from the hall server) (from the hall server). For example, a valid key (for commercial / P shipment) such as a MAC key is also acquired. Here, the board initial key A is an encryption key that is downloaded from the hall server and stored in the CU control unit 323F when first communicating with the host device after being delivered to the amusement hall, and is installed in the key management center. This is an encryption key used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF until the board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) stored in the key management server is acquired. The board initial key A is decrypted using the board manufacturer code, while the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board manufacturer code. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method in accordance with an encryption method such as DES (Data Encryption Standard), AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), or IDEA (International Data Encryption Algorithm).

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board initial key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU controllers 323F and SC325bF use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform the board initial key authentication sequence, and authenticate when the board initial key authentication is completed. It becomes. Detailed processing of the board initial key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a security substrate information inquiry sequence, and acquire OK when the security substrate information can be acquired. The security board information is acquired from the key management server of the key management center, and includes a board serial ID, a board authentication key, and the like. Details of the security board information inquiry sequence will be described later. The board authentication key is an encryption key that is downloaded from a key management server installed in the key management center and used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. The key management server stores the board authentication key in association with the board serial number or the like.

  When the security board information can be acquired by the security board information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and exchange communication keys for business message communication.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. In the communication key exchange sequence, the substrate authentication key is used as the encryption key when the substrate information can be acquired in the substrate information acquisition sequence. However, when the substrate information cannot be acquired, the substrate initial key is used as the encryption key for a limited time. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board information request command to the SC 325bF to request the state of the security board and the gaming machine from the SC 325bF. The SC 325bF returns a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation possible to the CU control unit 323F. When the security board cannot be operated, the CU control unit 323F performs processing corresponding to each board state. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the communication key exchange sequence when receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable). That is, when the SC 325bF determines that the communication key has not been generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323F. .

  The CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence when receiving a response of the board state response including the board state = P chip inquiry request (unusable). That is, if the SC 325bF determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number cannot be normally acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state = P chip inquiry request (not operable) is included. The response of the substrate state response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  The CU control unit 323F repeatedly transmits a substrate state request to the SC 325bF when receiving a response of a substrate state response including a substrate state = impossible operation. In other words, when the SC 325bF determines that it is not normal other than the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = inoperable to the CU control unit 323F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. The business message communication with the gaming machine is operated using a communication key (session key). The communication at this time is time-limited communication as described above, and is allowed only for a certain period (for example, 2 days). The communication mode performed through the above processing is the restricted communication mode (substrate initial key mode (substrate initial key operation)). If a certain period of time (for example, 2 days) is exceeded in this timed operation, the temporary operation is stopped and the overage is notified from the SC 325bF to the key management server via the CU control unit 323F and the hall server. The

  Thereafter, the CU 3F makes a recovery request to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F sends a response (recovery response) of the recovery response including the previous last transmission serial number, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time to the CU 3F. Send back.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the power-on / normal startup processing of the CU control unit 323F will be described. FIG. 75 shows a sequence when the power is normally turned on after the CU 3F is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a startup sequence using the board authentication key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. When the power is first turned on when the CU3F is first installed in the amusement hall, the CU control unit 323F receives a board serial ID key, a board from the host device (specifically, from the key management server via the hall server). The MAC key of the authentication key version, the board authentication key A, and the board authentication key A is acquired. The board serial ID key is decrypted using the board initial key, the board initial key A is decrypted using the board serial ID, and the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board serial ID. Is done. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method according to an encryption method such as DES, AES, IDEA or the like.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board authentication key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Detailed processing of the board authentication key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform a security board information inquiry sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key only when the key is updated.

  The SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF when the board authentication key can be authenticated by the board authentication key authentication sequence and there is no key update, or when there is a key update and authentication can be performed by the security board information inquiry sequence. .

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board authentication key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF further acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board information request command to the SC 325bF to request the state of the security board and the gaming machine from the SC 325bF. The SC 325bF returns a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation possible to the CU control unit 323F. When the security board cannot be operated, the CU control unit 323F performs processing corresponding to each board state. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the communication key exchange sequence when receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable). That is, when the SC 325bF determines that the communication key has not been generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323F. .

  The CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence when receiving a response of the board state response including the board state = P chip inquiry request (unusable). That is, if the SC 325bF determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number cannot be normally acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state = P chip inquiry request (not operable) is included. The response of the substrate state response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  The CU control unit 323F repeatedly transmits a substrate state request to the SC 325bF when receiving a response of a substrate state response including a substrate state = impossible operation. In other words, when the SC 325bF determines that it is not normal other than the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = inoperable to the CU control unit 323F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. Communication at this time is a normal communication mode (board authentication key mode (board authentication key operation)) without restriction as in the restricted communication mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, processing for turning on the power of the CU control unit 323F and starting up at the time of factory shipment will be described. FIG. 76 shows a sequence at the time of factory shipment before the CU 3F is shipped to the amusement hall, and in particular, a factory shipment start-up sequence using a board shipment key will be described. This sequence is processing in the CU control units 323F and SC325bF that are not connected to the host device at the time of factory shipment.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. The CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board initial key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the substrate manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key as the encryption key and perform the substrate initial key authentication sequence. However, since the CU3F is not yet installed in the amusement hall at the factory shipping stage, the CU control unit 323F cannot obtain the board initial key from the hall server of the amusement hall. The result is NG.

  Thereafter, since the board initial key authentication sequence is authentication NG, the CU controller 323F sends a board shipping key request command to the SC 325bF to request the board shipping key used for the security board 325F test. Send to. After receiving the board shipment key request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF transmits a board shipment key response response including the board shipment key to the CU control unit 323F.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform a substrate shipping key authentication sequence using the substrate shipping key acquired from the SC325bF as an encryption key. Detailed processing of the board shipping key authentication sequence will be described later.

  When the board shipping key can be authenticated by the board shipping key authentication sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board shipment key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F makes a communication test request to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F transmits a communication test response to the CU 3F.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board information request command to the SC 325bF to request the state of the security board and the gaming machine from the SC 325bF. The SC 325bF returns a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation possible to the CU control unit 323F. When the security board cannot be operated, the CU control unit 323F performs processing corresponding to each board state. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the communication key exchange sequence when receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable). That is, when the SC 325bF determines that the communication key has not been generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323F. .

  The CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence when receiving a response of the board state response including the board state = P chip inquiry request (unusable). That is, if the SC 325bF determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number cannot be normally acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state = P chip inquiry request (not operable) is included. The response of the substrate state response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  The CU control unit 323F repeatedly transmits a substrate state request to the SC 325bF when receiving a response of a substrate state response including a substrate state = impossible operation. In other words, when the SC 325bF determines that it is not normal other than the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = inoperable to the CU control unit 323F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF can communicate with the gaming machine only by the communication test message. By performing communication of this communication test message, a communication test at the time of factory shipment is performed. The first power-on sequence when the CU3F that has passed the factory communication test is delivered to the amusement hall is the hall installation sequence described with reference to FIG. 74, and is then executed after obtaining the board authentication key. The sequence is the normal startup sequence described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, processing of the board manufacturer code authentication sequence will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command for requesting board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325bF. Since the board manufacturer code authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests a challenge code from the SC 325bF.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 generates a challenge code based on the board manufacturer code, and notifies the CU control unit 323F of the generated challenge code as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1.

  Upon receiving the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 command, the CU control unit 323F generates a response code based on the challenge code, and notifies the generated response code to the SC 325bF using the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command. Specifically, the response code is generated by encrypting the challenge code received using the board manufacturer code as a key.

  The SC 325bF that received the command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, if the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board manufacturer code as a key), the challenge code matches. Assume that the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board manufacturer code authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  On the other hand, if the challenge codes do not match, the check result is NG (inappropriate). In that case, the authentication is repeated n times, and SC325bF becomes a no-response state (HALT) in the case of NG continuously n times, and the board authentication key and the main authentication key are cleared. After entering the no-response state (HALT), the SC 325bF does not authenticate with the communication control IC 325aF, and repairs are performed at the factory.

  The CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the CU control unit specific information (unified store code, unit number, current time), and transmits a board connection request command for requesting connection with the gaming machine.

  After receiving the board connection request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF holds the information on the unified store code, the bedtime, and the current time. When the previous unified store code matches, the CU control unit 323F A response of the board connection response notifying that the connection request has been accepted (OK) is returned.

  On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the previous unified store code, a response of the substrate connection response notifying that the connection request is not accepted (NG) is returned to the CU control unit 323F, and the substrate stored in the RAM In addition to clearing the authentication key, a transition is made to a substrate initial key mode (see FIG. 74), which is a mode for proceeding with the substrate initial key as an encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board connection request result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, processing of the authentication sequence of the board initial key or board shipping key will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 78, in the state of the board initial key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with the board initial key as an encryption key, authentication using the board initial key is performed in FIG. In the case of the board shipping key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with the key as an encryption key, authentication using the board shipping key is performed in FIG. Therefore, “/” in FIG. 78 is a symbol representing either one. The CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key for the SC 325bF, calculates an algorithm (for example, an H-MAC algorithm using a hash function) with the MAC key, A board initial key / board shipment key authentication request 1 command requesting authentication information is transmitted. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board initial key / board shipping key as the encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 command decrypts the random number of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key and transmits the H-MAC with the MAC key to the CU control unit 323F. It calculates and returns with the response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the board initial key / board shipping key authentication response 1 command decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and requests the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request to the SC 325bF. Send with command 2. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board initial key or the board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key to the CU control unit 323F. To do. Then, the SC 325bF returns the authentication result as a response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board initial key authentication result and a board shipping key authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, processing of the authentication sequence of the board serial ID and the board authentication key will be described.

  First, the communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF is in the state of the board authentication key mode in which the process proceeds with the board authentication key as an encryption key. The CU control unit 323F authenticates the board serial ID to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting is sent. Since the board serial ID authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests a challenge code from the SC 325bF.

  Upon receiving the board serial ID authentication request 1 command, the SC 325bF generates a challenge code based on the board serial ID, and notifies the CU control unit 323F of the generated challenge code as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication response 1 generates a response code based on the challenge code (specifically, generates a response code by encrypting the challenge code using the board serial ID as a key) The generated response code is notified to SC325bF by the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board serial ID as a key), and the challenge code matches. If the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 2. When the check result is NG, the SC 325bF includes the check result in the authentication result in the board authentication result notification and the board authentication result response to the CU control unit 323F, and notifies the NG. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board serial ID authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a version information notification command to the SC 325bF in order to notify the version information of the board authentication key. Note that the version information notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the version information notification command returns a response of the version information response to notify the CU control unit 323F that the version information of the board authentication key has been received. Note that the response of the version information response is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using a board authentication key as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and issues a command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 for requesting the authentication information to the SC 325bF. Send. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is encrypted with the board authentication key, but may be encrypted using the board initial key or the board shipping key as the encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 decrypts the random number of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and performs the board authentication key authentication with respect to the CU control unit 323F. Reply with response 1 response.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication response 1 decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and transmits it to the SC 325bF with the command of the board authentication key authentication request 2. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the board authentication key authentication request 2 command, the SC 325bF decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC to verify the board authentication key to the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF returns the authentication result as a response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323F.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board authentication result notification command to the SC 325bF in order to notify the board authentication result. The board authentication result notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. The board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result.

  The SC 325bF that has received the board authentication result notification command transmits a board authentication result response command to the CU control unit 323F in order to notify the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result. The board authentication result response command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining processing in the case of inquiring about security board information. Referring to FIG. 80, first, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information for inquiring of the host apparatus. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the board serial number as the encryption key, and the key that cannot be decrypted by the CU control unit 323F and the hall server (hereinafter referred to as the key). The query information is encrypted with a “secret key”. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the security board information, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication process, gaming machine chip information authentication process, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.), and necessary processing is performed when security board information is received.

  Thereafter, when receiving the inquiry result of the security board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the security board information to the SC 325bF. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board information notification command including the board serial ID and the board authentication key, which is the inquiry result, to the SC 325bF. Note that the security board information notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the security board information notification command, the SC 325bF confirms the inquiry number and sends a response of the security board information result to notify the CU control unit 323F that the security board information notification command has been normally received. Send back. The key update information is used at the next reset. The response of the security board information result to be returned does not need to be encrypted. However, in the case of encryption, a board initial key or a board authentication key is used as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, when the reception result is OK, the CU control unit 323F stores the board serial ID key and the board authentication key A and uses them as authentication key information at the next reset. Further, the CU control unit 323F acquires the authentication log information of the board information inquiry and board information notification.

Next, the processing of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described with reference to FIG.
First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command for inquiring gaming machine chip information to the SC 325bF. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted does not have to be encrypted, but when encrypted, a communication key is used as the encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC. After that, the SC 325bF that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command has completed the acquisition of the gaming machine chip information, so the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result including the information of gaming machine chip inquiry result = OK is CU controlled. Reply to part 323F. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip ID, a payout control chip ID, and the like. Note that the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result is that the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted with the secret key, and other information is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After that, when receiving the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result, the CU control unit 323F includes the main control chip number and the payout control chip number in the host device (key management server or hall server: see FIG. 71). Queries gaming machine chip information and waits for a response from the host device. During the gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF execute the processing of the next step (business message processing with the gaming machine) without receiving a response from the host device. Since it takes time (for example, about 2 hours) to inquire about gaming machine chip information, the operation of the gaming machine cannot be stopped during that time, so the next step processing is not performed without a response from the host device. (Business message processing with game machine) is executed. It should be noted that during the gaming machine chip information inquiry, even if a reset operation (for example, operation of a reset button (not shown) or power-on, etc.) is performed, the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification request is not issued again.

  After that, when receiving the matching result of the gaming machine chip information from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the matching result. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip information notification command including a matching result to the SC 325bF. Note that the gaming machine chip verification result notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the gaming machine chip information notification command, the SC 325bF returns a gaming machine chip information result response to notify the CU control unit 323F of the gaming machine manufacturer code and model code when the collation result is OK. Note that the response of the gaming machine chip information result to be returned is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  At the same time, the CU control unit 323F acquires an authentication log such as a gaming machine chip information inquiry and a gaming machine chip information matching result included in the gaming machine chip information result from the SC 325bF.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, processing of the sequence of board authentication key authentication abnormality will be described.
First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board authentication key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Here, when the board authentication key authentication becomes authentication NG, the SC 325bF clears the board authentication key information as an authentication abnormality.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a substrate initial key authentication sequence. At this time, the communication of the board initial key authentication sequence is encrypted using the board initial key as the encryption key.

  When the authentication of this board initial key authentication sequence is OK, the security board information inquiry sequence, the communication key exchange sequence, the gaming machine chip information inquiry is thereafter performed in the same manner as the hall installation start-up sequence shown in FIG. Processing such as a sequence is performed, and business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible. The subsequent communication is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  Note that the SC 325bF notifies the key management server 800F of a “board authentication key update error” alarm indicating that the authentication of the board authentication key sequence is authentication NG.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining communication line disconnection (PIF) sequence processing. 83 is a case where the communication line between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F via the PIF circuit 326F (see FIG. 39) is disconnected.

  First, the P base 2F and the CU 3F are communicating via the PIF circuit 326F. At this time, the P platform 2F and the CU 3F encrypt information to be communicated using a communication key. Thereafter, communication line disconnection between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F occurs. The CU control unit 323F transmits a status information request command to the SC 325bF. However, since the communication line between the P unit 2F and the CU 3F has been disconnected, a response of the status information response to the status information request is returned from the SC 325bF. Never happen. When communication in which the response of the status information response to the status information request is not returned is continued n times, the CU control unit 323F sends a board status request command requesting the status of the security board 325F and the P board 2F to the SC 325bF. Send. The board status request command to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the board status request command transmits a board status response response including the status information of the security board 325F and the P platform 2F to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the substrate state response to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key. Information included in the response of the board state response includes a board state, an error state, a fraud detection state, installation change information, fraud detection information, and the like. For example, when a communication line disconnection occurs in communication via the PIF circuit 326F, Bit0 = "1" (PIF line disconnection) in the error state included in the response of the board state response. When the store where the CU3F is installed is different, Bit2 = “1” (installation combination change detection) in the fraud detection state included in the response of the board state response. In addition, when connected to the P board 2F connected to the game board development jig or the development unit before connection, Bit3 = "1" (illegal gaming machine) of the fraud detection state included in the response of the board state response. Connection detection).

  As long as the communication line disconnection continues in the communication via the PIF circuit 326F, the transmission of the board status request command and the error status Bit0 = "1" (PIF line disconnection) in response to the board status request command. ) Is repeated between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  When the communication line between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F via the PIF circuit 326F is restored, the SC 325bF detects the restoration of the communication line, and in response to the transmitted board state request command, Bit 0 = " A response of the substrate state response including information of 0 ”(no PIF line disconnection) is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F connected from the communication control IC 325aF. Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. The detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence is as described above.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board information request command to the SC 325bF to request the state of the security board and the gaming machine from the SC 325bF. The SC 325bF returns a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation possible to the CU control unit 323F. When the security board cannot be operated, the CU control unit 323F performs processing corresponding to each board state. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the communication key exchange sequence when receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable). That is, when the SC 325bF determines that the communication key has not been generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323F. .

  The CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence when receiving a response of the board state response including the board state = P chip inquiry request (unusable). That is, if the SC 325bF determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number cannot be normally acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state = P chip inquiry request (not operable) is included. The response of the substrate state response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  The CU control unit 323F repeatedly transmits a substrate state request to the SC 325bF when receiving a response of a substrate state response including a substrate state = impossible operation. In other words, when the SC 325bF determines that it is not normal other than the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = inoperable to the CU control unit 323F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. Communication at this time is a normal communication mode (board authentication key mode (board authentication key operation)) without restriction as in the restricted communication mode.

  Next, FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining processing of a security board information inquiry timeout sequence.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information for inquiring of the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key and the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the security board information, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication process, gaming machine chip information authentication process, gaming machine Business message processing etc.).

  After that, the CU control unit 323F, when receiving the security board information inquiry result (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, times out the waiting time for the security board information inquiry, A status information request command for requesting information regarding the status of 2F is transmitted. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the state information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325bF returns a status information response response to the CU 3F. At this time, the SC 325bF returns a status information response including “board inquiry present” indicating that the security board information is requested to the key management center.

  In response to the above-mentioned security board inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board status request command to the SC 325bF in order to request information to make an inquiry to the host device. The board status request command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the board status request command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). The response of the response is returned again to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the substrate status response to be returned is encrypted by using the substrate serial number as the encryption key and the substrate initial key or the substrate authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the board status response sends information (the board serial number and the inquiry) of the security board 325F to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Information) and wait for a response from the host device.

  Next, FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining processing of an inquiry (collation) timeout sequence for gaming machine chip information.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information (specifically, gaming machine chip information) for inquiring of the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC, and then the SC 325bF that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command inquires of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to notify the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information), a response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result (authentication OK) is returned to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result transmits the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the gaming machine chip information, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and perform the next step processing (for example, communication control IC authentication processing, security board information authentication processing, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.) and the processing necessary when the gaming machine chip information is received.

  However, after that, the CU control unit 323F determines that the waiting time for the gaming machine chip information inquiry has timed out before receiving the gaming machine chip information inquiry results (main control chip information and payout control chip information) from the host device. The CU 3F transmits a status information request command for requesting information on the status of the P platform 2F. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the status information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325bF returns a status information response response to the CU 3F. At this time, the SC 325bF returns a status information response including “chip information inquiry present” indicating that an inquiry to the key management center for gaming machine chip information is requested.

  In response to the above-mentioned gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to request the SC 325bF to make an inquiry to the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  Upon receiving the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command, the SC 325bF notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to do this, the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323F again. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result transmits the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and continue to wait for a response from the host device.

  Characteristic parts of the sequence between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85 will be described below.

  As a sequence executed after the CU3F is received and installed in the amusement hall, there is a “board initial key authentication sequence” (see FIG. 74). This "Board Initial Key Authentication Sequence" is obtained by downloading the board initial key from the host device (hall server) and authenticating using the board initial key when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall. Sequence. On the condition that the authentication result of this board initial key authentication sequence is OK, the “security board information inquiry sequence” is executed using this board initial key (see FIG. 74). The board authentication key is downloaded and stored from the host device (key management server) by this security board information inquiry sequence, and thereafter, various authentication sequences, communication key exchange sequences, etc. are executed using this board authentication key, and the communication key is obtained. Using this, business message communication with the gaming machine is executed (see FIG. 75).

  On the other hand, as a result of executing the security board information inquiry sequence (see FIG. 74) using the board initial key, the board authentication key may not be acquired. This board authentication key is sent to the key management server by the CU manufacturer when the CU manufacturer ships the CU3F to the game hall, and stored in the key management server. The board authentication key stored in advance in the key management server is downloaded and stored, but the transmission of the board authentication key from the CU manufacturer to the key management server may be delayed for some reason. In addition, when the CU3F installed in the amusement hall attempts to download the board authentication key by executing the security board information inquiry sequence, an unexpected situation occurs between the key management server and the CU3F and communication is impossible. May be offline. In such a case, the board authentication key cannot be downloaded.

  If the board authentication key cannot be downloaded and the actual operation such as business message communication with the gaming machine after that cannot be performed at all, operational problems such as a decrease in the operating rate at the amusement hall occur. Therefore, when such an unforeseen situation occurs, control is performed so that the temporary operation of the actual operation can be performed using the board initial key which is a temporary authentication key. Specifically, the communication key exchange sequence is executed using the board initial key acquired from the host device (specifically, the hall server), and the communication key (session key) is generated using the random number and the time data. Then, the communication key (session key) is shared between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF, and the business message communication is performed using the communication key (session key) to perform the actual operation control. The actual operation control using the communication key exchanged using the board initial key is allowed only for a certain period because the board initial key is a temporary key and the board authentication key cannot be obtained. Temporary operation is controlled. Specifically, actual operation control using this board initial key is allowed for only two days, and when the board authentication key cannot be obtained even at the time of power-up on the third day, the subsequent control is stopped, Control is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred and to notify the hall server or hall management computer that an abnormality has occurred. Note that the temporary operation time limit control that is allowed for a certain period (for example, two days) with the board initial key is that the board initial key is stored in the hall server. It is allowed in a state where it is guaranteed that it is connected to

  Further, the above-mentioned “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” is executed at the time of factory shipment shown in FIG. 78, that is, even at a stage where the board has not yet been carried into the game hall. When the board initial key authentication sequence is executed at this stage, since the board initial key has not yet been acquired, the result of execution of this board initial key authentication sequence using the board initial key is derived as the NG authentication result. The Then, each sequence after the board shipment key request and the board shipment key response shown in FIG. 78 is executed, and communication between the gaming machine and the communication test message is executed. In other words, it is determined by the “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” whether the substrate initial key has been acquired or not at the time of factory shipment. The sequence is also effectively used to determine whether the initial stage key has been acquired or whether the initial stage key has not been acquired.

<Communication between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F in the P stand 2F will be described in more detail. First, in the P stand 2F shown in FIG. 38, communication between the main control board 16F provided on the game board 26F and the payout control board 17F provided on the front frame 5F is performed by the main control provided on the main control board 16F. This is performed between the portion 161F and the payout control portion 171F provided on the front frame 5F. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram for explaining communication performed between the main controller 161F, the payout controller 171F, and the communication control IC.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F shown in FIG. 86 will be described below as being configured with one chip, but the same function may be configured with a plurality of chips. The main control unit 161F includes a main control circuit 161aF, a communication control circuit 161bF, and a main control storage unit 161cF. The main control circuit 161aF performs various processes in the main control unit 161F (for example, a process of counting winning balls based on a signal from the winning sensor 162F or detecting fraud based on a signal from the radio wave sensor 163F). Is a circuit for executing a control program for The communication control circuit 161bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The main control storage unit 161cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, and data to be executed by the main control unit 161F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) of a nonvolatile memory. . Note that since the main control storage unit 161cF includes FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 171F includes a payout control circuit 171aF, a communication control circuit 171bF, and a payout control storage unit 171cF. The payout control circuit 171aF includes a CPU that is an arithmetic processing function. The payout control unit 171F controls various processes (controls the firing motor 18F via the fire control board 31F, and controls the CU3F based on a signal from the counting button 28F. A circuit for executing a control program for requesting conversion from a game ball to a possession ball or the like and a user program stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF. The communication control circuit 171bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and cryptographic communication between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. The payout control storage unit 171cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, data, and the like to be executed by the payout control unit 171F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM that is a nonvolatile memory. Since the payout control storage unit 171cF includes the FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  The payout control unit 171F transmits / receives data to / from the communication control IC 325aF of the CU 3F via the communication control circuit 171bF. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F receives various commands as shown in FIG. 41 described above from the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F. The payout control unit 171F stores data included in various commands. These data are basically stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF configured by a RAM or the like. However, some of these data are preferably not stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF in which the user program or the like is stored from the viewpoint of security.

  Accordingly, the payout control unit 171F (the payout control circuit 171aF) pays out the data received by the communication control circuit 171bF without storing predetermined data related to security (security related information) in the payout control storage unit 171cF. The data is stored in a predetermined storage area in the control circuit 171aF. That is, the payout control circuit 171aF stores the security related information received by the communication control circuit 171bF in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF without notifying the user program. This user program is not a program predetermined by specifications such as a control program for controlling the basic operation of the CU3F, but a program that can be added at the development stage of the gaming machine. Therefore, security can be improved by not sending predetermined data to a user program that is relatively easy to access from the outside. Further, by not storing predetermined data in the payout control storage unit 171cF accessible from the outside, access to the predetermined data is prohibited and security is improved.

  For example, the security related information includes “count reception time” included in the status information request command, “store code” and “SC board ID” included in the card insertion notification command, and the like. The security-related information is not limited to this, and includes arbitrary predetermined data that is preferably not stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF from the viewpoint of security.

  Then, the payout control circuit 171aF updates or deletes the security related information stored in its own register when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the payout control circuit 171aF indicates that the “counting reception time” stored in the register is Bit4 = “1” in the gaming machine state 1 included in the response of the state information response transmitted from the P machine 2F to the CU3F. The count information is updated when the response of the status information response is transmitted to the CU3F (when the status information response is transmitted). The payout control circuit 171aF indicates the “count reception time” when the P base 2F transmits a communication start response response to the CU 3F (at the time of communication start response transmission) or a RAM (for example, a main control storage unit) provided in the P base 2F 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF, etc.) are erased when an instruction is given (when a RAM clear instruction is issued).

  Also, the payout control circuit 171aF displays the “store code” and “SC board ID” stored in the register when the P base 2F transmits a card insertion response response to the CU 3F (when the card insertion response is transmitted) or the P base When the 2F receives a counting history request command from the CU 3F (when counting history is requested), it is newly registered or updated. The payout control circuit 171aF deletes the “store code” and the “SC board ID” when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P table 2F is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction).

  As described above, the information of “count reception time”, “store code” and “SC board ID” is deleted or updated in the payout control circuit 171aF when the above conditions are satisfied, so that security can be ensured. it can.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 53, the “store code” is used in the counting history sequence when returning from the communication disabled state. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 53, the payout control circuit 171aF sends a count history request command including the serial number = n, the store code and the SC board ID to the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F via the communication control circuit 171bF. Receive from. In the payout control circuit 171aF, a “store code” transmitted from the CU3F by a card insertion notification command and stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF, and a “store code” transmitted from the CU3F by a count history request command. ". As a result of comparing these, the payout control circuit 171aF sets the stored count history 1 and count history 2 data in the response of the count history response so that it can be transmitted to the CU 3F. Then, the communication control circuit 171bF returns a response of the count history response including the serial number = n, the count history 1 and the count history 2 to the CU 3F (communication control IC 325aF). In this way, the communication control circuit 171bF can improve the accuracy of the recovery process by transmitting the past two count histories (count history 1 and count history 2) to the CU 3F (communication control IC 325aF). Note that the plurality of count histories transmitted from the communication control circuit 171bF to the CU 3F are not limited to the past two times, and may be count histories for the past three times or more.

  On the other hand, the payout control circuit 171aF sets the data as “no counting history” in the response of the counting history response transmitted to the CU3F when the “store code” does not match as a result of the comparison. Then, the communication control circuit 171bF returns a response to the counting history response including the serial number = n and no counting history to the CU3F. Here, when the response of the counting history response including the serial number = n and no counting history is returned from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F (when the above-mentioned “store code” does not match), the payout control circuit 171aF Is prohibited.

  That is, when the “store code” stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF matches the “store code” transmitted from the CU 3F with the count history request command, communication is disabled. Although it is possible to return to the previous gaming state using the count history, if they do not match, the communication state is not restored to the previous gaming state.

  In the above description, the case where the payout control circuit 171aF compares the “store code” has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the communication control circuit 171bF refers to the register of the payout control circuit 171aF. The “store code” stored in the register in 171aF may be compared with the “store code” transmitted from the CU 3F using a count history request command. In this case, the communication control circuit 171bF notifies the payout control circuit 171aF of the determination result. In the case of the determination result that the “store code” matches, the payout control circuit 171aF sets the stored data of the count history 1 and the count history 2 in the response of the count history response, and the “store code” matches. In the case of a determination result indicating that no counting is performed, data is set as no counting history in the response of the counting history response. Then, the communication control circuit 171bF returns a response to the counting history response including the set data to the CU3F.

  Further, the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF will be described in detail. FIG. 87 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a communication control circuit 161bF for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. First, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171F in the front frame 5F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. Further, the encryption communication function can periodically pass information of the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F and receive information of the payout control unit 171F by setting a communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the payout control unit 171F in the encryption communication control unit 600F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 161bF can set a timeout time for communication response and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the main control circuit 161aF, and cryptographic communication for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 600F is provided.

  Examples of the registers included in the communication control circuit 161bF include an authentication status register 611F, an authentication interrupt setting register 612F, a transmission data buffer 613F, a transmission data number register 614F, an information transmission clear register 615F, a main control game information register 616F, and a payout control game. An information register 617F, a recovery communication completion register 618F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 611F indicates whether the chip ID of the main control unit 161F has been authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 612F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 613F is a buffer for writing game information to be transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the game information is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Written. Also, by configuring the transmission data buffer 613F with a non-volatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and is written in the buffer that has not been transmitted due to communication failure. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the transmission data buffer 613F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is eliminated. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the transmission data buffer 613F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 613F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 614F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted to the main control unit 161F payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 613F. The information transmission clear register 615F is a register for writing a request to clear data in the transmission data buffer 613F.

  The main control game information register 616F is a register into which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 616F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F and transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control game information register 617F is a register in which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 617F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F.

  The recovery communication completion register 618F is a register in which information indicating whether recovery communication is completed between the main control unit and the payout control unit is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 619F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 600F communicating with the payout control unit 171F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171bF is divided into a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F and a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The communication control circuit 171bF performs communication control on a portion of the configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. A configuration part for performing cryptographic communication with the circuit 171b1F and the communication control IC 325aF will be described below as a communication control circuit 171b2F.

  First, FIG. 88 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b1F for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. First, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the main control unit 161F of the game board 26F and mutual authentication with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. In addition, the encryption communication function can periodically pass the information of the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F and receive the information of the main control unit 161F by setting the communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the main control unit 161F and the communication control IC 325aF in the encryption communication control unit 700F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 171b1F can set a communication response time-out time and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF, and encryption communication for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 700F is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 171b1F include, for example, an authentication status register 711F, an authentication interrupt setting register 712F, a data reception register 713F, a reception data number register 714F, an information reception clear register 715F, a payout control game information register 716F, and a main control game. An information register 717F, a recovery request / completion register 718F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 711F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 712F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The data reception register 713F is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which the game information transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and the buffer is a FIFO (First In, First Out) game. Information is written. In addition, by configuring the data reception register 713F with a nonvolatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the data reception register 713F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is reduced. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the data reception register 713F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the data reception register 713F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The reception data number register 714F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 713F. The information reception clear register 715F is a register in which a request for clearing data in the data reception register 713F is written.

  The payout control game information register 716F is a register into which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 716F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F and transmitted to the main control unit 161F. The main control game information register 717F is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 717F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  The recovery request / completion register 718F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the main control unit and the payout control unit and information indicating whether or not the recovery communication is completed is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 719F is information requesting to clear data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the main control unit 161F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  In addition, the communication control circuit 171b1F includes a communication timeout time setting register 719aF, a communication interval time setting register 719bF, and a main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF.

  After the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F expires, the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF transfers the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F to the data reception register 713F. This register sets the valid time that can be written. By setting the register, writing to the data reception register 713F can be performed even after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired (for example, from 5 seconds to 15 seconds). About seconds). As a result, for example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between the nails of the game area 27F) when authentication is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the floating ball has won a prize. It is possible to securely store and protect the information. Even in the case of a gaming machine having a stage with a long ball residence time, it is assumed that the effective period can be set long so that the information that the floating ball has won can be reliably stored.

  Originally, information cannot be written in the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F from the viewpoint of security after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. However, in the data reception register 713F, for example, it is necessary to write information indicating that the floating ball has won after authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. Therefore, the communication control circuit 171b1F sets an effective time in the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF, and this setting is performed in the encryption communication control unit 700F, whereby the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Information can be written to the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F as long as it is within the valid period even after the authentication between and is terminated. It should be noted that the set value of the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF can be read after this setting is made by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  FIG. 89 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b2F for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. As shown in FIG. 89, the communication control circuit 171b2F performs, for example, an authentication status register 721F, an authentication interrupt setting register 722F, a transmission data buffer 723aF, a data reception register 723bF, and a transmission data number register 724F in order to perform cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. , Received data number register 725F, recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F, recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F, recovery request / completion register 728F, encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729F, communication timeout timer-prescaler setting register 729aF, and communication It has a timeout time setting register 729bF and the like.

  The authentication status register 721F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 722F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 723aF is a buffer for writing a business message to be transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the business message is written to the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is included. The data reception register 723bF is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which a business message transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and a business message is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is written.

  By configuring the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF with non-volatile memory, communication disconnection occurs between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF, and the buffer and register that have not been transmitted due to communication failure are stored in the buffer and register. The written business message is retained even after returning. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of a user program to generate a business message written in the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF becomes unnecessary, and the payout control unit It is possible to reduce the processing load of 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Note that since the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are configured by a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 724F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 723aF. The reception data number register 725F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 723bF.

  The recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F is a register in which the number of addition spheres is written when an addition sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power-off recovery. The recovery communication addition ball request register 726F is updated only when the recovery communication is completed. The recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is a register in which the number of subtraction spheres is written when a subtraction sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after the power-off recovery. Note that the recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is also updated only when the recovery communication is completed.

  The recovery request / completion register 728F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the communication control IC and the payout control unit and whether or not the recovery communication is completed are written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 729F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the communication control IC 325aF, and that the data has been deleted ( This is a register in which information indicating "clear completion" is written.

  The payout control unit 171F notifies the user program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF of security-related information among the data received by the data reception register 723bF of the communication control circuit 171b2F in the encryption communication with the communication control IC 325aF. And stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF. That is, since the user program executed in the payout control circuit 171aF is restricted so that the security related information received in the data reception register 723bF cannot be directly accessed, the security related information is stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF. I can't export. The communication control circuit 171b2F has been described with respect to the case where security-related information is received by the data reception register 723bF. However, a separate security-related information reception register that cannot be directly accessed by the user program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF is provided. May be.

  Further, the security-related information received by the data reception register 723bF is stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF, but the configuration of the payout control unit 171F cannot be directly accessed by the user program executed in the payout control circuit 171aF. explained. However, the payout control unit 171F is not limited to this, and does not store the security-related information received by the data reception register 723bF in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF, but only holds it in the data reception register 723bF. A configuration in which a user program executed in the payout control circuit 171aF cannot be directly accessed may be adopted.

<Recovery completion confirmation process>
Next, in the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the main control storage unit 161cF and the payout control memory when returning from a communication disabled state such as a power failure. The recovery process which transmits the predetermined information memorize | stored in the part 171cF is performed. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F perform a recovery completion confirmation process for resuming the generation of predetermined information by executing the user program on the condition that the recovery process ends. Specifically, the recovery completion confirmation process will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 90 is a flowchart for explaining the recovery completion confirmation process.

  First, when the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are turned on in order to recover from an incommunicable state such as a power interruption, the main control circuit 161aF and the payout control circuit 171aF start processing of an authentication sequence. When the authentication is completed, the authentication results are written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, respectively. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F confirm whether or not the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291). When the authentication completion is not written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF291.

  When the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: YES), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F recover in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F. It is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating completion is written (step SF292). If the flag indicating the completion of recovery is not written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF292.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F start the processing of the user program when the recovery completion flag is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: YES). (Step SF293). As means for starting the processing of the user program, for example, a means for transmitting a signal for starting the processing of the user program to start the processing of the user program and a stopping means for stopping the processing of the user program are provided. There are means for starting the processing of the user program by releasing the means.

  As described above, since the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F do not start the processing of the user program until the recovery processing is completed, new information by the processing of the user program before the information to be restored by the recovery processing is determined. Is prevented from being written, the processing of the user program can be resumed appropriately.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the main control unit and the payout control unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described.

  FIG. 91 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named power-on notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This power-on notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F that power is turned on and communication is started. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “power-on reception” to the main control unit 161F. This power-on reception response is a response that the main control unit 161F receives a power-on notification and starts communication.

  Next, a command having a game state notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This gaming state notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F of the gaming state. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “game state response” to the main control unit 161F. This gaming state response is a response that a gaming state notification has been received with respect to the main control unit 161F.

<Main sequence processed between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, a main sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F by processing executed by the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described with reference to FIGS.

<< Communication sequence >>
First, with reference to FIG. 92, a sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F when the power is turned on will be described. The sequence shown in FIG. 92 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is normally completed.

  The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is performed by a polling method using the main control unit 161F as a primary station, and the polling interval is 200 ms. Note that communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is excluded. The payout control unit 171F sets “communication line disconnection” and stops the game when the request command from the main control unit 161F cannot be received even after 1 second has elapsed since the response was transmitted.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit 171F transmits a response command to the main control unit 161F only when normal data is received. If the main control unit 161F does not receive a response command within the polling interval time, it retransmits the command up to three times including the first time. The serial numbers used for transmission and reception are stored in the storage unit for both the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and are used for command normality check, power-off recovery, and communication line disconnection recovery.

  Specifically, the communication sequence will be described. First, when power is turned on, communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is performed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and an authentication new sequence is started. . As described above, the authentication sequence is written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F that the chip IDs of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are authenticated and the communication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is authenticated. . Furthermore, the process which produces | generates the encryption key and decryption key which are used for the encryption communication of the main control part 161F and the payout control part 171F by the said authentication sequence is performed. The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F after the process is performed using the generated encryption key and decryption key.

  Next, after the authentication sequence is completed, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with a serial number “n”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n” without counting up the serial number. Furthermore, the main control unit 161F transmits a game state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with the serial number “n + 1”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n + 1” without counting up the serial number.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 161F counts up the serial number to “n + 2” and transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F. Then, the payout control unit 171F sets “n + 2” without counting up the serial number, and returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F.

  In the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the interval from the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n” to the command transmission of the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1”, the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1” The interval from the command transmission to the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n + 2” is 200 ms each.

<< Sequence after power off >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a process when the status information request is unreached due to power failure / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 93 particularly shows that there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the payout control unit 171F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the gaming state notification is not reached (from the main control unit 161F). FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing when a post-recovery communication partner matches with a payout control unit 171F).

  Referring to FIG. 93, before the power interruption occurs during the game, main controller 161F transmits a gaming state notification including serial number = n to payout controller 171F. In response to this, the payout control unit 171F transmits a game state reception including the serial number = n to the main control unit 161F.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the payout control unit 171F during the game, when a game state notification including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F, the payout control unit 171F The game state notification cannot be received because of the state. Thereafter, since the gaming state reception from the payout control unit 171F is not transmitted, the main control unit 161F performs control to stop communication assuming that the power supply is cut off after one second.

  Thereafter, when an authentication sequence is started between the power-on and main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F includes a power source including serial number = 1 and main control serial number (previous last transmission serial number) = n + 1. The insertion notification is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Since the game state reception serial number transmitted to the main control unit 161F before the power interruption occurred is “n”, the payout control unit 171F has a payout control serial number backed up by the payout control unit 171F = n. Therefore, the payout control sequence number = n backed up by the payout control unit 171F does not match the main control sequence number = n + 1 backed up by the main control unit 161F. When the serial numbers do not match, the payout control unit 171F performs recovery processing on the information of the payout control unit 171F based on the recovery game information included in the power-on notification transmitted from the main control unit 161F. Thereafter, the payout control unit 171F transmits power-on reception including the serial number = 1 to the main control unit 161F.

  The main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F performs processing with the contents after the recovery process, and transmits a game state reception including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. Thereafter, similarly, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F transmits the game state reception including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F.

  The above-described recovery process is performed because the serial numbers do not match, but information (for example, the number of game information, prize ball information, etc.) included in the recovery game information is the main control unit 161F and payout control. The recovery processing may be performed even if there is a mismatch with the unit 171F.

<Unauthorized gaming machine connection detection>
Next, a mechanism for detecting unauthorized gaming machines detected by the CU3F will be described. The card unit that can be connected to the P unit 2F is not limited to a card unit that is used for commercial purposes (corresponding to the CU3F described above, hereinafter also simply referred to as CU3F or commercial CU). It may be a game board development jig for developing a board, a development card unit (development CU) used for the development of the P stand 2F, or the like.

  However, it is conceivable to illegally play a game on the P unit 2F by using a card unit that can be connected to the P unit 2F other than the commercial CU. For example, a large number of game balls are lent out to a P board 2F connected to a game board development jig or development CU other than a commercial CU and separated from the game board development jig or development CU, and then the P board 2F. It is conceivable to play a game illegally by connecting a commercial CU.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operation of the commercial CU is detected by detecting whether the P stand 2F connected to the commercial CU has been connected to a game board development jig or development CU other than the commercial CU in the past. Stop. Specifically, a mechanism for detecting whether or not a game board development jig other than a commercial CU or a development CU has been connected in the past will be described with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining a detection mechanism when the P stand 2F connected to the game board development jig is connected to a commercial CU by unit replacement. First, the game board development jig 3EF shown in FIG. 94 includes a CU control unit 323F and a communication control IC 325aF that are the same as a commercial CU, except for having an SC 325EbF for developing P units. In addition, an identification ID indicating that it is a game board development jig is embedded in SC325EbF for P-unit development. Specifically, the identification ID is an identification code included in the SC board ID, and is stored in the SC325EbF as a part of the SC board ID.

  When the P board 2F is connected to the game board development jig 3EF as shown in FIG. 94, when the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the game board development jig 3EF to the P board 2F as a gaming machine message notification, The identification ID is transmitted from the development SC325EbF to the P platform 2F. The identification ID transmitted to the P platform 2F is stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF. The SC board ID of SC325EbF is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF together with the identification ID. Note that only the identification ID may be backed up in another storage device of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  The SC board ID is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF as described above, but is not notified to the user program 171pF executed by the payout control circuit 171aF. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot read the SC board ID from the payout control circuit 171aF, and the SC board ID cannot be illegally copied, so that the security is high. The SC board ID (including the identification ID) stored in the register of the payout control circuit 171aF can be erased by clearing the RAM of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  Next, processing when the unit is replaced from the game board development jig 3EF to the CU3F will be described. When the P stand 2F connected to the game board development jig 3EF is connected to the CU 3F by unit replacement, a gaming machine message notification is transmitted from the CU 3F in the processing of the authentication sequence after the power is turned on. With this gaming machine message notification, the SC board ID including the identification ID (identification information indicating that it is a commercial CU) is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the P stand 2F. Note that the timing for transmitting the SC board ID to the P stand 2F is not limited to the processing of the authentication sequence. For example, after the unit is replaced with the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is turned on, the player inserts the card. The timing at which the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F as a gaming machine telegram notification may be used. In other words, any timing may be used as long as it can prevent the player from illegally using the number of game balls given by the game board development jig 3EF. In FIG. 94, in order to distinguish the identification ID from the SC 325EbF for developing the P unit and the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF, the identification ID from the SC 325EbF for developing the P unit is illustrated. The identification ID is not shown.

  Upon receiving the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF, the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. It is determined whether or not. Whether or not the P platform 2F is a connecting device other than the commercial CU3F without determining whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. You may just judge. If the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF, the card unit connected in the past without notifying the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF. Is notified only that the game board development jig 3EF, and Bit 6 (connection of game board development jig) in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response is set to “1”.

  Based on the information of Bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response transmitted as a gaming machine message response from the connected P stand 2F, the CU 3F is connected to the game board development jig 3EF. Is detected. Specifically, the SC 325bF reads information on Bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3, and if the information is “1”, it detects that the card unit connected in the past was the game board development jig 3EF. When the SC 325bF detects that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, CU3F can prevent performing an illegal game, without taking in information in game board development jig 3EF connected in the past into CU control part 323F. Further, when the CU 3F detects that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF, the CU 3F may notify by sound or light, or may notify the detection result to the upper server.

  In FIG. 94, the identification ID is written in the user program 171pF in order to express that the information of Bit 6 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 has been written in the user program 171pF. However, as described above, the stored identification ID itself is not notified. In addition, the identification ID is changed from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F in order to easily express the state information response including the information of Bit 6 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. However, the stored identification ID itself is not notified.

  Of course, as described above, when the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF, the flag (in the fraud detection state 3) Instead of writing in the user program 171 pF as Bit 6 (game board development jig connection) = “1”), the information on the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF itself is written in the user program 171 pF as shown in FIG. It may be complicated. Further, it may be determined whether or not the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF is based on the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF. Also, the information transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F is not a flag (bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3 (game board development jig connection) = “1”), but as shown in FIG. 94, the game board development jig Information on the 3EF identification ID itself may be transmitted.

  Further, the P platform 2F stores the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) without determining whether or not it is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. The identification ID may be transmitted to the SC 325bF via the user program 171pF. That is, it may be determined whether the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF or not by the P325 2F instead of the SC board 325bF and detecting the game board development jig connection.

  Also, when replacing the unit from the game board development jig 3EF to another game board development jig 3EF, the information of Bit 6 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 is sent from the connected P stand 2F as described in FIG. The response of the status information response including it is transmitted. However, another game board development jig 3EF whose unit has been replaced has the shipped manufacturer code of the game machine development manufacturer code set in SC325EbF for P unit development, so that Bit6 = "6" It may be configured not to detect that the card unit connected in the past was the game board development jig 3EF while ignoring the information of 1 ″. In other words, if the card unit determines that the unit has been changed from the game board development jig 3EF to another game board development jig 3EF based on the shipping manufacturer code set in the SC, it detects an error in connection with the game board development jig. do not do. As a result, in the development process in which the connection between the game board development jig 3EF and the P stand 2F is repeated, processing for detecting an error in connection with the game board development jig is not performed, so that development and maintenance work is facilitated.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining a detection mechanism when the P stand 2F connected to the development CU is connected to the commercial CU by unit replacement. First, the development CU3DF shown in FIG. 95 includes the same CU control unit 323F and communication control IC 325aF as the commercial CU, except that the development CU3DF has a development SC325DbF. In addition, an identification ID indicating that it is a development CU is embedded in the development SC325DbF. Specifically, the identification ID is an identification code included in the SC board ID, and is stored in the SC325DbF as a part of the SC board ID.

  When the P unit 2F is connected to the development CU3DF as shown in FIG. 95, when the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the development CU3DF to the P unit 2F as a gaming machine message notification, the identification ID is received from the development SC325DbF. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F. The identification ID transmitted to the P platform 2F is stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF. The SC board ID of SC325DbF is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF together with the identification ID. Note that only the identification ID may be backed up in another storage device of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  Next, processing when the unit is replaced from the development CU3DF to the CU3F will be described. When the P platform 2F connected to the development CU3DF is connected to the CU3F by unit replacement, a gaming machine message notification is transmitted from the CU3F in the processing of the authentication sequence after the power is turned on. With this gaming machine message notification, the SC board ID including the identification ID (identification information indicating that it is a commercial CU) is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the P stand 2F. Note that the timing for transmitting the SC board ID to the P stand 2F is not limited to the processing of the authentication sequence. For example, after the unit is replaced with the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is turned on, the player inserts the card. The timing at which the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F as a gaming machine telegram notification may be used. In other words, any timing may be used as long as it can prevent the player from illegally using the number of game balls given by the development CU3DF. In FIG. 95, in order to distinguish the identification ID from the development SC325DbF and the identification ID from the commercial SC325bF, the identification ID from the development SC325DbF is illustrated, and the identification ID from the commercial SC325bF is illustrated. Not shown.

  Upon receiving the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF, the P base 2F determines whether or not the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the development CU3DF. . The P platform 2F determines whether or not the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF is a connection device other than the commercial CU3F without determining whether the identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF. Just be fine. When the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF, the card unit connected in the past without notifying the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF is for development. Only the fact that it is a CU3DF is notified, and Bit 5 (development CU connection) of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response is set to “1”.

  In CU3F, based on the information of Bit5 of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response transmitted as a gaming machine message response from the connected P stand 2F, the card unit connected in the past was the development CU3DF Detect that. Specifically, the SC 325bF reads the information of Bit5 in the fraud detection state 3, and if the information is “1”, it detects that the card unit connected in the past was the development CU3DF. When the SC 325bF detects that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3DF, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. As a result, the CU3F can prevent an unauthorized game from being performed without taking the information in the development CU3DF connected in the past into the CU control unit 323F. Further, when the CU 3F detects that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3DF, the CU 3F may notify by sound or light, or may notify the detection result to the upper server.

  In FIG. 95, the identification ID is written in the user program 171pF in order to express the fact that the information of Bit5 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 is written in the user program 171pF. However, as described above, the stored identification ID itself is not notified. In addition, the identification ID is changed from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F in order to express in an easy-to-understand manner the state information response response including the information of Bit 5 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. However, the stored identification ID itself is not notified.

  Of course, as described above, when the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF, the flag included in the response to the status information response (Bit5 (development of fraud detection state 3) Instead of writing into the user program 171 pF as “CU connection for use CU” = “1”), the information of the identification ID itself of the development CU3DF may be written into the user program 171 pF as shown in FIG. Further, based on the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF, it may be determined whether or not it is the development CU3DF identification ID. Also, the information transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F is not a flag (Bit 5 (development CU connection) = “1” in the fraud detection state 3), but the identification ID itself of the development CU 3DF as shown in FIG. May be transmitted.

  Furthermore, the P stand 2F does not determine whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the development CU3DF or not. A configuration in which the ID is simply transmitted to the SC 325bF via the user program 171pF may be employed. In other words, it may be determined whether the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3DF or not by the P unit 2F, not by the SC 325bF, and detecting the development CU connection.

  Also, when a unit is replaced from a development CU3DF to another development CU3DF, a response of a status information response including information of Bit5 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 from the connected P 2F as described in FIG. Will be sent. However, in another development CU3DF whose unit has been replaced, since the shipping manufacturer code of the game device development manufacturer code is set in the development SC325DbF, the transmitted information of Bit5 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 transmitted. May be configured not to detect that the card unit connected in the past was the development CU3DF. In other words, if the card unit determines that the unit has been replaced from the development CU3DF to another development CU3DF based on the shipping manufacturer code set in the SC, the card unit does not detect the development CU connection error. As a result, in the development process in which the connection between the development CU 3DF and the P stand 2F is repeated, a process for detecting an error in the development CU connection is not performed, so that the development and maintenance work is facilitated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is detected whether or not the P stand 2F connected to the CU3F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or development CU3DF other than the CU3F in the past, and the CU control unit Since the communication with the H.323F is stopped and the operation of the CU3F is stopped, it is possible to prevent an illegal game by connecting to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU3DF other than the CU3F in the past. For example, before connecting the P stand 2F to the commercial CU3F, connect it to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU3DF and lend a large number of game balls, and use the game balls lent after connecting to the commercial CU3F. And fraud in playing games can be prevented.

  Next, a case where a gaming machine simulator other than the P stand 2F is connected to a commercial CU3F will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining a detection mechanism when a gaming machine simulator is connected to a commercial CU3F. Here, the gaming machine simulator is a device for connecting, for example, to inspect whether the commercial CU3F operates normally, and can virtually output signals and information necessary for the inspection to the commercial CU3F. it can. Therefore, in order to prevent unauthorized gaming information from being transmitted by intentionally connecting a gaming machine simulator, a commercial CU3F determines whether it is connected to a gaming machine simulator or connected to the P stand 2F. It is necessary to detect.

  First, the gaming machine simulator 2AF shown in FIG. 96 has a payout control unit 171AF in the same manner as the P stand 2F. The payout control unit 171AF includes a payout control circuit 171AaF and a user program 171ApF executed by the payout control circuit 171AaF. In the user program 171 ApF, an identification ID indicating that it is a gaming machine simulator 2AF is embedded.

  As shown in FIG. 96, when the gaming machine simulator 2AF is connected to a commercial CU3F, a gaming machine message notification command and a gaming machine message response response are communicated between the CU3F and the gaming machine simulator 2AF. For example, the CU3F transmits a state information request command for notifying the gaming machine simulator 2AF of the state of the CU3F. When the gaming machine simulator 2AF receives a status information request command from the CU 3F, the gaming machine simulator 2AF transmits a response of a status information response to notify the CU 3F of game information, a gaming machine state, and the like.

  Information for notifying the CU 3F that it is connected to the gaming machine simulator 2AF is included in the response of the status information response transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the gaming machine simulator 2AF sets Bit 7 (gaming machine simulator connection) of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response = “1” based on the identification ID embedded in the user program 171ApF.

  In CU3F, the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator based on the information of Bit7 in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response transmitted as a gaming machine message response from the connected gaming machine simulator 2AF. Detect that. Specifically, the SC 325bF reads Bit7 information in the fraud detection state 3, and if the information is “1”, it detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator. When the SC 325bF detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, CU3F can prevent performing an illegal game, without taking in the information of connected gaming machine simulator 2AF into CU control part 323F. Further, when the CU3F detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator, the CU3F may notify the user by sound or light, or notify the host server of the detection result.

  Note that the identification ID is given from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to express the state information response including the information of Bit 7 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU 3F in an easily understandable manner. It is shown as transmitted to CU3F.

  Of course, the information transmitted from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU3F is not a flag (bit 7 in fraud detection state 3 (gaming machine simulator connection) = “1”), but identifies the gaming machine simulator 2AF as shown in FIG. Information on the ID itself may be transmitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is detected whether the gaming machine connected to the CU3F is the commercial P stand 2F or the gaming machine simulator 2AF, and the communication with the CU control unit 323F is stopped and the CU3F Since the operation is stopped, it is possible to prevent illegal gaming by intentionally connecting the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU 3F. For example, the gaming machine simulator 2AF can count a large number of game balls with respect to the CU 3F, and the waiting ball counted after connecting to the P stand 2F can be rented as a game ball to prevent fraud. .

<Notification processing of operation / non-operation information from pachinko machine>
FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a process of notifying operation / non-operation information from a pachinko machine. The P platform 2F shown in FIG. 97 is connected to the CU 3F, the hall server 801F, the key management server 800F, and the history management center 800AF. Here, the key management server 800F is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (hereinafter also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. The key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F. The machine history management center 800AF associates the information of the front frame 5F with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F, and the semiconductor provided on the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. It includes a history management system that stores information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the chip and manages the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. The security board 325F is connected in parallel to the payout control unit 171F via the PIF circuit 326F which is a parallel interface circuit.

  When the manufacturer (game machine manufacturer) ships the front frame 5F and the game board 26F and installs them in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, as shown in FIG. 97, the game machine installation information (operation information) is obtained from the P stand 2F. ) Is notified to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF includes, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F, and the security of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F. The chip ID and the security chip ID of the opponent when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are combined are included. Note that the security chip ID cannot be changed or deleted after registration in the history management center 800AF.

  On the other hand, shipment information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F shipped by the manufacturer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the shipping information is input to the machine history management center 800AF from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line or the like. The machine history management center 800AF stores the input shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided therein, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is compared with the installed gaming machine information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. As an error notification, for example, an error notification is performed by an error notification lamp or a display 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, Error notification may be performed by the hall management computer or the hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed. The information stored in association with the front chip 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID cannot be changed after the shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. Further, it is desirable that the shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is registered in the machine history management center 800AF one day before installation in the hall.

  Similarly, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed in the hall is removed and stored in the warehouse, the P stand 2F becomes inactive. 97, non-operating information is notified from the P platform 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is information that the front chip 5F of the P platform 2F and the security chip ID of the game board 26F that have been installed are not transmitted.

  On the other hand, the history information management center 800AF receives the removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F removed by the hall or warehouse company. Then, the history management center 800AF stores the input information on the removal of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided to each of them, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is checked against the inactive information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

  In addition, when a second-hand trader resells the game board 26F to another hall and installs it in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, as shown in FIG. 97, the game machine installation information (operation information) is obtained from the P stand 2F. The history management center 800AF is notified. Specifically, in the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F, the security chip ID of the combined front frame 5F, etc. It is included.

  On the other hand, movement information (resale information) of the game board 26F resold by the secondhand dealer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF stores the input movement information of the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in the game board 26F, and is notified from the stored information and the P base 2F. Check against game machine installation information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

  Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed by the disposal contractor is discarded, the P stand 2F is in a non-operating state. Thus, the non-operating information is notified from the P base 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is the security chip of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) of the installed P stand 2F. This information is obtained when the ID is not transmitted.

  On the other hand, removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) discarded by the discarder is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Then, the history management center 800AF stores the input information on the removal of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided to each of them, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is checked against the inactive information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

<Management of gaming machines>
Next, a system for managing the history of gaming machines from shipment to disposal will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the flow of history information (machine history information) from shipment to disposal of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the target of the gaming machine that manages the history is not limited to the above-described enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P 2F), and includes a conventional CR gaming machine. Of course, the target gaming machine includes not only pachinko gaming machines but also S machines (slot machines) 2SF corresponding to P machines 2F described later, conventional pachislot machines, and the like.

  Referring to FIG. 98, when a gaming machine is shipped from a gaming machine manufacturer to Hall A, the gaming machine manufacturer's server (not shown) sends shipping information about the shipped gaming machine to a communication line. The information is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the input shipping information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing details of a flow until shipping information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 99, when ordering a gaming machine from a gaming machine maker, Hall A sends a sales contract to the gaming machine maker. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives the sales contract sent from Hall A, it confirms the order of the gaming machine according to the sales contract. When the gaming machine manufacturer confirms the order, it sends a copy of the warranty card and the certification notice to Hall A and starts production of the gaming machine. The gaming machine manufacturer ships the produced gaming machine to Hall A from the gaming machine manufacturer (delivered to Hall A). In addition, after a gaming machine to be shipped to Hall A is delivered to a carrier, the gaming machine manufacturer's server inputs shipping information regarding the gaming machine to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line. When the history management center 800AF receives the input of the shipping information, it registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating an example of specific contents of the shipping information. Specifically, FIG. 100A is a diagram showing items registered as shipping information. FIG. 100B is a diagram showing registration classifications included in the registration type.

  Referring to FIG. 100 (a), shipping information includes registration type, game board production number, main board management number, main control chip ID number (main chip ID), main control product code, and gaming machine. It includes a frame manufacturing number, a payout board management number, a payout control chip ID number (payout chip ID), a payout control product code, a shipping date, a company code, a hall code, and a cancellation flag.

  The registration type indicates whether the gaming machine to be shipped is a conventional CR gaming machine, an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P stand 2F), a gaming board with a replaced part, or a gaming machine frame. This is information to specify. Specifically, in FIG. 100B, when the registration type number is “11” to “14”, the gaming machine to be shipped is a CR gaming machine, and when “21” to “25”. Indicates that the gaming machine to be shipped is P 2F. Furthermore, the registration type numbers “11” to “14” indicate that the game board, the gaming machine frame, the gaming board + the gaming machine frame, and the gaming board (parts replacement) are replaced. Also, the registration type numbers “21” to “25” indicate that they are replaced gaming boards, gaming machine frames, gaming boards + gaming machine frames, gaming board parts, gaming machine frame parts, respectively. When replacing the board of the game board or the board of the gaming machine frame, the board management number after replacement is set and registered when the base is replaced. In addition, replacement of parts in which the production numbers of the game board and the gaming machine frame are changed is registered as a new shipment. Note that the name of the gaming machine manufacturer and the model name of the gaming machine are specified by the registration type.

The game board production number and main board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code.
The main control chip ID number is information read by an ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P unit 2F (setting is not necessary in the conventional CR gaming machine). The main control product code is the product code of the main control chip (setting is not necessary in the conventional CR gaming machine).

  The gaming machine frame manufacturing number and the payout board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code. Note that the payout board management number does not need to be set in a conventional CR gaming machine.

  The payout control chip ID number is information read by an ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P unit 2F (setting is not necessary in the CR gaming machine). The payout control product code is a product code written in the payout control chip (setting is not necessary in the CR gaming machine).

  The shipment date is the date when the gaming machine is shipped, and is the date when shipment is confirmed. The business operator code is information for specifying the name of the carrier. The hole code is information for identifying the hall name of the delivery destination. The cancellation flag is set to “0” when shipping information is registered, and “1” when canceling registered shipping information. When the gaming machine manufacturer has registered incorrect shipping information in the machine history management center 800AF, the gaming machine manufacturer sets a cancellation flag for the incorrect shipping information to “1” and registers it again in the machine history management center 800AF.

  When the history management center 800AF receives the shipping information with the cancellation flag set to “1”, the history management center 800AF cancels the registration of the shipping information with the same content as the received shipping information and the cancellation flag set to “0”. That is, the shipping information having the same content as the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” is deleted from the storage area of the history management center 800AF. Therefore, the history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (ON state).

  Further, the machine history management center 800AF can accept the shipment information including the cancellation flag set to “1” until a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the shipping information having the same contents as the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” cannot be registered in the history management center 800AF.

  Here, examples of the predetermined condition include time and period. Therefore, the machine history management center 800AF can be set to accept the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” until 8:00 pm on the day when the shipping information to be canceled is registered. Therefore, the history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (ON state), and after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, after 8:00 pm on the registration date) ) Can be prevented from tampering with shipping information.

  If the gaming machine is an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P 2F), the main control chip ID number or the payout control chip ID number serves as identification information for identifying the individual gaming machine, and the gaming machine has a conventional CR In the case of a gaming machine, at least one number of a gaming board manufacturing number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame manufacturing number, and a payout board management number is identification information for identifying an individual gaming machine.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), the shipping information can be the same format regardless of whether the gaming machine is an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P 2F) or a conventional CR gaming machine. In the management center 800AF, the history of the enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F) and the conventional CR gaming machine can be managed in a unified manner.

  Referring to FIG. 98 again, when a gaming machine is delivered to hall A from a gaming machine manufacturer and the gaming machine is installed in hall A, a server (not shown) in hall A is connected via a communication line. Installation information regarding the installed gaming machine is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF associates the input installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping and registers them in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing details of the flow until installation information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 101 (a) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer (not shown) installed in the hall A and the history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. . In FIG. 101 (a), the conventional CR gaming machine is mainly used, and the conventional CR gaming machine is installed in Hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line. The case is assumed.

  FIG. 101 (b) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 101 (b), this is mainly the case of an enclosed circulating game machine (P stand 2F), and the P stand 2F is installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line. Is assumed.

  Referring to FIG. 101 (a), when a gaming machine is delivered from hall A to hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery form is sent from hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a copy of the gaming machine delivery form, the gaming machine installation information is input from the gaming machine manufacturer to the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line, and the input installation information is stored in the storage area of the server. be registered. When installation information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF, the registration result is output via a communication line or as a document. In Hall A, when a jurisdiction implementation inspection is conducted and a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined location in Hall A.

  Referring to FIG. 101 (b), when a gaming machine is delivered from hall A to Hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery form is sent from Hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. Thereafter, in Hall A, a jurisdiction implementation inspection is performed, and when a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined location in Hall A. Since the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be connectable via a communication line, when the gaming machine installed in the hall A is turned on, the history is automatically transferred from the hall computer. Installation information is transmitted to the management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF associates the received installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping and registers them in the storage area.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the installation information input to the history management center 800AF in FIG. Referring to FIG. 102, the installation information includes a registration type, a game board production number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame production number, an installation date, a hall code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame production number, hole code, and cancellation flag are the same as those described in FIG. 100, detailed description thereof will not be repeated. .

  As described above, in the case of FIG. 101 (a), since it is assumed that a conventional CR gaming machine is mainly installed in the hall A, the registration type numbers are “11” to “14”. Become. The installation date is, for example, the planned opening date of the warranty card.

  From the above, in the case of FIG. 101 (a), the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, model name, gaming board production number, main board management number, as installation information input from the gaming machine manufacturer. A game frame serial number, installation date, and installation hall name are registered.

  Further, in the case of FIG. 101 (b), the machine history management center 800AF has, as installation information automatically transmitted from the hall computer, a gaming machine manufacturer name, model name, installation date, installation destination hall name, The main control chip ID and the payout control ID are registered. The history management center 800AF may receive the above-mentioned part of information as installation information, and register information that is common with the shipping information with reference to the shipping information.

  Referring again to FIG. 98, when the gaming machine installed in hall A is removed, the removal information from hall A is written in a document or the like, and the document is sent to history management center 800AF. Based on the removal information sent to the machine history management center 800AF, the removal information is registered in the storage area of the server by inputting necessary information from the input means (terminal not shown) of the machine history management center 800AF. If the document is not sent to the machine history management center 800AF, it is determined that the gaming machine has been removed from the hall A when second-hand movement information or disposal information described later is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. The removal information may be registered.

  FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a flow until removal information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 103A is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer installed in the hall A and the history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. In FIG. 103 (a), it is assumed that a conventional CR gaming machine is mainly installed in Hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line.

  FIG. 103B is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 103 (b), it is assumed that the P unit 2F is mainly installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line.

  Referring to FIG. 103 (a), when the gaming machine installed in Hall A is removed, the gaming machine is removed based on the issued change approval application. When the gaming machine is removed, a document including removal information is sent from the hall A to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the removal information in the storage area based on the sent document.

  Referring to FIG. 103 (b), since the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to communicate with each other, the history management center 800AF is based on the installation information registered in the storage area. If a certain period of time (for example, one month) has passed and no communication with the gaming machine that should have been installed in Hall A, it is determined that the gaming machine has not been operated and has been removed. Then, the removal information is registered in the storage area. Similar to FIG. 103 (a), the history management center 800AF may register the removal information in the storage area based on the document sent from the hall A.

  When a conventional CR gaming machine is to be removed, the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, a game board production number, a main board management number, a game frame production number, a removal date, and removal as removal information. The hall name is registered. In addition, when the P stand 2F is removed, in the machine history management center 800AF, a removal control board management number is further registered as removal information in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine. Is done.

  Referring to FIG. 98 again, when the gaming machine removed from hall A is stored in the seller's warehouse, and the received gaming machine is delivered to another hall B, the seller will enter the application documents. The used movement information is entered and sent to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF registers second-hand movement information in the server from the input means of the machine history management center 800AF based on the sent application documents. When the history management center 800AF and the management computer owned by the dealer are configured to be communicable, the management computer inputs the used movement information to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. Also good.

  When a gaming machine delivered from a dealer is delivered to another hall B and the gaming machine is installed in another hall B, the installation is performed in the other hall B as shown in FIG. Information is registered in the server of the machine history management center 800AF. Also, when the gaming machine installed in Hall B is removed, the removal information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF in the flow described with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the gaming machine removed from Hall A is collected by the processing company and the collected gaming machine is discarded, the disposal information is entered in the application document from the processing company, and the document is recorded. It is sent to the management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the discard information in the storage area by inputting necessary information from the input means in the own device. When the history management center 800AF and the management computer of the processing company are configured to be communicable, the management computer can input the discard information to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. Good.

  Further, when the gaming machine traded in from the hall A by the gaming machine maker is discarded, the hall computer inputs the discard information regarding the gaming machine to be discarded via the communication line to the history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the input discard information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a flow until discard information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 104, when a gaming machine maker accepts acceptance of trade-in of a gaming machine in hall A, the gaming machine is delivered from hall A to the gaming machine maker. When a gaming machine maker collects and stores the gaming machine and then discards it, it requests the disposal company (disposal company) to dispose of it. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a notification from the processing company that the disposal of the gaming machine has been completed (processing details, etc.), the gaming machine manufacturer's server sends the disposal information about the gaming machine via the communication line. Input to the management center 800AF. When the history management center 800AF receives the input of the discard information, it registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of discard information input to the machine history management center 800AF.

  Referring to FIG. 105, the discard information includes registration type, discard date, game board manufacturer code, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame manufacturer code, and gaming machine. It includes a frame manufacturing number, a payout board management number, a company code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame production number, and cancellation flag are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 100, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  The discard date is the date when the gaming machine is discarded. The game board manufacturer code is information for identifying the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactured the game board. The gaming machine frame manufacturer code is information for identifying the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactured the gaming machine frame. The business operator code is information for identifying the business operator that has performed the disposal process. Typically, it is the operator code of the processing company (disposal company), but when it is discarded by the gaming machine manufacturer, it becomes the operator code of the gaming machine manufacturer.

  When a conventional CR gaming machine is discarded, the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, a gaming board production number, a main board management number, a gaming frame production number, a disposal date, and processing as disposal information. The trader name is registered. In addition, when the P unit 2F is discarded, in the machine history management center 800AF, in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine, a payout control board management number is further registered as discard information. Is done.

<Management of front frame and game board>
In the machine history management center described above, the configuration for managing the history of the gaming machine (P machine 2F) has been described. However, since the P machine 2F is formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, the front frame 5F and the game It is also possible to manage the history separately for the board 26F. Therefore, machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be described below.

  FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram for explaining history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F according to the present embodiment. The history management center 800AF shown in FIG. 106 associates the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F with information on the front frame 5F and the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. The information of the game board 26F is stored in the table shown in FIG. 107 in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in FIG. 107, and the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is managed. The history management center 800AF includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 8001F as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 8002F that stores operation programs and control data of the CPU 8001F, and a RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU 8001F. A (Random Access Memory) 8003F, an I / O port (Input / Output Port) 8004F, and a mass storage device 8005F such as an HDD (Hard Disk Drive) are provided.

  FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram of a table that stores information on the front frame 5F and information on the game board 26F in order to manage the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. In the table shown in FIG. 107, a payout side table (FIG. 107 (a)) that stores information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the payout control board 17F, and a security chip ID of the main control board 16F. A main control side table (FIG. 107 (b)) for storing information on the game board 26F is included.

  Hereinafter, the machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. First, at the time of shipment and installation, (1) the semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F manufactures the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and ships it to the frame manufacturer 191F, which is the manufacturer of the front frame 5F. (2) The semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F manufactures the main control semiconductor chip 16aF and ships it to the game board manufacturer 192F, which is the manufacturer of the game board 26F. The payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and the main control semiconductor chip 16aF are not limited to the case where they are manufactured by the same semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F, and may be manufactured by different semiconductor chip manufacturers 190F.

  (3-1) The semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F notifies the history management center 800AF of the payout control security chip ID of the manufactured payout control semiconductor chip 17aF, and inputs the payout control security chip ID into the payout side table. Update the payout table. Similarly, (3-2) the semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the main control security chip ID of the manufactured main control semiconductor chip 16aF, and the main control side security chip ID is sent to the main control side table. To update the main control table.

  (4) The frame maker 191F incorporates the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF into the front frame 5F to manufacture the front frame 5F. Further, the frame maker 191F ships and installs the manufactured front frame 5F to the hall 193F. (5) The frame maker 191F notifies the history management center 800AF of information specifying the front frame 5F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to be stored in association with the payout control security chip ID. As information for specifying the front frame 5F, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the front frame manufacturing number, the delivery board management number, the product code for delivery control, the carrier code, the hall code, the shipping date, and the installation Date and time are included. Further, the information specifying the front frame 5F may include a frame format name, a product code, and a manufacturer code.

  (6) The game board maker 192F incorporates the main control semiconductor chip 16aF into the game board 26F to manufacture the game board 26F. Further, the game board maker 192F ships the manufactured game board 26F to the hall 193F and installs the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in combination. (7) The game board maker 192F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of information specifying the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. To do. As information for identifying the game board 26F, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the model name of the gaming machine, product code, manufacturer code, game board production number, main control board management number, product code for main control , Carrier code, hall code, shipping date, and installation date and time.

  (8) The hall 193F operates the P stand 2F formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P base 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the payout control security chip ID and the main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P machine 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P machine 2F, and transmits the necessary secret key to the P machine 2F. (9) The key management server 800F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the gaming machine installation information, and pays out so as to store a pair (combined) main control security chip ID in association with the payout control security chip ID. The side table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store a pair (combined) payout control security chip ID in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF includes the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F, the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the semiconductor chip maker 190F, the frame maker 191F, and the game board maker 192F. Is matched.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the status of the front frame 5F in which information such as the shipping date (information (3-1) and (5) shown in FIG. 107A) included in the payout table is updated. (Status) is “Shipment”, and the management state of the front frame 5F in which the information on the main control security chip ID of the pair included in the payout side table (information (9) shown in FIG. 107A) is updated ( (Status) is determined as “installation”. Note that the management state (status) of the front frame 5F may be stored in the payout side table or in another storage area. In the case of initial failure after shipment registration, re-shipment is not performed.

  Similarly, the machine history management center 800AF uses the game board 26F in which information such as the shipping date (information (3-2) and (7) shown in FIG. 107B) included in the main control table is updated. The game board 26F in which the management state (status) is “shipment” and the information of the security chip ID for pair payout control included in the main control side table (information (9) shown in FIG. 107 (b)) is updated. The management state (status) is determined as “installation”. Note that the management state (status) of the game board 26F may be stored in the main control side table or in another storage area. In the case of initial failure after shipment registration, re-shipment is not performed.

  Next, at the time of storage, (10) When the hole 193F is replaced with a new front frame 5F and game board 26F, the installed front frame 5F and game board 26F are removed and stored in the warehouse. (11) The warehouse operator 194F notifies the history management center 800AF of the storage information of the front frame 5F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the warehouse trader 194F notifies the history management center 800AF of the storage information of the game board 26F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 107, the storage information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes the manufacturer of the gaming machine, the installation source hall, the removal date, the storage date, and the storage location.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed from the hall 193F, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that non-operating information has been transmitted to the key management server 800F from the removed front frame 5F and game board 26F. The non-operating information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the warehouse operator 194F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as storage dates (information (11) shown in FIG. 107) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. (Status) is determined as “Storage”. When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed, it is not always necessary to remove the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and removed. In this case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (11) (see FIG. 107) of either the payout side table or the main control side table.

  Next, at the time of resale, (12) the hall 193F requests the second trader 195F to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored by the warehouse trader 194F. The used trader 195F resells the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F to another hall and installs them in the hall. (13) The used trader 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the resale information on the resold front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. In addition, the used trader 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the resale information of the resold game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to store it in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 107, the resale information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes an installation source hall, a removal date, an installation date, and a sales company name.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are resold, they are installed in different halls, and the P frame 2F is operated by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P base 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the payout control security chip ID and the main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P machine 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P machine 2F, and transmits the necessary secret key to the P machine 2F. Further, the key management server 800F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the gaming machine installation information, and stores the pair (combined) main control security chip ID in association with the payout control security chip ID. The table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store a pair (combined) payout control security chip ID in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF collates the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the second-hand trader 195F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. Further, the machine history management center 800AF manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as sales company names (information (13) shown in FIG. 107) included in the payout side table and the main control sales table is updated. (Status) is determined to be “resale”, and the front frame 5F and the game in which the information of the pair security chip ID (information (9) shown in FIG. 107) included in the payout side table and the main control side table are updated The management state (status) of the panel 26F is determined as “installation”. When reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not always necessary to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be resold. In this case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (13) (see FIG. 107) of either the payout side table or the main control side table. Further, when reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not necessarily limited to reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse, but the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall. May be resold. In addition, we do not re-ship at the time of resale.

  Next, at the time of disposal, (14) the hole 193F requests the disposal company 196F to discard the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F. The discard trader 196F discards the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F by an appropriate method. (15) The discarder 196F notifies the history management center 800AF of the discard information of the discarded front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the discarder 196F notifies the history management center 800AF of the discard information of the discarded game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 107, the discard information on the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes an installation source hall, a take-off date, and a discard date.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that the non-operation information is transmitted from the discarded front frame 5F and the game board 26F to the key management server 800F. The non-operating information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the discarder 196F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the discard date (information (15) shown in FIG. 107) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. (Status) is determined to be “Discard”. When discarding the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not always necessary to discard the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and discarded. In this case, the machine history management center 800AF updates only the information (15) (see FIG. 107) of either the payout side table or the main control side table. Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F are not necessarily limited to the case where the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse are discarded. 26F may be discarded.

<Abnormality judgment of machine history management center>
If the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal as a result of comparing the gaming machine installation information and the non-operating information with the updated information as described above, the machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 108 is a flowchart for explaining abnormality determination processing for management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F by the machine history management center 800AF. FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining a table referred to in the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, the machine history management center 800AF determines the management state (status) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on information included in the payout side table and the main control side table (SF211). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF includes the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the discard date (information (15) shown in FIG. 107) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. The management state (status) is determined as “discard”.

  Next, the history management center 800AF checks whether or not the transition from the previously determined management state to the currently determined management state is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212). As shown in FIG. 109A, the transition prohibition table indicates a management state in which transition is prohibited from the management state determined last time. Specifically, when the frame maker 191F manufactures and ships the front frame 5F, the front frame 5F is not discarded or resold. Therefore, in the transition prohibition table, the management state changes from “shipment” to “discard”. Transition to “resale” is prohibited. In addition, since the front frame 5F once installed, stored and resold is not shipped from the frame maker 191F, in the transition prohibition table, the management status is “installed”, “storage” and “resale” to “shipment”. ”Is prohibited. Further, since the discarded front frame 5F is not shipped, installed, stored, and resold, the management status is changed from “discarded” to “shipped”, “installed”, “stored”, and “resolded” in the transition prohibition table. ”Is prohibited. In the above-described transition prohibition table, the front frame 5F has been described as an example, but the same applies to the game board 26F.

  Next, when the change to the management state determined this time is not included in the transition prohibition table (SF212: N), the machine history management center 800AF, based on the information from the key management server 800F, the front frame 5F and the game board The operating state of 26F is determined (SF213). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF determines that the gaming machine installation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F, and determines that the machine is operating, and when the non-operation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F (gaming machine installation information). Is not transmitted), it is determined as a non-operating state.

  Next, the machine history management center 800AF checks whether or not the management state determined this time in SF211 and the operation state determined in SF213 are included in the update abnormality table (SF214). As shown in the update abnormality table, FIG. 109 (b), the operation state prohibited in the management state determined this time in SF211 is shown. Specifically, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed, they are in an operating state if they are within business hours, but are normally inactive if they are out of business hours. When the status is “Installation”, it is determined as abnormal if “Operates outside business hours”. Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are not installed, the operation status is always inactive. Therefore, in the update abnormality table, the management status is “shipment”, “storage”, “resale”, and “discard”. When it becomes “operation”, it is determined as abnormal.

  Next, when the determined operating state is included in the update abnormality table (SF214: Y), the machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality (SF215). The means for notifying the abnormality in SF 215 may be any means such as displaying the abnormality on the display device of the history management center 800AF or outputting an alarm sound from the audio output device. The history management center 800AF also reports an abnormality (SF215) when the transition to the management state determined this time is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212: Y).

  The machine history management center 800AF ends the process when the determined operating state is not included in the update abnormality table (SF214: N).

  As described above, the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment uses the payout side table that stores the history information of the front frame 5F in association with the payout control security chip ID and the history information of the game board 26F for main control. The main control side table stored in association with the security chip ID is included in the mass storage device 8005F, and the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on the information stored in the payout side table and the main control side table by the CPU 8001F Judge abnormalities. Therefore, the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment can manage the history by associating the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that may be distributed separately with each security chip ID.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 110 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko gaming machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to the S units. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 110, a slot machine (hereinafter also abbreviated as a gaming machine or S unit) 2SF is provided so that front door 2bSF can be opened and closed with respect to main body frame 2aSF with its left edge as a swing center. It has been. Although not shown in FIG. 110, a CU is connected to the left side of the S unit 2SF in the same manner as the P unit.

  In S 2SF, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when a game is played on the S platform 2SF, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the S stand 2SF is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout opening.

  Inside the casing of the S unit 2SF, reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from a see-through window provided on the front door 2bSF. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF.

  A touch panel type display 510F is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2LF, 2CF, 2RF of the front door 2bSF. The display 510F is a display corresponding to the P displays 54F, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) similar to the display 54F, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510F is connected to the display control unit 350F of the CU similarly to the display unit 54F of FIG. 38, and is controlled on the CU side. The indicator 510F is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, but is provided at a lower panel portion (at a position lower than the start switch 7SF shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  In addition, the front door 2bSF has a single BET switch 5SF operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) A MAXBET switch 6SF that is operated when the game is started, a start switch 7SF that is operated when the game starts, and stop switches 8LF, 8CF, and 8RF that are operated when the rotations of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped. Yes.

  In the case of playing a game on S units 2SF, first, similarly to P units, after securing game points using adjacent CUs, the number of bets is set using the game points. The game points can be obtained by withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, points, or a stored medal (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use game points, one-sheet BET switch 5SF or MAXBET switch 6SF may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510F is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7SF is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7SF is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8LF, 8CF, 8RF is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, all the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped, so that one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is set to each reel 2LF, 2CF, When the display is stopped as a result of 2RF, a winning occurs, a game point determined according to the winning is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510F is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 35, the S stand 2SF is provided with a counting button 28SF for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, card return button, and replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 38). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display 510F in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted, and the state where the game points are decreased while the points are increased is displayed on the display 510F. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3F, or may be transmitted to the CU 3F as a status information response via the P stand 2F or the S stand (slot machine) 2SF. It may be.

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be determined not to win is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the S stand 2SF when a start operation is detected. Equivalent to the main controller 161F of the base). This determination is made, for example, by drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base gives the player game points according to the type of winning (adds game points).

  The payout control unit of the S platform 2SF is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). This payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hall in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aSF by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of the S stand 2SF is delivered to the hall from the slot machine manufacturer separately from the main body frame 2aSF in a state of being attached to a board mounting board for connecting wiring. The board mounting board is a board corresponding to the game board 26F shown in FIG. 37, and includes a connector similar to the convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F.

  In order to connect a mounting mechanism for mounting the board mounting board and a convex drawer connector on the board mounting board side to a predetermined position (for example, below the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF) in the main body frame 2aSF of the S base 2SF. The connector is provided. The attachment mechanism and the connector have the same structure as the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF and the concave drawer connector 33F shown in FIG. 37, and are devised so that the board attachment board can be easily fixed to the attachment mechanism. The wiring extending from the concave drawer connector is connected to the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF, various operation switches (buttons) and the like.

  The S base 2SF has a configuration for detecting the opening of the front door 2bSF corresponding to the front frame 5F of the P base 2F and detecting the connection between the main body frame 2aSF and the board mounting board. The loop power line 500F The main control board is also connected in series.

  With the S units, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and variable display capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before deriving, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine is configured that includes a derivation control means for performing and a granting means for imparting a game value when the winning occurs.

  FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and their transmission / reception modes. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 111 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 40 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Here, further explanation is omitted.

  As information output to the outside of the P stand 2F, as described above for the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes for the game balls, and the current gaming state A pending storage number signal that can specify the latest pending storage number may be included. The information to be output to the outside of the P stand 2F is not a configuration in which information is output from the information output circuit as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, but is output from the main control unit 161F via the payout control unit 171F. You may make it do.

  As described above, since the game control microcomputer provided on the main control board 16F performs data processing such as addition / subtraction processing, the information on the number of reserved memories is recognized as the latest information. Therefore, a reserved memory number signal that can specify the latest reserved memory number in the current gaming state can be output from the game control microcomputer to the outside via the information output circuit or the payout control microcomputer.

  In addition to the above-described information, the game control microcomputer on the main control board 16F includes a launch stop signal, a radio wave sensor detection signal, a magnet in addition to the information described above. Various information may be transmitted by various signals such as a sensor detection signal, an illegal winning detection signal, and a game state information setting completion signal, and the various information may be managed on the payout control microcomputer side.

  Here, the firing stop signal is a firing stop switch when the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact in the hitting operation handle 25F (a switch for forcibly stopping the firing when operated). When a predetermined firing stop condition is satisfied, such as when the hitting operation handle 25F is not rotated more than a certain rotation angle, or when the CU 3F and the P stand 2F are not electrically connected. Output when judged by the game control microcomputer.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is transmitted to the main control board 16F by the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 163F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves). A sensor error is determined and output based on the determination.

  The magnet sensor detection signal indicates that the magnet sensor (magnet switch) for detecting abnormal magnetism (illegal magnetism) is connected to the main control board 16F (game control microcomputer), and a magnet is used to Based on an illegal game using a magnet such as changing the trajectory, a magnetism sensor signal is input to the main control board 16F based on an illegal game using a magnet, and a magnet sensor error is determined in the game control microcomputer. Is output based on.

  The unauthorized winning detection signal is sent to the winning winning opening of the winning sensor 162F in a state in which the counting winning switch is connected to the main control board 16F and the winning switch is closed. When an illegal winning error is determined by detecting a winning ball in the big winning mouth in the gaming control microcomputer based on the detection signal of the winning sensor for detecting the winning ball of the game, an output is made based on the determination. .

  The game state information setting completion signal is output when setting of various game information (game state information) to be transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is completed when the P table 2F is turned on. Such a game state information setting completion signal is used, for example, as a trigger signal for starting communication between the CU3F side (card unit side) and the P stand 2F side (pachinko gaming machine side).

  In addition to the information as described above, the microcomputer for game control on the main control board 16F from the payout control microcomputer on the payout control board 17F includes the following glass frame / main body frame opening signal, the number of winnings. Various information such as abnormal signal, illegal addition detection signal, radio wave sensor detection signal, proximity sensor abnormal signal, night open detection signal, counting notification request signal, card removal waiting signal, and power saving transition request signal The various information may be managed on the game control microcomputer side.

  The glass frame / main body frame opening signal is generated when the detection signal from the glass door opening detection switch 12F or the front frame opening detection switch 13F is input to the dispensing control board 17F. When the opening of the front frame 5F is determined, the output is made based on the determination.

  The winning number abnormality signal confirms whether the number of winnings per unit time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number in the payout control microcomputer with respect to the number of winnings by the winning detection signal input from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. Whether or not the winning number is abnormal is determined based on the determination, and when it is determined that the winning number is abnormal, an output is made based on the determination.

  The illegal addition detection signal indicates that an illegal addition error is determined by the payout control microcomputer when the payout control board 17F receives a coin addition request from the CU3F in a state other than when the card is inserted into the CU3F. Based on the output.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is a radio wave sensor error in the payout control microcomputer because the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 173F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves) is input to the payout control board 17F. Is determined and output based on the determination.

  Proximity sensor abnormality signal is generated by winning sensor 162F, ball raising switch (upper) 41aF, foul ball detection switch 33AF, out ball detection switch 701F, and shot ball detection switch due to a change in capacitance due to the passage of the ball. It is composed of proximity switches to be detected. For such proximity switches, the dispensing control microcomputer determines whether or not there is an abnormality based on the number of balls detected, and when the abnormality is determined, the determination Is output based on. For example, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the shot of the ball is not detected. On the other hand, when the actually fired ball is collected and detected by the shot ball detecting switch, It is determined that the proximity sensor is abnormal because wrinkles occur in the number of fire balls and recovery balls (out balls).

  The night open detection signal is output when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened as follows. At night when the P platform 2F is turned off, the glass door 6F is detected based on the detection signals output from the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F by the above-described counter operated by the backup power source. The number of times the front frame 5F has been opened is counted. Then, either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened in the payout control microcomputer by the count value of each opening number output from the count counter to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P stand 2F is turned on. Is determined. It is also possible to detect the nighttime opening of only one of the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F and output the nighttime opening detection signal.

  The count notification request signal is output to make a request to notify the count value when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that a count request has been made in response to the operation of the count button. Such a count notification request signal is used, for example, to execute audio output and numerical display related to counting by the main board.

  The card removal waiting signal is output to notify the card return ready state OFF and card removal waiting ON information when the payout control microcomputer determines that the card can be removed by the CU 3F.

  When the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact (for example, when it has not detected for a predetermined period) in the payout control microcomputer, the power saving transition request signal is “0”. When it is determined that a predetermined power saving control transition condition is satisfied, for example, when a card is not inserted into the CU3F or when a variable display is stopped, for example, the brightness of the liquid crystal backlight Is output as an operation request signal for shifting to a power saving state in which predetermined power saving control is performed such as a decrease in light emission and stop of light emission of various lamps.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, an example is shown in which the information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a winning information signal that can identify the winning mouth and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won. Such an external output of the winning information signal may be applied to the P stand 2F.

  In addition, it is possible to transmit various signals such as the reserved memory number signal, the emission stop signal, and the radio wave sensor detection signal described as signals to be transmitted from the game control microcomputer of the P stand 2F to the payout control microcomputer. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above may be applied. In addition, the transmission of various signals such as the glass frame / main body frame opening signal and the winning number abnormality signal described as signals to be transmitted from the payout control microcomputer of the P stand 2F to the game control microcomputer has been described above. You may apply in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) In this embodiment, the addition sequence number and the counting sequence number are defined in the message format as different data, but these may be shared as a request sequence number. In particular, the addition of game balls and the counting of game balls are the opposite processes, so it is unlikely that both processes will occur at the same time. From this point of view, it is possible to reduce the amount of message data by sharing both serial numbers. It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new request is generated until the request sequence number reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the sequence number is updated based on the previously updated value. However, instead of such control, when all the processes corresponding to one request are completed, the request sequence number may be initialized to a predetermined initial value. For example, in the example of FIG. 48, it is conceivable that the counting sequence number included in the last status information response indicating completion of counting is set to a predetermined initial value instead of m + 6.

  Request sequence numbers such as addition sequence numbers and count sequence numbers, and normal sequence numbers are not counted up one by one, but are updated (addition update, subtraction) according to a predetermined rule stored in both P unit 2F and CU3F. Update, update by other arithmetic expressions). In this case, the serial number is not “sequential numbers” such as 1, 2, and 3, but data that is updated based on concepts such as A, B, and C.

  (2) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the gaming system, for example, a game in which there are P reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board that controls the reels. Corresponding to the board, the other configuration corresponds to the front frame of the P units. However, in the S platform, the various detection switches 41aF, 701F, and 33AF, the firing control board 31F, and the firing motor 18F in the front frame shown in FIG. 38 are unnecessary.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in this embodiment, since the function of displaying the dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510F or 29SF.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, point payout operation) from the remaining amount of a prepaid card, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display device 510F or the display device 29SF and to display a number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. In other words, if there is an operation of the single BET switch 5SF, the bet number setting value is incremented by 1, and the credit is decremented by 1. If the MAXBET switch 6SF is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display device 510F or the display device 29SF and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (3) In the present embodiment, game points are added by consuming card power. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (4) In the present embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (5) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may be one using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (6) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (7) In the present embodiment, when an uncounted game point remains when a card return operation is performed, a message prompting for counting is displayed on the display of P units or the CU side. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (8) During the big hit, the judgment reference value for judging that the number of game balls is full may be increased. In other words, the determination reference value for the full tank determination may be different depending on whether or not the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls from rapidly increasing during the big hit, and making a full tank determination immediately to stop firing.

  (9) The number of game balls when a big hit occurs is memorized. During the big hit, even if the criterion value for full tank is exceeded, the increased number of game balls allowed after the big hit has occurred If it is within a value (for example, 1000 balls), it is good also as what does not determine a full tank.

  (10) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function to turn on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and within 1 second from 1 operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (11) “Predetermined processing” of “recording medium processing means for processing so that predetermined processing can be performed using the game point as the holding point when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected” , CU processing when using a card ejected from the CU inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine (processing to withdraw the possessed ball that can be specified by the card and convert it into a gaming ball , Or shared ball processing, or wagon service processing). Alternatively, the “predetermined process” may be a process in which a prize is exchanged by receiving a card with a prize exchange machine for exchanging prizes and consuming the points specified by the card.

  Further, the above-described “recording medium processing operation for processing so that a predetermined process can be performed as a holding point” is, for example, a card return operation. In addition, the “predetermined process” is a process of recording a score so as to be specified on a card inserted in the CU when a card return operation is detected, and returning the card. Here, “recordably specified” means that the score is directly recorded on the card, and the card ID and score are recorded on the server connected to the CU without recording the score on the card. And a method of storing IDs and points in association with each other in the server.

  (12) If a counting operation is performed while the ball is being fired, the counting operation may be invalidated if the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than a reference value. In addition, even when the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number If the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected is less than the reference value, the counting operation may be invalidated.

  Further, whether or not a game is in progress may be determined based on whether or not a ball firing operation has been detected, and the number of in-game balls (floating balls floating in the game area 27F) becomes zero. Whether or not (not in game) or not (in game) may be determined. Further, it is conceivable to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine to invalidate the counting operation during the game is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF are stopped.

  (13) Referring to FIG. 48, the P platform includes a counting ball counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of the counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (14) The display for prompting the counting operation in FIG. 51 may be a display of “Please count because there are game balls left” in the text, or display the count button 28F on the screen and blink. Such a display may be used. In addition, the P stand 2F that has received the card return ready state ON may display the game balls on the game ball number display 29F in a blinking manner, or when the game ball number display 29F is configured by an image display device. Alternatively, the message described as the above embodiment may be displayed on the game ball number display 29F to prompt the counting operation.

  (15) In order to change the number of game points to be converted in one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (16) Depending on the remaining number of game points, when the number of points counted by one short press operation of the counting button is different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (17) When counting game balls (game points) and converting the points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from the speaker 270F. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (18) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on the counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (19) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is the primary station and the gaming machine is the secondary station. The relationship between and may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (20) In this embodiment, game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side. However, game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU side. Then, it may not be stored. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (21) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54F may be similarly performed on the display 312F.

  (22) In CU3F, the stored number of game balls is updated based on the value of the addition ball counter (addition ball count) and the value of the subtraction ball count counter (subtraction ball count) transmitted from the P platform side. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, for hall use). An error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801F).

  (23) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (holding ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (24) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the player is grasping the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the counting operation means detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (25) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the card return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (26) The gaming system according to the present embodiment includes a point use operation means for executing a predetermined point use process using points. Here, the predetermined score use processing includes processing for executing the wagon service, or processing for dividing and sharing the score (held ball) (processing for dividing and transferring the score to another person). It is a concept. The holding point use operation means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote controller that is given to a clerk of the game store to instruct the CU or the gaming machine to execute the point use processing.

  (27) The sequence control shown in FIGS. 42 to 65 is not limited to a transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3F, P stand 2F, S stand 2SF, etc. For example, CU3F, P The present invention may be applied to a transmission / reception sequence between a plurality of gaming machines such as a table 2F, a jet counter, and a POS terminal. 68 and 69 is applied between the CU control unit 323F inside the CU3F and the security chip (SC) 325b, and between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325aF. May be.

  For example, when processing related to a game ball addition request is applied between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b, the CU control unit 323F transmits a game ball addition request message, and consent to this is transmitted. Alternatively, the SC 325bF returns a rejection message via the communication control IC 325aF based on the response on the P platform 2F side.

  When processing related to a game ball addition request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325aF, the security chip (SC) 325b transmits a game ball addition request message via the CU control unit 323F. Then, the communication control IC 325aF returns a consent or refusal message for this based on the response on the P platform 2F side.

  When processing related to the counting request is applied between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b, the counting request message is sent from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit via the communication control IC 325aF based on the request on the P unit 2F side. The CU control unit 323F sends back a consent or rejection message to the 323F.

  When the processing related to the count request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325aF, the communication control IC 325aF transmits a count request message based on the request on the P platform 2F side, The security chip (SC) 325b returns a rejection message based on an instruction from the CU control unit 323F.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID, but instead of or in addition to that, the identity of the player is determined based on the player's fingerprint, retina and other biomass. A determination may be made.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the card ID matches the insertion time is stored as the current score by the CU, but the gaming machine and the CU3F Control is made so that the score transmitted from the gaming machine is stored as the current score as a further condition that the communication has been started until a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has passed since the communication was interrupted. May be. Specifically, a timer for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) after communication between the gaming machine and the CU3F is interrupted is provided in the CU control unit 323F, and at the start of communication between the gaming machine and the CU3F (at the time of recovery). It is determined whether or not the timer is still timed (in a state where time is not up), and on the further condition that it is a result of determination that the timer is timed, the score sent from the gaming machine is the current value of the CU. It controls to memorize as a score.

  Further, instead of the insertion time, the score transmitted from the gaming machine on the condition that the last serial number used between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F coincides may be stored as the current score. .

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are added. It may be controlled to withdraw and add the number of game balls or game points.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is withdrawn within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings) and the corresponding game points are added, the value withdrawn. However, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add game points that are smaller by the amount equivalent to the consumption tax with respect to the value actually withdrawn.

  (32) In this embodiment, the key management server is installed in the key management center that is remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game hall. Thereby, compared with the case where a key management server is installed outside the game hall, it is easier to speed up communication between the CU and the key management server, and the occurrence rate of communication failures can be reduced.

  (33) The CU control unit 323F receives the board security information (including the board authentication key and update information) from the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F. However, instead of this, the board security information is transmitted from the key management server 800F to the CU control unit 323F without using the hall server 801F between the key management server 800F and the CU control unit 323F. For example, it is conceivable that the key management server 800F and the CU are directly connected to each other, or a relay communication device different from the hall server 801F is provided between the key management server 800F and each CU.

  (34) In the above embodiment, the number of balls automatically counted based on the game interruption operation (simple leaving operation or meal break operation) is temporarily added to the holding ball and written to the card. By doing so, the player who interrupted the game returns and then returns to the original CU3F, and the ball is converted into a game ball 125 by the operation of converting the possession ball into a game ball. Shown what can be converted to play games. However, instead, the counting ball automatically counted at the time of the interruption operation is stored in the CU3F as a custody ball (which also stores the C-ID and the insertion time) different from the game ball and the holding ball, and the holding ball is not added. Discontinue processing by ejecting the card without recording the ball. When the discharge card is reinserted, all the custody balls may be automatically converted into P game balls at once and control may be performed. Alternatively, the custody balls in this case are transmitted from the P platform to the CU based on the interruption operation, stored on the CU side or the hall server side, and automatically from the CU or the hall server when the card is inserted again. It is also possible that information on the custody ball is transmitted to the P platform side and stored as a game ball on the P platform side. Further, in this case, when the information on the custody balls is transmitted, it may be transmitted from the CU to the P units as a game ball addition command.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the interruption operation is added to the holding ball and written to the card and then discharged, the interruption flag is recorded on the card. So that you can't exchange prizes with that card. As a method for prohibiting the exchange of prizes as described above, it is also possible to adopt the following method other than using the suspended flag of the card.

  First, when an interruption operation is performed, the information (including the card ID) is transmitted from the CU to the hall server, and the card of the player suspended on the hall server side is stored as an interruption card. At the time of prize exchange, an inquiry is made to the hall server from POS or the like, and the hall server determines whether or not the card used for prize exchange is an interruption card. Alternatively, all interruption card information may be transmitted from the hall server to the POS side in advance. In addition, if the card used for the exchange of the prize is an interrupted card, the exchange of the prize using the card is prohibited.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine determines that the gaming device (CU) is given the game points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion process for all game points is completed (game points = 0). (Processing that accepts a card with a prize exchange machine and consumes the points specified by the card and enables prize exchange, and inserts a card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating a recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the card return button 322F)) for performing the processing of the CU when used in the same manner.

  (36) In the present embodiment, as an example of the game information, the description has been given by taking the ball number, the game ball, the remaining amount of the card, the storage ball, the number of balls information and the game table information. However, the game information includes other information related to the game on the gaming machine. For example, when a player's favorite character selected or customized by the player can be displayed on variable display means (variable display device) such as the variable display device 278F or the display 54F, information that can specify the character Is also included in the game information. Information on the screen design including the character that matches the player's preference is transmitted to the server at the end of the game in association with the player's card ID and stored, for example, when starting a new game. You may make it download from a server to CU or P stand.

  (37) In the game ball number display 29F, a display is made in which the number of balls decreases one by one in conjunction with the ball firing or counting operation. In addition, the game ball number display 29 </ b> F displays that the number of balls increases by one or a predetermined number of units according to a ball lending operation or the like. When the game ball number display 29F is composed of an image display such as a liquid crystal display device, the number of game balls is not simply displayed digitally, but whether the change in the number of game balls is due to a ball or not is counted. Whether it is due to winning, winning a prize, due to savings, or due to a lending operation, an image according to the type is displayed along with the display update of the number of game balls You may make it do.

  In addition, when the counting operation is performed, the game ball number display 29F performs counting display in conjunction with the counting operation, but when the game ball number display 29F is configured by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device. As with the display 54F, while the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof is decreased, an image display in which the number of holding balls is increased may be performed. In this case, as described above as a modification of the display on the display unit 54F, a display in which the data on the number of game balls is converted to data on the number of balls (eg, a bar graph display) The number of game balls and the number of balls are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of balls is increased while decreasing the number of balls, or the display of moving a part of the number of balls to the number of balls is repeated. It is possible.

  (38) As shown in FIG. 51, in the above embodiment, the card return operation detected in the state where the game balls remain is counted by detecting the counting operation in a predetermined waiting period. It is activated after completion and shifts to card return processing.

  On the other hand, as a process in the case where the counting operation is not detected even after the standby period elapses, for example, the previous card return operation may be invalidated. In this case, since the counting operation is not detected even when the standby period has elapsed, the fact that the card returning operation has been invalidated may be displayed on the display on the CU 3F or P stand 2F side.

  Alternatively, the card return operation detected with the game balls remaining may be invalidated regardless of whether the counting operation is detected in a predetermined waiting period. In this case, the card return process may be executed again by executing the card return operation after counting all the game balls in accordance with the counting operation after the card return operation is detected. Alternatively, when the counting of all game balls is completed, or before and after that, a display for prompting a card return operation may be performed on the display on the CU 3F or P stand 2F side.

  In the present embodiment, if even one game ball remains when a card return operation is detected, the processing shown in FIG. 51 is executed. However, the processing shown in FIG. 51 may be executed when the number of game balls remaining when the card return operation is detected is a predetermined number of two or more.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, the counting display speed of the game balls may be made faster than usual. For example, in a normal counting operation, a display in which game balls are counted one by one is displayed, while in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a display in which a plurality of game balls are counted together, or for all games It is conceivable to display such that balls are counted together.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, not all game balls are counted, but a larger number of game balls than the normal counting operation are counted. It is good. For example, normally, a maximum of 100 game balls are counted as one counting operation, but in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a larger number of 200 gaming balls are counted. You may be made to do. Even in this case, when there is a card return operation in advance, the number of counting operations for counting all game balls is reduced compared to when there is no card return operation, and counting of all game balls is completed early. Can do.

  Also, if a card return operation is detected with game balls remaining, even if no counting operation is detected, start counting all game balls, and then proceed to card return processing. Also good. In this case, when counting of all game balls is started, the fact that counting of all game balls is started may be displayed on the P stand 2F or CU 3F. Alternatively, a message for confirming whether or not counting of all game balls may be started is displayed, and a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the touch panel of P stand 2F or CU3F, a card return operation again, etc.) is detected. It is also possible to start counting all game balls on the condition.

  In addition, the card return operation detected during the game (during ball launching) may be invalidated, but the card return operation is not invalidated, and the counting operation during the game is performed on the P platform side. The counting process based on the above may be invalidated.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, CU3F determines whether the number of game balls is 0, when card return operation is detected. However, such a determination may be made by the P base 2F. In this case, for example, when a card return operation is detected, data indicating the presence of a card return operation is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F, and the number of game balls stored in the P stand 2F that receives it is 0. It is determined whether or not. If it is 0, the number of game balls is 0 or data that permits card return is sent to CU3F, while if it is not 0, the number of game balls is not 0, waiting for card return or prohibition of card return. The indicated data is transmitted to the CU3F.

  In the above embodiment, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P table 2F determines whether or not a card return operation is detected before the operation is detected. However, such determination means may be provided in the CU3F. In this case, for example, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P base 2F transmits data indicating that to the CU 3F. In response, the CU3F may determine whether or not there has been a card return operation within a predetermined period before receiving the data.

  In the above-described embodiment, the P table 2F detects the counting operation, while the CU 3F detects the card return operation, while the CU 3F detects the counting operation, while the P table 2F detects the card returning operation. Alternatively, both operations may be detected by the P stand 2F or the CU 3F. Further, both the counting button and the card card return button may be attached to the CU3F or the P stand 2F, and one of them may be the CU3F or the P stand 2F.

  (39) The presence or absence of a change in the number of holding balls or game balls is checked on the CU or P stand. If the number of holding balls or game balls does not change for a predetermined period, the fact is notified on the CU or P stand. You may do it. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). This makes it easier for the store clerk to grasp, for example, a table that has been abandoned while the remaining few balls are left unattended.

  (40) Alternatively, when a player's game ball changes even though the card is not inserted into the CU, the fact may be notified by the CU or P platform. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). Thereby, for example, after the game is finished and the card is discharged, it becomes easy for the store clerk to grasp the stand where the ball caught on the game board wins and the game ball is left as it is paid out.

  (41) In the present embodiment, the CU 3F compares and determines the previous game table information and the latest game table information from the P table 2F with the data stored on its own, and the data on the P table 2F side is not improperly padded. Confirm that the data is correct. If an error is determined on the CU3F side, such a situation is simply caused by the exchange of the CU3F (regular data to be compared is not stored in the CU3F after the exchange), and is based on fraud. Since there is a possibility that it is not a thing, the store clerk confirms the error and cancels the error with a portable terminal device such as a remote control. However, when the CU 3F has been replaced with a new one in this way, the CU 3F may not perform the above error determination at all. Alternatively, the above error determination function may not be provided in the CU3F regardless of whether or not it has been replaced.

  (42) In the present embodiment, a card, which is a recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player, is inserted into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F at the start of the game, and is removed from the card insertion / discharge slot 309F after the game ends. The configuration has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card may be placed on the card reading unit at the start of the game and removed from the card reading unit after the game ends. In other words, the recording medium receiving means for receiving the recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player may be attached to the recording medium receiving means at the start of the game and removed from the recording medium receiving means after the game ends.

  (43) In the present embodiment, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the information waiting for card removal, and the P stand 2F that has received the notification of the information indicates that “please remove the card” 278F. The configuration for notifying the card removal such as displaying on the card has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CU 3F displays “please remove the card” on the display 54F and / or the display 312F while notifying the P stand 2F of the information waiting for the card removal. It may be configured to notify the card removal on the CU side.

  (44) In the present embodiment, the P stand 2F receives the status information request command including ON waiting for card removal = ON until the status information request command including OFF waiting for card removal is received. The configuration for continuing the notification of sampling has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the P stand 2F is waiting for card removal = after receiving a status information request command including ON, even if a card removal notification is given for a certain period of time, it is still waiting for card removal = The card removal notification may be intermittently performed after the status information request command including ON is received until the status information request command including OFF is received = OFF.

  (45) In the present embodiment, in the counting history sequence, the P table 2F receives the “store code” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F when the card is received and the “store code” held by the P table 2F. In the above description, the count history recovery process is performed when they match, and the count history recovery process is not performed when they do not match. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the counting history sequence, the P table 2F uses the “store code” and “SC substrate ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F when the card is received, and the P board 2F. You may comprise so that a match determination with the "store code" and "SC board ID" which are hold | maintained may be performed. Further, the P store 2F does not determine whether or not the “store code” matches in the counting history sequence, and the “store code” and the “store code” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F when the card is received when the recovery request is received. At least one of “SC board ID” is matched with at least one of “store code” and “SC board ID” held on P platform 2F, and if they match, recovery processing is performed. In the case of disagreement, the game may be prohibited from being continued.

  (46) An IC tag may be attached to the pachinko ball. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify which pachinko ball is at the time of launch and at the time of passing through any one of the winning areas (winning entrance or gate). For this reason, in the counting process, it is possible to identify the correspondence relationship between the firing intensity T of the same pachinko ball identified by the IC tag and the passing area. As a result, it is possible to more accurately determine which region the pachinko ball tends to pass according to the launch intensity. Furthermore, by associating the ball unit price (see FIG. 42) transmitted from the CU3F with the pachinko ball with the IC tag, it is possible to change the unit price for each ball, and the remaining number of balls and the estimated time Accordingly, the ball unit price can be changed flexibly and the degree of freedom of the game by the player can be expanded.

  (47) If the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed by a player, the above-described firing intensity correction process cannot be performed. Therefore, it may be detected and notified that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed. Further, when the firing intensity is stable at a constant value, it may be determined that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed.

  (48) For example, whether or not the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F can be detected by a touch sensor.

  Therefore, for example, when it is detected that the player is not touching the hitting ball operating handle 25F, the above-described firing intensity correction process may be performed.

  Further, in the firing abnormality determination process, when it is detected that the player does not touch the hitting operation handle 25F and it is detected that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed, it is determined that there is a launching abnormality. It may be.

  (49) In the present embodiment, the hall control 900 acquires the information on the P base 2F via the CU 3F. However, the hall control 900 directly receives the information on the P base 2F from the P base 2F without passing through the CU 3F. The structure which acquires may be sufficient.

  (50) In the present embodiment, when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of the CU 3F is the card insertion state, the P base 2F transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of the CU 3F is the card insertion state, a warning is displayed on the display 54F or the like, or notification is given to the host server. May also be notified.

  (51) In this embodiment, when “Closed” is set, a card ID = 0 and a card insertion time = 0 for a gaming machine in which no card is inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2F The configuration is described in which a counting process is performed in which it is assumed that a virtual card is inserted, and the remaining game balls are counted, stored in the card, and returned. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the card ID of the virtual card that is considered to be inserted is counted as the card ID of the card that was inserted immediately before closing, and the remaining game balls are inserted immediately before closing. The configuration may be such that it automatically associates with the card that has been stored.

  (52) In the present embodiment, when the recovery request 2 command is transmitted to the P base 2F even though it is determined that the recovery request is not required by the CU 3F, the recovery determination of the recovery process is again performed by the P base 2F. A configuration has been described in which processing NG is notified to the CU 3F when it is not necessary. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is unnecessary to perform the recovery process determination again on the P platform 2F, a warning is displayed on the display 54F or the like, or a notification to that effect is sent to the host server. You may do it.

  (53) In the present embodiment, even if the key management server 800F transmits the health check request command and does not reach the CU control unit 323F, for example, for 10 days, it is determined that the health check request time limit is exceeded, The configuration in which the timed operation function of the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is invalidated has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of days until the timed operation function of the CU 3F or P stand 2F is invalidated is displayed on the display 54F, or the timed operation function having a plurality of restriction levels is stepwise. It may be invalidated.

  (54) In the present embodiment, the setting and release control of the alarm setting has been described in the relationship between the alarm setting based on fraud to the P unit 2F and the alarm setting based on the P unit line disconnection. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to alarm setting setting and release control in relation to the alarm setting based on fraud on the P base 2F and another alarm setting based on other fraud on the P base 2F. The alarm setting may be applied to the setting and cancellation of the alarm setting in three or more relationships between the alarm setting based on a plurality of frauds on the P unit 2F and the alarm setting based on the disconnection of the P unit.

  (55) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the security-related information is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be stored in a register (for example, data reception register 723bF) in the communication control circuit 171bF. As a result, the security-related information is stored in the communication control circuit 171bF while being encrypted, and the security is further improved.

  (56) In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, the P base itself determines that the P base 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU 3DF in the past, The configuration in which the flag indicating the determination result is transmitted to the commercial CU3F and detected by the SC325bF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The P base itself determines that the P base 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU 3DF in the past, and the P base itself detects and notifies. Also in the configuration, the configuration may be such that it is detected by the SC 325bF of the CU3F based on the identification ID, based on the identification ID, that the P board 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU3DF.

  (57) In the above-described embodiment, authentication is performed using various authentication keys, but authentication may be performed using, for example, an authentication ID instead of the various authentication keys.

  (58) You may comprise the above-mentioned indicator 54F and 510F with a display with a touch panel. Further, the information transmitted / received between the P platform and the CU is not limited to that described in the above-described embodiment, and it is a game that determines what information is output from the P platform to the CU. You may enable it to perform input setting by touch operation with the touch panel of the display units 54F and 510F.

  Also, in the S stand 2SF, the information output from the S stand 2SF is converted and transmitted to Hallcon in the same manner as the P stand 2F described above. As information to be converted, for example, a big bonus prize or a regular bonus prize is given. And winning information such as various small role winnings, information indicating that the replay time is in progress, the number of additions and subtractions in FIG. Further, the information to be converted may be the number of coins to be paid out when coins are paid out with winning.

(59) When the payout control unit 171F receives the value (= 63) in which the round flag is raised, the abnormality control process is executed by adopting one or two or more of those listed in the following ac You may control as follows.
a Display unit (for example, a 7-segment display 50F and a variable display device that variably displays identification information (design)) by the payout control unit 171F or the main control unit 161F that receives abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F Is displayed.
b CU3F that has received the abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F performs abnormality notification such as an error number.
c An abnormality notification such as an error number is performed in a host device such as a hall management computer that has received the abnormality information from the CU3F.

  (60) In the present embodiment, information specifying the front frame 5F, storage information, resale information, disposal information, and the like are included as history information of the front frame 5F stored in association with the payout control security chip ID in the payout side table. An example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, maintenance information, repair information, and the like may be included as history information of the front frame 5F. Similarly, in the present embodiment, information specifying the game board 26F, storage information, resale information, discard information, and the like are stored as history information of the game board 26F stored in the main control side table in association with the main control security chip ID. Examples included are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, maintenance information, repair information, and the like may be included as the history information of the game board 26F.

  (61) In the present embodiment, after a manufacturer, a warehouse, or the like completes operations such as shipping, installation, and storage, necessary information (for example, shown in FIG. 107, for example, from a terminal connected to the history management center 800AF). The delivery side table and the main control side table are updated by inputting the shipping date, installation date and time, removal date, sales company name, and disposal date). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a manufacturer or a warehouse company fills in application documents with necessary information and sends the information to the history management center 800AF. The payout side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting necessary information from a terminal or the like. Note that a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF is also a terminal connected directly to the machine history management center 800AF (for example, an internal terminal in the machine history management center 800AF) via a communication line. It may be a terminal (for example, a terminal of a warehouse company or a second-hand company connected via the Internet).

  (62) In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the payout side table and the main control side table are stored in one large capacity storage device 8005F. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the payout side table and the main control side table are stored separately in a plurality of large capacity storage devices, the large capacity storage device that stores the payout side table and the main control side table are stored. It may be divided into a mass storage device. Further, the payout side table and the main control side table stored in the large-capacity storage device can erase the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F for each security chip ID. Even if it is associated with a pair of security chip IDs, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F can be deleted separately for each security chip ID. Thereby, even if it is the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (the period used is long compared with the front frame 5F) from which the period used is different, it can delete separately, respectively, and it can manage appropriately, respectively. it can.

  (63) In the present embodiment, an example has been shown in which a manufacturer other than the hall, a warehouse company, etc. update the payout side table and the main control side table by inputting necessary information to the machine history management center 800AF. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the payout side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting information necessary for the hall itself to the machine history management center 800AF.

  (64) In this embodiment, when a second-hand trader resells the front frame 5F and the game board 26F to another hall and installs them, the resale information is stored as history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when moving to another hole in the same group as the hole in which the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed (for example, a hole with the same corporate code), the front frame 5F and the game board The movement information may be stored in the history information as a simple movement of 26F (management state (status) from “installation” to “installation”). That is, even if the installation of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F moves between holes of the same corporate code, it is not determined as abnormal. In addition, if the movement of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is permitted between halls of the same corporate code and within the same prefecture, and if it moves to other prefectures between halls of the same corporate code, the same processing as resale is performed. May be.

  (65) In the present embodiment, the machine history management center 800AF is set as follows, for example. In the machine history management center 800AF, a user registered in the system and authenticated by clear authentication is logged into the system. Authentication at login is as follows: (a) The specified user ID exists in the system. (B) The specified user is within the account expiration date. (C) The specified user is not account-locked. (D) The entered password matches the password of the specified user ID. (E) If the current password is not within the validity period, the user is logged in, but only the user's own password change and logout can be used, and a message is displayed indicating that the password needs to be changed. If the password is changed, log out to confirm the use of the new password.

  When the authentication is successful, the history management center 800AF clears the number of login failures and the continuous login error date / time of the user. On the other hand, the history management center 800AF records the number of login failures when the authentication fails or when the user actually exists. Each time the number of login failures reaches [the maximum number of login attempts] (when it becomes an integer multiple), the date and time when the account is locked is set.

  The history management center 800AF updates / sets the password expiration date when (a) a new user is registered, (b) when the password is cleared, and (c) when the user changes the password. The updated / set password is valid from that point until the [Password Validity Period] elapses.

  If the authentication fails [the maximum number of login attempts] in the same session, the history management center 800AF transitions to the login NG screen instead of the login screen and does not attempt to log in.

  The history management center 800AF warns that at the time of login, the password may expire if the password of the user expires within the [password expiration warning period]. The warning is displayed on the login completion screen, for example, but if there is no message to be displayed on the login completion screen, the login completion screen is not displayed and the screen transits to the HOME menu.

  The machine history management center 800AF determines that (a) the number of failed login attempts by a user exceeds the [number of failed user login failures] (permanent account lock state), or (b) ] Has not passed (temporary account lock state), lock account.

  The history management center 800AF updates / sets the account expiration date when (a) a new user is registered or (b) the validity period is updated from the user information screen. The account can be used during the period from the account activation start date to the account activation end date.

  The history management center 800AF sets, for example, 20 as the maximum number of accounts that can be generated at one time at the time of initial introduction. Here, [the maximum number of login attempts] is the number of times the account is locked for a certain period of time due to consecutive failed login attempts, and is set to, for example, 5 times at the time of initial introduction. [User Invalidation Login Failure Count] is the number of times the account is permanently locked due to consecutive login attempt failures, and is 100, for example, at the time of initial introduction. [Login attempt refusal time] is a period in which the account is locked for a certain period of time due to failed login attempts, and is 30 minutes at the time of initial introduction. [Password Validity Period] is a password validity period set when the password is changed, and is 90 days at the time of initial introduction. [Password Expiration Warning Period] is a period in which an account password is about to expire, and is 14 days at the time of initial introduction.

  The machine history management center 800AF sets the minimum number of characters of a password to 8 characters, for example, at the time of initial introduction, and sets the number of generations (including the current) to prevent re-use of passwords to, for example, 3 generations at the time of initial introduction. The history management center 800AF is registered on the condition that the operator information of the corresponding user is registered in order to register the user information. The business operator information includes attribute information such as the business type and address of each business operator involved in the work of the history management center 800AF.

  The machine history management center 800AF cannot basically cancel the management state (status) of the gaming machine after input, and if an error occurs due to an erroneous operation or the like, a comment is entered in the “total machine history remarks column”. Make it clear so that others can understand. However, since there is a possibility of erroneous insertion, it is possible to cancel only the status entered from the game machine status update screen. When revocation is possible, control is performed by authority so that only a limited number of people can perform revocation. Further, when searching the machine history in order to change the management state (status) of the gaming machine, the machine history management center 800AF searches only for the latest management state (status) of the gaming machine.

The machine history management center 800AF manages the types of data and the retention periods for each type as follows, for example.
(1) Account-related data (for example, business operator information, account information, etc.): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion, and physical deletion is not performed.
(2) Master information such as gaming machine model (for example, gaming machine model master): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion, and physical deletion is not performed.
(3) Information that is the basis of machine history management (for example, gaming machine chip shipment information, gaming machine shipment information, etc.): Basically, changes can be made until management is started, but thereafter editing is impossible. , Manage permanently.
(4) Machine history information (for example, history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F): Since it is basically input of fact information, changes after input are not allowed and are managed permanently.
(5) Information notified from the card unit key management center (for example, fraud detection, etc.): Information detected by the system, and is not allowed to be changed and managed permanently.
(6) Input journals to the system (for example, Web input log, online input log, system linkage input file, etc.): 14 days are stored for each type of input and each node.
(7) Output journal from system (for example, Web output log, online output log, system transmission file, etc.): 7 days are kept for each type of output and for each node.
(8) Record of business communication of concentration / distribution (for example, distribution schedule, etc.): Information is retained for about 7 days.
(9) System temporary file (for example, CSV upload file): Deleted after application behavior. However, it is deleted when it is confirmed that the cleaning batch is unnecessary in consideration of abnormal termination.
(10) Model information that has not been updated for a long period of time (for example, model information that has not been updated for a long period of time): Holds two generations.

  In the history management center 800AF, information on the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which the relationship between the management state (status) before the update and the management state (status) after the update becomes abnormal with respect to the abnormality in the management state (status). Can be extracted, or only the information can be output to a file. Therefore, based on the information output in the file, it is possible to notify the user of management status (status) update omission and to update the management status (status) correctly. It should be noted that a user whose management status (status) is not updated may not only be contacted but also interviewed to confirm the correct management status (status) and take a response. In addition, the machine history management center 800AF performs notification such as contacting all of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that are currently in an abnormal management state (status). In addition, the latest information (at the time of file output) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that have become abnormal can be downloaded from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF.

  In the history management center 800AF, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F for which the management status (status) has not been updated for a long period of time becomes a management status (status) other than “discard” or “other”. It is possible to extract only the information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, or to output only the information to a file. For abnormalities in which the management state (status) has not been updated for a long time, information at the time of processing is extracted by batch processing and downloaded from a terminal connected to the history management center 800AF. In addition, a threshold for the maximum number of files (at the time of initial construction: 100,000 records) is set for one file to be downloaded, and when the threshold is exceeded, output is performed to another file. Furthermore, when downloading a file, the results of processing on the same day are collected and output as a compressed file.

  (66) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the removal information is input to the history management center 800AF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and used movement information, discard information, trade-in information, and the like are stored in the history management center 800AF. When the information is input, the removal information may be automatically registered in the history management center 800AF. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to manage the history of the gaming machine by assuming that it has been removed from the hall, and to reduce the burden of inputting the removal information from the hall to the history management system.

  (67) In the present embodiment, a configuration is shown in which shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line after a gaming machine manufacturer ships a gaming machine to a hall. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may also be adopted in which shipping information is automatically registered in the machine history management center 800AF when the gaming machine manufacturer inputs information for shipping gaming machines to the hall. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the shipping state history from being forgotten without being registered.

  (68) In the present embodiment, when a game machine including the front frame 5F and the game board 26F constituting the P stand 2F installed in the hall is installed in the hall, the enclosed circulation pachinko machine (P stand 2F) shipped by the game machine manufacturer The history management center 800AF stores the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified from the P table 2F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in each, and is notified from the stored information and the P table 2F. Checking with game machine installation information. If the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal as a result of the collation, for example, an error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or a display 312F, or an error has occurred in the hall management computer or the hall server 801F. The error notification signal is transmitted, and the abnormality is notified. However, the machine history management center 800AF is not limited to the configuration for notifying the abnormality as a result of the collation, but the P frame 2F or the front frame 5F constituting the P table 2F and the game board 26F determined to be abnormal. It may be configured to prohibit gaming. The machine history management center 800AF may be configured to temporarily allow a game on the P table 2F for a certain period of time even if it is determined to be abnormal, so as not to hinder the hall business activities.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine, 8a 1st special symbol display, 8b 2nd special symbol display, 9 production | presentation display apparatus, 13 1st start winning opening, 14 2nd starting winning opening, 20a 1st special variable winning ball apparatus, 20b Second special variable winning ball apparatus, 31 Game control board (main board), 56 CPU, 560 Game control microcomputer, 80 stage control board, 100 stage control microcomputer, 101 stage control CPU, 109 VDP, 2F Pachinko Game machine, 2SF slot machine, 3F card unit, 16F main control board, 17F payout control board, 26F game board, 54F, 312F display, 309F card insertion / discharge port, 319F replay button, 320F IR light receiving unit, 321F rental Button, 322F return button, 161F main control unit, 25F display control unit, 171F dispensing control unit, 323F CU control unit.

Claims (1)

A game board that changes the variable winning means that can be changed between the first state advantageous to the player and the second state disadvantageous to the player to the first state based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. There,
The variable winning means includes a first variable winning means and a second variable winning means,
The first specific gaming state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state for the first period is different from the normal gaming state after the variable winning means is changed to the first state for the second period shorter than the first period. A second specific gaming state that is controlled to a gaming state, and a special gaming state that is controlled to a gaming state before the variable winning means is changed to the first state after the variable winning means is changed to the first state for the second period. A game state control means that can be controlled
A signal output means for outputting a signal capable of specifying a winning means in which a game medium has won among winning means including the variable winning means and a winning number;
The gaming state control means includes
When controlling to the second specific gaming state and controlling to the special gaming state, one of the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means is changed to the second period. Change to the first state,
In the case of controlling to the first specific gaming state, after changing one of the first variable winning means or the second variable winning means to the first state during the first period, The game board, wherein the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are changed to a first state in a predetermined order.

Images